009-2003-294 Install Test and Turn Up PDF

MULTISERVICE DENSE WAVE DIVISION MULTIPLEXING (DWDM) TRANSPORT PLATFORM
ONLINE
METRO
Release 6.1
INSTALLATION, TURN-UP, AND TEST MANUAL

CIENA Part Number: 009-2003-294 November 3, 2003 Revision A - Change 1
CIENA CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
LEGAL NOTICES THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND TRADE SECRET INFORMATION OF CIENA CORPORATION AND ITS RECEIPT OR POSSESSION DOES NOT CONVEY ANY RIGHTS TO REPRODUCE OR DISCLOSE ITS CONTENTS, OR TO MANUFACTURE, USE, OR SELL ANYTHING THAT IT MAY DESCRIBE. REPRODUCTION, DISCLOSURE, OR USE IN WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SPECIFIC WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION OF CIENA CORPORATION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN. EVERY EFFORT HAS BEEN MADE TO ENSURE THAT THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS COMPLETE AND ACCURATE AT THE TIME OF PRINTING; HOWEVER, THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE. Copyright 2003 CIENA Corporation Unpublished All Rights Reserved The material contained in this document is also protected by copyright laws of the United States of America and other countries. It may not be reproduced or distributed in any form by any means, altered in any fashion, or stored in a data base or retrieval system, without express written permission of the CIENA Corporation. Required Customer Information Security CIENA cannot be responsible for unauthorized use of equipment and will not make allowance or credit for unauthorized use or access. Contacting CIENA Corporate Headquarters 410-694-5700 www.ciena.com
Customer Technical Support/Warranty In North America In Europe In Asia Sales and General Information In North America In Europe In Asia In Latin America Training and Documentation Training Documentation 877-CIENA-TD (243-6283) or 410-694-8120 877-CIENA-TD (243-6283) or 410-694-8125 E-mail: E-mail: techtng@ciena.com techpubs@ciena.com 1-800-CIENA24 (243-6224) +44 (0)208 7506428 +81 3 3248 4680 410-694-5700 410-694-5700 +44-207-012-5500 (UK) +81-3-3248-4680 (Japan) 561-620-1925 E-mail: E-mail: E-mail: E-mail: E-mail: E-mail: E-mail: E-mail: north.america.support@ciena.com europe.support@ciena.com CIENA24@ciena.com sales@ciena.com sales@ciena.com sales@ciena.com sales@ciena.com sales@ciena.com
For additional office locations and phone numbers, please visit the CIENA web site at: www.ciena.com.
ONLINE Metro Platform
PREFACE
DISCLAIMER
Portions of this document are intended solely as an outline of methodologies to be followed during the installation, turn-up, and test of the ONLINE Metro Multiservice Dense Wave Division Multiplexing (DWDM) Transport Platform. It is not intended as a step-by-step guide or a complete set of all procedures necessary and sufficient to complete installation, turn-up and testing of the ONLINE Metro Platform.
While every effort has been made to ensure that this document is complete and accurate at the time of printing, the information that it contains is subject to change. CIENA is not responsible for any additions to or alterations of the original document. Networks vary widely in their configurations, topologies, and traffic conditions. This document is intended as a general guide only. It has not been tested for all possible applications, and it may not be complete or accurate for some situations.
Procedures and information contained in this document for which this disclaimer applies are preceded by the Disclaimer Banner, shown below.
R E F E R T O D I S C L A I M E R I N P R E F A C E !
Users of this document are urged to heed warnings interspersed throughout the document, such as traffic disruption warnings.
COMPLIANCE INFORMATION
Food and Drug Administration (FDA) Laser Safety Warning
This product contains a laser diode. CIENA Corporation strongly recommends that users, maintenance, and service personnel comply with the following standards and regulations in the design, modification, operation, maintenance, an service of lasers and fiber-optic devices:
Jurisdiction Federal, US Federal, US International International International
Type Regulation Guidelines Standard Standard Standard
Title FDA 21 CFR 1040.10/.11 OSHA ANSI Z136 series IEC-825 series EN-60825
It is further recommended that the owner of this equipment determine and ensure conformance with any specific and applicable local regulations.
LASER RADIATION EXPOSURE

Warning: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Installation, Turn-up, and Test Manual September 30, 2003 - Revision A 009-2003-294

Class I Laser Product Notice
The CIENA Corporation ONLINE Metro Platform product is a Class 1 Laser product as identified by US FDA/CDRH 21CFR1040.10/.11; Class 1 Laser product as defined by IEC825/EN-60825; and OFCS SG1 as defined by ANSI Z136.1/.2/
Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC): Interference

Every effort has been made to ensure that this equipment is designed to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, as described in the FCC Rules. Equipment limitations are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment, if not installed and used properly, and in accordance with guidelines established by CIENA Corporation may cause interference with other communications equipment. Operations of this equipment in a residential environment may cause interference and is the responsibility of the user to correct the interference at his own expense.
Environmental Impact Statement

CIENA equipment contains no hazardous materials as defined by the United States Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA). CIENA recommends that all failed product be returned to CIENA for failure analysis and proper disposal.
Toxic Emissions
CIENA equipment releases no toxic emissions.
Telcordia Document Standards

The format and structure of this document is derived from the Telcordia Generic Requirements for SupplierProvided Documentation, GR-454-CORE.
TRADEMARK ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
u u
CIENA is a registered trademark of CIENA Corporation. ONLINE Metro Multiservice Dense Wave Division Multiplexing (DWDM) Transport Platform is a trademark of CIENA Corporation. Windows 95/98/2000 and Windows NT are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation. Microsoft is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. UNIX is a registered trademark licensed exclusively through X/Open Company, Ltd. Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation. Sun, Sun Microsystems, JAVA, Java Secure Socket Extension, and JAVAX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. or other countries. This product includes code licensed from RSA Data Security.
u u u
ii
ONLINE Metro Platform RELEASE NOTES AND DOCUMENT UPDATES

The hard copy and Compact Disc Read Only Memory (CD-ROM) versions of this document are revised only at major releases and, therefore, may not always contain the latest product information. As needed, Software Release Documents (SRDs), Hardware Release Documents (HRDs), Application Notes, Field Service Bulletins (FSBs), and/or Document Maintenance Bulletins (DMBs) will be provided between major releases to describe any new information or document changes. The latest online version of this document and all release notes can be accessed via the CIENA web site at http://www.ciena.com.
PRINTING HISTORY
The following information lists the printing history of this document. Issue/Revision 009-2002-620, Revision A 009-2003-077, Revision A 009-2003-294, Revision A Release Date January 2003 April 2003 First printing Second Printing Content Description
September 2003 Third Printing
RELATED DOCUMENTATION
All CIENA documentation is available in both hard copy and on CD-ROM. The following list provides a brief description of the related documents. Additional supporting documentation is available through the CIENA web site at http://www.ciena.com.
u
ONLINE Metro Multiservice Dense Wave Division Multiplexing (DWDM) Transport Platform System Description Manual ONLINE Metro Multiservice Dense Wave Division Multiplexing (DWDM) Transport Platform Alarm and Trouble Clearing Manual ONLINE Metro Multiservice Dense Wave Division Multiplexing (DWDM) Transport Platform ONLINE Metro Node Installer User Manual ONLINE Metro Multiservice Dense Wave Division Multiplexing (DWDM) Transport Platform CLI Reference Manual ONLINE Metro Multiservice Dense Wave Division Multiplexing (DWDM) Transport Platform CLI User Manual ONLINE Metro Multiservice Dense Wave Division Multiplexing (DWDM) Transport Platform SNMP Reference Manual ONLINE Metro Multiservice Dense Wave Division Multiplexing (DWDM) Transport Platform Maintenance and Upgrade Manual ONLINE Metro Multiservice Dense Wave Division Multiplexing (DWDM) Transport Platform Software Release Documents (SRDs) ONLINE Metro Multiservice Dense Wave Division Multiplexing (DWDM) Transport Platform TL1 Administration and Reference Manual ONLINE Metro Multiservice Dense Wave Division Multiplexing (DWDM) Transport Platform Engineering and Planning Manual ONLINE Metro Multiservice Dense Wave Division Multiplexing (DWDM) Transport Platform Craft Interface Terminal (CIT) User Manual
iii

u
LightWorks ON-Center Management Suite Metro Transport Manager CORBA Gateway Reference Manual LightWorks ON-Center Management Suite Metro Transport Manager Netcool Gateway Reference Manual LightWorks ON-Center Management Suite Metro Transport Manager (MTM) Software Administration Manual LightWorks ON-Center Management Suite Metro Transport Manager (MTM) Software User Manual LightWorks ON-Center Management Suite Metro Transport Manager TL1 Concentrator Gateway Manual LightWorks ON-Designer ONLINE Metro Designer User Manual
Related SRDs are available from the CIENA Training and Documentation web site.
DOCUMENT ORDERING INFORMATION

To order additional documentation, the user may contact the local sales representative or CIENA through the contact numbers and/or e-mail addresses listed on the back of the cover.
DOCUMENT COMMENTS
CIENA appreciates all comments that will help us improve our documentation quality. The user can submit comments through our web site (http://www.ciena.com) or with the Documentation Improvement Request form included with this document.
ADDITIONAL PRODUCT INFORMATION

Additional product information can be obtained by contacting the local sales representative or CIENA through the contact numbers and/or e-mail addresses listed on the back of the cover.
iv
TOC
ONLINE Metro Platform TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i LIST OF FIGURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii LIST OF TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 How to Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Before Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Site Survey Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 General Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Voltage Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 General Static Electricity Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 General Laser Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 General Optical Fiber Handling Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 General Fiber Break and Damaged Fiber Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 General Circuit Pack Handling Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 General Circuit Pack Storage Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Environmental Impact Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 CHAPTER 2 SITE PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 About the ONLINE Metro Platform system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1 Power and Grounding Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Rack Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Unpacking and Verifying System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 CHAPTER 3 SHELF AND TRAY INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Shelf Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Shelf Compatibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Shelf Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Shelf Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Installation, Turn-up, and Test Manual September 30, 2003 - Revision A 009-2003-294
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC
Shelf Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Connecting the System Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Installing Fuse or Circuit Breaker Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Backplane Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Installing a Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Telect Tray Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Dispersion Compensation Module Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Verifying Ground, Supply Voltage, and Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10 Overview of Power Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Connecting Power Input Cables to -48 VDC Power Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Connecting Power Input Cables to the 19V and 23V Shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Shelf Cooling Equipment Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Installing Assemblies in the Blower-Air Plenums (19V or 23V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Installing Cooling Fan Trays (19V or 23V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Air Inlet Filter (19V or 23V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Verifying Fan Tray Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 CHAPTER 4 INSTALLING CIRCUIT PACKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1 Shelf Backplane Connectors and CP Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1 Circuit Pack Slot Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2 Inserting Circuit Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Circuit Pack Latching Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Main Shelf Circuit Pack Latching Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Additional Expansion Shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9 CHAPTER 5 CABLE AND FIBER MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Connecting Fibers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Guidelines for Handling and Working with Fibers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Use of PADs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Dual MU Bulkhead Connector Convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2 Managing Fibers and Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Fiber Management Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Connecting Circuit Pack Fibers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
vi
TOC
CHAPTER 6 PROVISIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Task Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Verify Site Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Verify ONLINE Metro CIT Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Initializing the NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Initializing the NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Provisioning Circuit Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15 Provisioning Circuit Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-15 Provisioning Line Circuit Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Adding a Line Card to the Main Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 Provisioning AMP Circuit Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17 Provisioning BWDM Circuit Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 Provisioning CWDM Circuit Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-20 Provisioning WCI Circuit Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22 Configuring OC-48 STMX and STEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 Provision Gigabit-Rate Data Mux (GRDM and GRDMII) CPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28 Assign Line-side OC-48 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28 Adding a WCI Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28 Add GRDM and GRDMII CPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-30 Creating GRDMII ONWAVE Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-35 Overhead Provisioning on GRDMII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40 Configuring DCC On GRDMII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41 Configuring PPP On GRDMII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42 Set Fault Propagation Mode On GRDM And GRDMII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43 Provisioning a WCI10G-LAN Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-44 Provisioning Splitter Circuit Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45 Provisioning PMM Circuit Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45 Provisioning SYNC Circuit Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46 Provisioning an ONWAVE Node With SMX-10G CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47 Configure ADM/SMX ONWAVE Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52 Provisioning ESCON and ESCONII Mux (EMX12) CPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-57 Adding a WCI Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57 Adding An ESCON And ESCONII MUX Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60 Creating ESCONII ONWAVE Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62 Installation, Turn-up, and Test Manual September 30, 2003 - Revision A 009-2003-294
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC
Set Overhead Provisioning On ESCONII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66 Configuring DCC On ESCONII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68 Configuring PPP on ESCONII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-69 Provisioning Channel Pass-Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69 Provisioning Band Pass-Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70 Provisioning Dispersion Compensation Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71 Configuring Span Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72a To Modify Span Loss for a Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72a Circuit Provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73 Creating 3rd party DWDM circuits with CWMD-U Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77 Creating 3rd party DWDM circuits with CWMD-UE Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80 Set Optical Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-83 Add External Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-84 Provisioning 3rd Party DWDM Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85 Displaying 3rd Party DWDM Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87 Displaying 3rd Party DWDM Circuit Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88 Modifying 3rd Party DWDM Circuits and External Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89 Provisioning Stand Alone DWDM Nodes (Virtual Nodes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91 Supported Stand-alone DWDM CPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91 Supported Stand-alone DWDM Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-92 Provisioning a Stand-alone DWDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93 Modifying a VNE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97 Provision a Band Pass-through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98 Provision a Channel Pass-through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-99 CHAPTER 7 VERIFICATION PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Confirming CPs are Provisioned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1 Reading CP LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Complete List of CP LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 ABWDM And ABWDM-U LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 10 GbE LAN LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4 ADM CP LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 ADMII CP LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Power ACO Card Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Alarm LED Card LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 BWDM & BWDM-U LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 September 30, 2003 November 3, 2003 - Revision A - Change 1 009-2003-294
viii
TOC
COM CP LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 CWDM LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 EMX12 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 GRDM LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Line CP LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 OLM CP LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 OSCH CP LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10 OSM CP LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 PEM LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 PMM CP LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Post-Amp CP LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Power Entry Card LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Power LED Card LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Pre-Amp CP LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13 PSM CP LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 RSM CP LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 SMX-04 10G CP LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 STEM CP LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 STMX CP LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 VGA CP LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 WCI CP LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 WPS CP LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 Initial Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Optical Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23 For BLSR Subnetworks with WCA Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-23 For a UPSR, Pt-Pt, LADM, or BLSR with Only UCA Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24 Important Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28 Labeling Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30 Customer Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31 Line Fibers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31 Tributary Fibers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31 Attenuator Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 Band Pass-through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC
Channel Pass-through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33 All Other Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-33 Thin Mux (STMX), Data Mux (GRDM), and ADM CP Provisioning and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34 STMX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34 GRDM/GRDMII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34 ADM/ADMII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35 APPENDIX A TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1 Troubleshooting Span Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 Troubleshooting CP Boot-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2 If Problems Persist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2 Troubleshooting CP Provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-3 Troubleshooting Expansion Shelf Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3 Setting Shelf Number Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4 Troubleshooting Ethernet Connections Between Shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6 Troubleshooting Power Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8 Troubleshooting Database Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9 For Networks Running 3.2.2 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9 For Networks Running Software Loads 3.2.3 and Above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10 Troubleshooting Optical Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-10 10 GbE LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10 ADM CPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-11 ADM II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-12 ESCON MUX (EX12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14 GRDM CPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14 GRDM II CPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15 STMX CPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16 WCI CPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16 Intermediate-Reach Trib . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18 2R ESCON/ETR WCI CP Optical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19 3R and 3R Enhanced WCI CP Optical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21 2R 850-nm WCI CP Optical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-22 2R 1310-nm WCI CP Optical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23 3R OC-192 CPs And MetroCor Fiber WCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24 Installation, Turn-up, and Test Manual September 30, 2003 - Revision A 009-2003-294
TOC
3R OC-192 WCI w/FEC CP Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-25 Troubleshooting Cooling Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25 19V and 23V Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-25 APPENDIX B SPAN LOSS QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 Order Of Accuracy For Valid Span Loss Results: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 Criteria for PIN Diode Saturation: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 Criteria for VOA Open Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 Rule of Thumb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 Fiber Pair Balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2 APPENDIX C SHELF ACCESSORY INSTALLATION & SLOT ASSIGNMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 Installing Power Entry Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 Installing Alarm I/O Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-2 Install an Alarm I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-2 Installing Power/Alarm Cut-off LED Card in Main Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3 Install the Power/alarm Cutoff LED Card in the Main Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3 Installing Alarm LED Card in Main Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4 Install the Alarm LED Card in the Main Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4 Installing Power LED Card in Expansion Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4 Install the Power LED Card in the Expansion Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-4 Shelf Slot Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5 Slot Assignments of Two Sonet/SDH Multiplexer (SMX) CPs Operating As Pairs . . . . . . . C-5 Slot Assignments of Two WCI CPs Operating As a UPSR Pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6 O-BLSR, O-UPSR, And Linear ADM Slot Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-7 APPENDIX D CONNECTOR PINOUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1 Front Panel Connectors and Electrical Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-1 Alarm I/O Card Connector Pins (23-inch Shelf) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-1 CO Alarm Interface 25-Pin Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2 User Alarm Interface 62-Pin Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
xi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC
Alarm I/O Card Connector Pins (23V and 19V Shelves) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-6 CO Alarm I/O Card 26-Pin Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6 User Alarm I/O Card 40-Pin Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7 APPENDIX E FIBER AND BULKHEAD CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1 Maintaining Fibers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1 Guidelines for Handling and Working with Fibers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1 Cleaning Fiber Ends and Bulkhead Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1 APPENDIX F DATASHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F-1 Field Verification Results Reference Guide v4.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1 (1) Network Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1 (2) Node Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-1
xii

FIGURE #
LIST OF FIGURES
LIST OF FIGURES
PAGE #
LOF
FIGURE NAME
Figure 3-1. Figure 3-2. Figure 3-3. Figure 3-4. Figure 3-5. Figure 3-6. Figure 3-7. Figure 3-8. Figure 3-9. Figure 3-10. Figure 3-11. Figure 4-1. Figure 4-2. Figure 4-3. Figure 5-1. Figure 5-2. Figure 5-3. Figure 5-4. Figure 6-1. Figure 6-2. Figure 6-3. Figure 6-4. Figure 6-5. Figure 6-6. Figure 6-7. Figure 6-8. Figure 6-9. Figure 6-10. Figure 6-11. Figure 6-12. Figure 6-13. Figure 6-14.
Backplane Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Mounting An ONLINE Metro Platform Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Shelf Ground Strap Installation (19V or 23V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Three 19V or 23V Shelves and One DCM-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Three 19V or 23V Shelves and Two DCM-As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Checking the Shelf Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Power Entry Card Connector (19V or 23V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Fan Tray Cover Removal (19V or 23V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Fan Tray Insertion (19Vor 23V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Blower Connector and Backplane Plug Alignment (19V or 23V) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Air Inlet Filter Installation (19V and 23V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Removing a CP from Its Antistatic Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Inserting a CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Latching a CP in the Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 PAD Installed On SC Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Correct Fiber Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Patch Fiber Management Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Storage Fiber Management Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 CLI Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 CLI Show Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 ONLINE Metro CIT Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 NE Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 NE Setup Wizard 2nd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 NE Setup Wizard 3rd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 NE Setup Wizard 4th . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Choose Date/Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 NE Setup Wizard NTP Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 NE Setup Wizard Change Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 NE Setup Wizard Select Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 NE Setup Wizard Optical Circuit Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 NE Setup Wizard Set Amp Configuration and VOA Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 NE Setup Wizard O-BLSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
xiii
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE #
LOF

PAGE #
FIGURE NAME
NE Setup Wizard Fiber Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 NE Setup Wizard Node ID Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 NE Setup Wizard Success Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 Add Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Add Line Card Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 Setting Span Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17 Add Amplification Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 Add BWDM Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 Add CWDM Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20 Set VOA Attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 Add WCI Card Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22 WCI Types in the ADD WCI Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 Add WCI Card Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 Add STMX Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 Add STEM Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27 ADD WCI Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29 WCI Types in the ADD WCI Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30 Provision GRDM Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31 Modify Line Trail Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32 Connect Line Port Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32 Modify Line Trail Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33 GRDM AND GRDMII Facilities in ONLINE Metro CIT Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34 Provision ONWAVE Node Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35 Configure ONWAVE Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36 Add GRDM Card Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36 Configure ONWAVE Node Configuration Window With Single GRDMII. . . . . . 6-37 Connect Line Port Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37 Configure ONWAVE Node Configuration Window With Connection . . . . . . . . 6-38 Configure ONWAVE Node GRDMII Pair Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39 Overhead Provisioning Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40 Configure DCC Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41 Configure PPP Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
xiv

FIGURE #
LIST OF FIGURES
PAGE #
LOF
FIGURE NAME
Modify GRDM Fault Propagation Mode Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43 Add WCI Card Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44 Add Splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45 Add PMM Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46 Add SYNC Card Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47 Provision ONWAVE Node Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48 Configure ONWAVE Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49 Add ADM/SMX Card Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49 Configure ONWAVE Node Configuration Window With Single SMX-10G. . . . 6-50 Connect Line Port Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50 Configure ONWAVE Node Configuration Window With Connection . . . . . . . . 6-51 Provision ONWAVE Node Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52 Configure ONWAVE Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53 Add ADM/SMX Card Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54 Configure ONWAVE Node Configuration Window With Single ADM. . . . . . . . 6-54 Connect Line Port Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55 Configure ONWAVE Node Configuration Window With Connection . . . . . . . . 6-55 Configure ONWAVE Node Configuration Window (Paired ADM Cards) . . . . . 6-56 Configure ONWAVE Node Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56 Add WCI Card Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57 Modify Line Trail Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58 Connect Line Port Configuration window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59 Modify Line Trail Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59 Add ESCON MUX Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60 EXM-12 Ports In Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61 Provision ONWAVE Node Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62 Configure ONWAVE node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62 Add ESCONII Card Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63 Configure ONWAVE Node Configuration Window with Single ESCONII. . . . . 6-64 Connect Line Port Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64 Configure ONWAVE Node Configuration Window With Connection . . . . . . . . 6-65 Configure ONWAVE Node ESCONII Pair Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
xv
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE #
Figure 6-79. Figure 6-80. Figure 6-81. Figure 6-82. Figure 6-83. Figure 6-84. Figure 6-85. Figure 6-85a Figure 6-86. Figure 6-87. Figure 6-88. Figure 6-89. Figure 6-90. Figure 6-91. Figure 6-92. Figure 6-93. Figure 6-94. Figure 6-95. Figure 6-96. Figure 6-97. Figure 6-98. Figure 6-99. Figure 6-100. Figure 6-101. Figure 6-102. Figure 6-103. Figure 6-104. Figure 6-105. Figure 6-106. Figure 6-107. Figure 6-108. Figure 6-109. Figure 6-110.
LOF

PAGE #
FIGURE NAME
Overhead Provisioning Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67 Configure DCC Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68 Configure PPP Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69 Add Channel Pass Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70 Add Band Pass Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70 Add DCM Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71 DCM List Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72 Set Span Loss Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72a ONLINE Metro CIT Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73 Circuits Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74 Provisioning Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74 Circuit Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75 Retrieving Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76 Band-Only Circuit Using Channel 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78 Full Band 3rd Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78 Full Band 3rd Party Pass Thru (Ring-to-Ring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79 Channelized 3rd Party DWDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79 Channelized Third Party DWDM (Ring-to-Ring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80 Unprotected Channelized 3rd Party DWDM (CWDM-UE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81 O-UPSR Protected Channelized 3rd Party DWDM (CDWM-UE) . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81 O-UPSR Protected Channel Pass Through 3rd Party DWDM (CDWM-UE) . . 6-82 Channel Pass Through 3rd Party DWDM (CWDMU and CDWM-UE) . . . . . . . 6-82 Set Optical Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83 Add External Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84 External Interface In ONLINE Metro CIT Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85 Provision Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85 Provision Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86 External Interface Circuit In ONLINE Metro CIT Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86 External Interface Circuit In Channel Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87 3rd Party DWDM Circuit In Display Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88 3rd Party DWDM Circuit Information Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89 Modify Circuit Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90 Modify External Interface Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90
xvi
Installation, Turn-Up and Test Manual November 3, 2003 - Revision A - Change 1 009-2003-294

FIGURE #
Figure 6-111. Figure 6-112. Figure 6-113. Figure 6-114. Figure 6-115. Figure 6-116. Figure 6-117. Figure 6-118. Figure 6-119. Figure 6-120. Figure 6-121. Figure A-1. Figure A-2. Figure A-3. Figure A-4. Figure A-5. Figure A-7. Figure A-6. Figure C-1. Figure C-2. Figure C-3. Figure C-4. Figure C-5. Figure C-6. Figure C-7. Figure C-8. Figure D-1. Figure D-2. Figure D-3. Figure D-4. Figure E-1. Figure E-2.
LIST OF FIGURES
PAGE #
LOF
FIGURE NAME
Stand-alone Node and DWDM in the Same Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91 Stand-alone with BWDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92 Stand-alone DWDM (No BWDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93 Provision VNE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94 Provision VNE Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94 VNE Add BWDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95 VNE Add CWDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96 VNE Add WCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97 Modify VNE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98 Add Band Pass Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98 Add Channel Pass Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99 Set Shelf Number Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4 Set Shelf Number (2nd) Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5 Set Shelf Number Confirmation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5 Ethernet Cable Connections For One Expansion Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6 Ethernet Cable Connections For Two Expansion Shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6 Ethernet Cable Connections For Four Expansion Shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7 Ethernet Cable Connections For Three Expansion Shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7 Power Entry Card Installation (19V or 23V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2 Alarm I/O Card Installation (19V or 23V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3 Alarm LED and Power/Alarm Cutoff LED Card Installation (19V or 23V) . . . . . C-4 Basic CP Configuration (23V Main Shelf) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9 Basic BLSR Ring CP Configuration (23V Main Shelf) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10 Basic CP Configuration (23V Expansion Shelf) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10 CP Configuration (19V Main Shelf) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10 CP Configuration (19V Expansion Shelf) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11 CO Alarm Interface 25-Pin Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2 User Alarm 62-Pin Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3 CO Alarm I/O Card 26-Pin Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6 User Alarm I/O Card 40-pin Alarm Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7 Cleaning a Bulkhead Connector with Compressed Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2 Folding Two Kimwipes to Form a 16-Ply Cleaning Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
xvii
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE #
Figure E-3. Figure E-4. Figure E-5. Figure E-6. Figure E-7. Figure E-8.
LOF

PAGE #
FIGURE NAME
Cleaning a Fiber End Using a Folded Kimwipe Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4 Viewing a Fiber End with a Fiber Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5 Examples of Fiber-End Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5 Cleaning a Fiber End with a CLETOP Cleaning Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7 Removing a CLETOP Cleaning Stick from Its Wrapper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-9 Cleaning a Bulkhead Connector with a CLETOP Cleaning Stick . . . . . . . . . . . E-10
xviii
LOT
TABLE #
LIST OF TABLES
LIST OF TABLES
PAGE #
TABLE NAME
Table 3-1. Table 3-2. Table 3-3. Table 4-1. Table 6-1. Table 6-2. Table 6-3. Table 7-1. Table 7-2. Table 7-3. Table 7-4. Table 7-5. Table 7-6. Table 7-7. Table 7-8. Table 7-9. Table 7-10. Table 7-11. Table 7-12. Table 7-13. Table 7-14. Table 7-15. Table 7-16. Table 7-17. Table 7-18. Table 7-19. Table 7-20. Table 7-21. Table 7-22. Table 7-23. Table 7-24. Table 7-25. Table 7-26.
Shelf Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Electrical Cables for Main Shelf (19V and 23V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Electrical Cables for Each Expansion Shelf (23V and 19V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 CP LED States After Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 STMX and STEM CP Slot Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26 STMX and STEM CP Slot Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27 SMX-10G Cross connect Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48 Correct Behavior Of LEDs After Booting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 ABWDM LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 10GbE LAN WCI CP Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 ADM LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 ADMII LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Power And ACO LED Card Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Alarm LED Card LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 BWDM LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 COM CP LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 CWDM LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 EMX12 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 GRDM LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Line CP LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 OLM CP LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 OSCH CP LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 OSM CP LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 PEM LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 PMM CP LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Post-Amp CP LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Power Entry Card LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Power LED Card LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Pre-Amp CP LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 PSM CP LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 RSM CP LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 SMX-04 10G CP LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 STEM CP LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
xix
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE #
Table 7-27. Table 7-28. Table 7-29. Table 7-30. Table A-1. Table A-2. Table A-3. Table A-4. Table A-5. Table A-6. Table A-7. Table A-8. Table A-9. Table A-10. Table A-11. Table A-12. Table A-13. Table A-16. Table A-14. Table A-15. Table A-17. Table A-18. Table A-19. Table A-20. Table A-21. Table A-22. Table A-23. Table A-24. Table A-25. Table A-26. Table A-27. Table A-28.
LOT

PAGE #
TABLE NAME
STMX CP LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 VGA CP LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 WCI CP Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 WPS CP LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 3R 10GbE LAN -FEC WCI Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10 ADM Tributary Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11 ADM Line Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11 ADMII Tributary Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12 Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12 Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12 Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13 Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13 Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13 Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13 EMX12 TX Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14 EMX12 RX Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14 GRDM CP Optical Tributary Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14 GRDM II CP Optical Line Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15 Additional Trib TX/ RX Optical Characteristics for 850 nm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15 GRDM CP Optical Line Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15 STMX CP Optical Tributary Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16 WCI SR Tributary-side Optical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16 Regional And Metro Rate-tunable IR Tributary-side Optical Specifications . . . A-18 Regional Rate-Tunable And Metro Rate-tunable CP Line-side Optical Specifications A-18 2R ESCON/ETR WCI CP Tributary-side Optical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . A-19 2R ESCON/ETR WCI CP Line-side Optical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20 3R and 3R Enhanced WCI CP Tributary-side Optical Specifications. . . . . . . . A-21 3R And 3R Enhanced WCI CP Line-side Optical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . A-21 2R 850-nm WCI CP Tributary-side Optical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22 2R 850-nm WCI CP Line-side Optical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22 2R 1310-nm WCI CP Tributary-side Optical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23 2R 1310-nm WCI CP Line-side Optical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23
xx
LOT
TABLE #
Table A-29. Table A-30. Table C-1. Table C-2. Table C-3. Table C-4. Table D-1. Table D-2. Table D-3. Table D-4. Table D-5. Table D-6.
LIST OF TABLES
PAGE #
TABLE NAME
3R OC-192 CPs and MetroCor Fiber WCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24 3R OC-192-FEC WCI Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25 CP Slot Assignments (23V Main Shelf) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9 CP Slot Assignments (23V Expansion Shelf). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10 CP Slot Assignments (19V Main Shelf) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11 CP Slot Assignments (19V Expansion Shelf). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11 Panel Connectors For ONLINE Metro Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1 Alarm I/O Card Electrical Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1 CO Alarm Interface, DB25 Connector Pinout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2 User Alarm Interface, DB62 Connector Pinout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3 CO Alarm I/O Card, HD26 Connector Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6 User Alarm I/O Card, HD40 Connector Pinout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
xxi
LIST OF TABLES
LOT
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
xxii
INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
REQUIRED TOOLS
u
Windows 2000, or NT based Personal Computer (PC) equipped with a Compact Disc Read Only Memory (CD-ROM) drive ONLINE Metro Multiservice Dense Wave Division Multiplexing (DWDM) Transport Platform Craft Interface Terminal (CIT) software version matching the system software release Straight-through CAT 5 cable with RJ-45 connectors Standard CIENA installer tool kit including: Torque wrench or torque driver with a 7/16-inch socket for torquing power input and return hardware to 65 inch-pounds (in-lb) (5 to 6 foot-pounds (ft-lb)) Digital Multimeter (DMM) with test leads Fiber Optic Cleaning Kit (Speer SFO 1400-NN-A, or equivalent) Westover Scientific (Handheld) Inspection Scope (FBP-Series, or equivalent) Video optical fiber scope (Micro Enterprises MODULE SCOPE) with JVC Thin Film Transistor (TFT) Liquid Crystal Diode (LCD) Video Monitor LT-V18 (if available) or an optical fiber scope (Noyes OFS300, or equivalent) (with appropriate adapters) Back Reflection Meter (EXFO BRT-320A, or equivalent) Optical Power Meter (OPM) (Noyes OPM-4-4C, or equivalent) Assorted Optical Attenuators, SC connector: 1dB through 28dB, inclusive (PADS) Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) guard wrist strap ESD guard heel grounders APC/PC connector adapters Kimberly-Clark Kimwipes EX-L Delicate Task Wipers (or equivalent)
u u u
u u u u
u u u u u u u
PREREQUISITES
u u
The user must have a working knowledge of ONLINE Metro CIT software and connectivity The user must have a knowledge of HyperTerminal and File Transfer Protocol (FTP) software setup and usage. The user must have a knowledge of SONET test set operation. The user must have a knowledge of OPM operation. The user must have a knowledge of OSA operation. The user must have a knowledge of CDTS operation. The user must have a knowledge of Craft Interface usage. The user must have Craft Interface Administrator account privileges.
u u u u u u
1-1
INTRODUCTION HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
This manual is organized into five sections that contain the turn-up and test procedures for the standard configurations of ONLINE Metro Platform systems. Each section contains the required tasks to perform related procedures, and each task contains the required step-by-step procedures to perform that task. The turn-up and test procedures contained in this manual are organized as follows:
u u u u u u u
Chapter 1 - Introduction Chapter 2 - Site Preparation Chapter 3 - Shelf and Tray Installation Chapter 4 - Circuit Pack Installation Chapter 5 - Cable and Fiber Management Chapter 6 - ONLINE Provisioning Chapter 7 - Verification Procedures
BEFORE STARTING
Before the turn-up and test of an ONLINE Metro Platform system can be performed, an assortment of sitespecific/route-specific information must be provided, and the system racks/cabinets must be installed. The following sections provide a brief overview of the site survey to system acceptance flow of a ONLINE Metro Platform system.
Site Survey Overview

Prior to the installation and turn-up of any ONLINE Metro Platform system, information about the facility and fiber plant is required to properly configure the ONLINE Metro Platform system. The site survey allows the site survey engineer to analyze the customer site to identify the materials and procedures required for installation. The site survey engineer collects the detailed information used to generate the Installation Specification, Recommended Tools and Equipment List, and List of Materials (LOM). The information collected during the site survey is also used by the CIENA System Engineer (SE) to generate a DCM Connectivity Report for the system configurations containing 10G channels. After the site survey, the installation procedures are performed before the System turn-up and test procedures. In addition to the fiber plant information, other facility information (i.e., space, power, grounding, and environmental data) is also gathered. The site survey engineer develops a Job Specification Package (JSP) that contains the following installation documents:
u u u u
Installation Specification Tools and Equipment List List of Materials (LOM) Site Specific Turn-up Report
1-2
ONLINE Metro Platform GENERAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
INTRODUCTION
To avoid injury and/or damage to the equipment, the user must adhere to the following precautions as well as to the safety procedures established by the organization in which the system is installed. Refer to CIENA Standard Cleaning and Equipment Safety Practices, Document 009-2003-121, Rev 001 for CIENA recommended safety practices.
Voltage Precaution RISK OF PERSONAL INJURY

Warning:
Negative 48 volts DC is present in the equipment. Contact can cause personal injury. Take appropriate safety precautions.
Voltage of -48 VDC is present within the ONLINE Metro Platform equipment as a power source for normal equipment operation. Voltage of 120 VAC is also present at all facilities for test equipment, tools, and lighting. Personnel should exercise safety precautions when connecting, measuring, and disconnecting all voltage supply lines. The following precautions must be observed to avoid voltage shock.
u u u u
Never use both hands when working on or near a voltage source. Use the buddy system when working around voltage sources. Ensure that rescue and first aid equipment is available and accessible. Remove watches, rings, necklaces, and other conductive devices that might come in contact with live voltages. Ensure that other personnel are not in contact with voltage sources before activating circuits. Deactivate power whenever possible before performing maintenance on system components.
u u
General Static Electricity Precautions
Risk of Damage to Circuit Packs and Backplanes

Caution: This equipment contains Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive devices. Wear grounding straps when handling equipment and follow ESD procedures.
A damaging static electricity charge can be generated by the rubbing and sliding of materials against each other. Different materials have different potentials of generating and holding a static electric charge. Plastic materials similar to nylon and polyester are capable of generating and holding a potentially large damaging static electricity charge, and materials similar to cotton do not typically have the potential to generate and hold a charge. The buildup of static electricity can be of a sufficient potential to damage electronic circuitry. When working on CIENA equipment or any interconnecting electrical/optical cabling, the user must always wear an approved personnel ground device. Industry experience has shown that all integrated circuit packs can be damaged by static electricity that builds up on work surfaces and personnel. The effect of ESD damage may be immediate failure or it may manifest itself as a latent failure affecting the reliability of the equipment.
1-3
INTRODUCTION
The static charges and discharges are produced by various charging effects of movement and contact with other objects. Dry air allows greater static charges to accumulate on a body. The following precautions must be observed to avoid static charges and discharges.
u
Assume that all circuit packs contain solid state electronic components that can be damaged by ESD. When handling circuit packs (e.g., storing, installing, removing, etc.) or when working on the backplane, always wear a grounded wrist strap or wear a heel strap and stand on a grounded, static-dissipating floor mat. Handle all circuit packs by the faceplate or latch and by the top and bottom outermost edges. Never touch the components, conductors, or connector pins. Observe all warning labels on bags and cartons. If possible, do not remove circuit packs from antistatic packaging until ready for use. If possible, open all circuit packs at a static-safe work station using properly grounded wrist straps and static-dissipating table mats. Always store and transport circuit packs in static-safe packaging. Keep all static-generating material, such as food wrappers, plastics, and styrofoam containers, away from all circuit packs. When removing circuit packs from an enclosure, immediately place them in static-safe packages. Whenever possible, maintain a relative humidity above 20 percent.
u u
General Laser Precautions LASER RADIATION AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM CLASS 3B LASER PRODUCT
Laser emissions may cause eye damage. Never look directly into fiber connectors. Always assume that laser radiation is present even when equipment is turned off. All CIENA Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing (DWDM) products use infrared light energy to transmit and receive signals between the circuit packs contained within the system and to interface the circuit packs in the system with the external fiber plant and client equipment. The transmission of infrared light energy between the circuit packs, fiber plant, and client equipment is performed by fiber cables. The infrared light energy used in CIENA products falls within the invisible portion of the electromagnetic spectrum. This energy is of sufficient magnitude to cause eye injury with indirect exposure and/or skin injury with direct exposure. When working with CIENA equipment, the following general laser precautions must be observed.
u
Warning:
An operator/technician should not perform work on the system before satisfactorily completing an approved training course. Only authorized trained personnel should be permitted to perform service, maintenance, and restoration. Never disconnect a lightwave cable and look into the optical connector. Exercise caution to avoid indirect eye exposure or direct skin exposure to unprotected optical connectors.
u u
1-4

u u u
INTRODUCTION
Wear laser safety goggles whenever in close proximity to lasers. Protective covers/caps must be installed on all optical connectors when not in use. Because laser energy is invisible, always assume that exposed optical connectors and cables are energized. Always make an optical power measurement of the fiber or connector before cleaning and/or a visual inspection to ensure that the fiber is not energized. Personnel should not view an optical fiber with a direct magnification fiber scope without verifying that all lightwave sources on the fiber are turned off. All unauthorized personnel should be excluded from the immediate area of lightwave transmission systems during installation and service.
General Optical Fiber Handling Precautions

When handling or connecting optical fibers, the following precautions must be observed.
u u
Safety glasses must be worn when handling fibers. After handling optical fibers, wash your hands; fiber fragments are almost invisible and can cause eye injuries. Avoid indirect eye or direct skin exposure to the ends of optical connectors and fibers as laser energy may be present. Fiber optical connectors must have protective covers/caps installed when not in use.
General Fiber Break and Damaged Fiber Precautions

If a fiber break occurs or a damaged fiber is observed:
u u u u
Power off all laser sources to the fiber or disconnect the fiber end from the laser source. Notify the facility manager or supervisor of the damaged or broken fiber. Identify where the fiber is damaged or broken. Use caution when handling damaged or broken optical fibers; fiber fragments are almost invisible and can cause eye injuries.
General Circuit Pack Handling Precautions


Caution: Remove all optical connector dust caps from circuit packs and backplane before installing circuit packs.
1-5
INTRODUCTION
When handling, installing, or removing circuit packs, the following precautions must be observed.
u
Wrist straps or suitable ESD-grounding devices must be worn before touching and/or removing a circuit pack from the equipment shelf or ESD protective packaging. Handle circuit packs by the faceplate only and do not touch the components, printed circuit board or connector contacts. Circuit pack optical connectors must have protective covers/caps installed when not in use. Ensure that circuit pack backplane protective covers/caps are removed before installing circuit packs into equipment shelves. Circuit packs must be stored in ESD-protective packaging when not installed in an equipment shelf. Do not stack circuit packs on or against each other.
u u
General Circuit Pack Storage Precautions

When circuit packs are being stored or are not in use, the following precautions must be observed.
u u u
All circuit packs must be stored in suitable ESD-protective packaging when not in use. Circuit pack optical connectors must have protective covers/caps installed. All circuit packs must be stored in original protective packaging container when not in use, and circuit packs must not be stacked without the use of the original protective packaging containers. Circuit packs must be maintained within the environmental parameters listed in the following chart at all times.
Operating Temperature Refer to Telecordia Generic Requirements GR-63-CORE, Section 4.1.2.
Relative Humidity Refer to Telecordia Generic Requirements GR-63-CORE, Section 4.1.2.
Storage Temperature Refer to Telecordia Generic Requirements GR-63-CORE, Section 4.4.4.
Shock and Vibration Refer to Telecordia Generic Requirements GR-63-CORE, Sections 4.3 and 4.4.3.
Warnings and Cautions

Throughout this manual, danger and caution notices are located before the procedures that require an emphasis on the safety considerations that should be followed to minimize the potential of personal injury and/or equipment damage.
Environmental Impact Statement

The CIENA ONLINE Metro Platform contains no hazardous materials as defined by the United States Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA). CIENA recommends that all failed products be returned to CIENA for failure analysis and proper disposal.
1-6
ONLINE Metro Platform TEST EQUIPMENT
INTRODUCTION
You should have the following test equipment available during an ONLINE Metro Platform installation:
u u u u
Optical power meter Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) (EXFO FTB-7000B, or equivalent) Chromatic Dispersion Test Set (CDTS) (EG&G FD-440, or equivalent) A synchronous optical network (SONET), Gigabit Ethernet (GbE), or other comparable analyzer test set capable of testing the required inputs and outputs (such as OC-192, OC-48, OC-3, or GbE) to verify error-free operation Optical spectrum analyzer (OSA) or multi-wavelength meter to measure the optical signal-tonoise ratio (OSNR), power, and wavelength Multimeter for voltage and resistance measurements Optical fiber scope with 1.25-mm and 2.5-mm ferrule adapters (Noyes Fiber Systems OFS300 or equivalent) Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding wrist strap and/or heel strap Kimwipes, delicate task wipes
u u
u u
1-7
INTRODUCTION
1-8
SITE PREPARATION
CHAPTER 2 SITE PREPARATION

ABOUT THE ONLINE METRO PLATFORM SYSTEM
The ONLINE Metro Platform is comprised of one or more rack-mounted shelves. The 23V (23-inch Vertical) contains 23 slots; and the 19V (19-inch Vertical) contains 18 slots. Optical fibers carry data between circuit packs (CPs) within the Network Elements (NEs) between NEs and to and from the carriers network.
POWER AND GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS

A backup power source is recommended to prevent system failure during a power loss.
Note:
The ONLINE Metro Platform requires a nominal power source of 48VDC. Power can be provided by the customers battery supply, a 48VDC power supply at the site, or a 48VDC power supply mounted in the rack(s) with the ONLINE equipment. Separate A and B power supplies are required for reliability.
u
-48 VDC power cables routed to the top of each equipment rack and connected to the Power Distribution Unit Ground cables connected to each equipment rack
A low-impedance, equipment-grounding conductor must be connected between the ground terminal on the ONLINE and the building framework ground. The grounding path must be of sufficiently low impedance to facilitate the operation of any circuit overcurrent protection and must be capable of safely conducting any fault current.
RACK REQUIREMENTS
ONLINE Metro Platform assemblies can be mounted in a 23-inch, 19-inch, or European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) telecommunications rack. All racks must be installed in accordance with local building and earthquake guidelines and must meet applicable grounding and framework-bonding requirements before any equipment installation is started.
u
Fiber plant and customer equipment fibers tagged and routed to the relative terminating/ originating location in the racks
UNPACKING AND VERIFYING SYSTEM COMPONENTS

Before beginning the installation, check to ensure that you have all assemblies listed on the site plan. If any parts are missing or damaged, contact the site supervisor to obtain the necessary replacement parts before starting the installation.

2-1
SITE PREPARATION
2-2
SHELF AND TRAY INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 3 SHELF AND TRAY INSTALLATION

This chapter explains how to install ONLINE Metro Platform shelves, additional equipment in racks, and connect power and ground to the shelves. The chapter includes these sections:
u u u u u u u u u
Shelf Configurations on page 3-1 Shelf Installation on page 3-4 Verifying the Ground Connection on page 3-10 Verifying Ground, Supply Voltage, and Polarity on page 3-10 Powering-up Shelves on page 3-12 Shelf Cooling Equipment Installation on page 3-13 Installing Cooling Fan Trays (19V or 23V) on page 3-14 Telect Tray Installation on page 3-7 Dispersion Compensation Module Installation on page 3-7
Procedures that apply to a specific shelf or shelves are identified accordingly. Shelves are labeled on the back of the chassis and are referred to as follows:
u u
23-inch shelves with vertical (V) air flow: 23V 19-inch shelves with vertical (V) air flow: 19V
Note:
Specific instructions included in a site plan may override some of the instructions in this manual.
SHELF CONFIGURATIONS
The ONLINE Metro shelf configurations consist of a main shelf and one or more expansion shelves. Circuit packs (CPs) must be installed into the shelves in accordance with the site plan.
u
The main shelf includes: Air filter Two Power Entry cards Alarm I/O card(s) (Central Office [CO] Alarm and User Alarm)
Note: Alarm LED card
The 23-inch chassis will have one Alarm I/O card. The 19V and 23V will have two Alarm I/O cards.
Power/Alarm Cut-off LED card Processor Element Module (PEM) CP Persistent Storage Module (PSM) CP Two Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC) CPs One fan tray (19V and 23V) Bezel
3-1

u
Optical Line Module (OLM) circuit pack, if needed OSC Splitter Module (OSM), if needed Line CP, if needed Filler circuit packs (as needed) Post-Amp circuit packs (as needed) Air filter Two Power Entry cards Power LED card Two Communication (COM) CPs One fan tray (19V and 23V) Bezel Filler circuit packs (as needed)
One or more expansion shelves include:
ONLINE Metro Platform shelves will also require a variety of additional CPs and modules depending on a sites network topology: Dispersion Compensation Module (DCM-A, or DCM-LF) All-Band Wavelength Division Multiplexing (ABWDM) CP Band Wavelength Division Multiplexing (BWDM) CP Channel Wavelength Division Multiplexing (CWDM) CP ONWAVE Multiplexer CPs (e.g. GRDM, GRDMII, STMX, EMX, ADM, 10G-ADM) Optical Amplifier Power Management Module (PMM) CP Unidirectional Path Switched Ring (UPSR) Splitter CP Ring Switch Module (RSM) CP Wavelength Converter Interface (WCI) CPs Working Protect Splitter (WPS) East and West CPs
Note:
The ONWAVE circuit packs and OC-192 WCI circuit packs do not operate in a 23-inch shelf configuration; they operate only in the 23V and 19V shelves.
Additional equipment may also include: A fuse or circuit-breaker panel Patch fiber management tray Storage fiber management tray Alarm and User I/O panel
3-2
ONLINE Metro Platform SHELF COMPATIBILITIES
An ONLINE Metro Platform shelf is labeled at the rear of the chassis as one of three shelf types: 23V, 19V, and 23-inch. Table 3-1 shows shelf compatibility (in terms of software) by listing which shelves can be installed as expansion shelves for each main shelf type. Table 3-1. Shelf Compatibility Main Shelf 23V 19V Supported Supported Expansion Shelf 23V Supported 19V Not Supported
SHELF KITS
If you have purchased a shelf kit from CIENA, the Power Supply cards, Alarm I/O cards, Alarm LED cards, Power ACO LED card (main shelf), and Power LED card (expansion shelf) are all pre-installed. It is suggested you select shelf kits when ordering shelves for the first time. Refer to the ONLINE Metro System Description Manual, or contact your CIENA sales representative for shelf ordering information.
SHELF CABLES
Table 3-2 and Table 3-3 list the electrical cables included with the CIENA Corporation equipment for each network element (NE). The additional equipment is not always supplied by CIENA Corporation and may vary widely among installations. Refer to the site plan for information about the site configuration. Main and expansion shelf cables for the 23V and 19V shelf are provided and listed in Table 3-2 and Table 3-3. Table 3-2. Electrical Cables for Main Shelf (19V and 23V) Cable Equipment ground conductor, 3 m Power cable, 3 m1 DB25 cable - CO Alarm cable, 3 m DB62 to HD40 cable - User Alarm cable, 3 m Craft RS232C (DTE) cable, 3 m Ethernet cable - CAT 5 shielded cable, 10 m* DTE modem cable, 3 m X.25-V.28 DTE modem cable, 3 m Sync inter shelf, CAT 5 shielded, 4-pair, RJ-45 to RJ-45 cable, 3 m Sync inter shelf, CAT 5 shielded, 4-pair, RJ-45 to RJ-45 cable, 10 m
1. Included in 23V and 19V expansion shelf kits
Order Code NXMECEC5 NXMECEF6 NXMECEE2 NXMECEE9 NXMECEC4 NXMECEF1 NXMECEC6 NXMECEC7 NXMECEE5 NXMECEE7 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
Quantity
3-3
Table 3-3. Electrical Cables for Each Expansion Shelf (23V and 19V) Cable Equipment ground connector, 3 m Power cable, 3 m Ethernet cable - CAT 5 shielded cable, 10 m Sync inter shelf, CAT 5 shielded, 4-pair, RJ-45 to RJ-45 cable, 3 m Order Code NXMECEC5 NXMECEC6 NXMECEF1 NXMECEE5 1 2 2 1 Quantity
SHELF INSTALLATION
This section explains how to ground the rack, install an ONLINE Metro Platform shelf, verify ground, voltage and polarity. Install Power Entry cards (if necessary, since these cards are shipped pre installed), install the Alarm I/O cards (if necessary, since these cards are shipped pre installed), and power the shelves.
Connecting the System Ground

Ground shelf chassis to the racks using cables provided in accordance with local practice. Refer to the rackassembly instructions to determine the correct place to connect the ground cables.
Installing Fuse or Circuit Breaker Panel

A fuse panel or circuit breaker panel is used to connect to the two independent 48VDC power sources. The fuse or circuit breaker panel may not be supplied by CIENA Corporation; check whether it is supplied when ordering the system. To install the fuse or circuit breaker panel, follow the manufacturers installation instructions. CIENA Corporation recommends the use of 20-amp breakers or fuses for each connection. The fuse panel should be mounted in the top-most position of the rack, unless customer directs otherwise.
Backplane Verification
After unpacking the shelf and prior to installation, verify the backplane connectors are not damaged or missing (Figure 3-1). If any missing or bent pins are found, then contact CIENA Global Service and Support (GSS).
3-4
Active Active RTN RTN
Backplane Connectors
Fail Active USER ALARMS
Critical
Major Minor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
ONI
Systems
IN
ALL OPTICAL CONNECTORS
Power ACO
OUT
Figure 3-1. Backplane Connectors
Installing a Shelf
The main shelf is typically secured at the top of the rack. The expansion shelves are typically secured below the main shelf. Use the following procedure to install an ONLINE Metro shelf in a rack:
LIFT WARNING
Warning:
The equipment is heavy. Unassisted or improper lifting techniques can cause personal injury. Take appropriate safety precautions.
STEP 1: STEP 2: STEP 3: .
Determine the number of shelves to be mounted in the racks from the site plan. Verify that the rack holes used to support the shelves and other equipment are threaded or have clip nuts attached. If not, install clip nuts or other mounting hardware in accordance with the rack manufacturers instructions. Position the first shelf immediately below the fuse or circuit-breaker panel unless instructed otherwise by the site plan. No spacing is required for installing multiple chassis. However, if spacing is used for 23V and 19V units allow 1.75 inches of clearance on the top and bottom of each shelf.
Note:
STEP 4:
While you and a helper are supporting the shelf from the bottom in its mounting position, use one hand to insert a mounting screw through the top hole in the shelfs right mounting flange into one of the threaded holes or attached nuts in the rack, and tighten the screw while continuing to support the shelf (Figure 3-2). The screw should be fully inserted and tightened enough to prevent it from working loose, but it does not have to be fully tightened until all eight screws are in place. Verify that the shelf is level. While still supporting the shelf from the bottom, insert four screws in the shelfs left mounting flange in the same manner as described in Step 4. Insert screws in the center and bottom holes on the right side of the shelf.
STEP 5: STEP 6: STEP 7:
3-5

. Note:
Use a minimum of four screws on each side of the shelf.
; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ;; ; ;;; ;;;; ;;;; ;;;; ;;;; ;;;; ;;;; ;;;; ;;;; ;; ;;;; ;;;; ;;;; ;;;; ;;;; ;;;; ;;;; ;;;; ;;;;
CO ALARMS Active Fail USER ALARMS
1 2
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Fan A Fan B
Figure 3-2. Mounting An ONLINE Metro Platform Shelf STEP 8: Connect the chassis grounding strap to one of the grounding points on the back of the shelf and to the rack. Tighten all of the screws fully.
Each 23V or 19V shelf has two threaded grounding points (10-32) on the back left side of the unit. The grounding points have a circular bare-metal area around them. . Note: Each 23V or 19V shelf is shipped with a dual-hole chassis ground strap (green, 0.3 meters [11.7 inches] with attached lugs) (Figure 3-3). The ground strap lug must make contact with an unpainted area on the surface of the rack to ensure electrical contact. Remove paint, apply NO-OX-ID (or other similar compound), and use a star washer in accordance with local practice.
Note:
3-6

STEP 9:
Mount additional shelves in the racks in the same manner as described in Step 4 through Step 8 according to the site plan.
evitcA NTR evitcA NTR
On the back side of the unit

liaF evitcA SMRALA RESU
liaF evitcA SMRALA RESU
21 22 23 18 19 20 15 16 17 12 13 14 9 10 11 5 6 7 8 Power 1 2 3 4
IN
Critical
Major
I ON Systems
ALL OPTICAL
CONNECTORS
OUT
ACO
Minor
Chassis ground strap
Figure 3-3. Shelf Ground Strap Installation (19V or 23V)
TELECT TRAY INSTALLATION

A Telect fiber management tray unit may be provided to organize and route fiber to and from the shelf. Each rack typically has a multi-tray unit (both patch and storage trays) installed. The type and number of fiber management trays varies among installations. Refer to the site plan to determine the location of each tray unit. The tray unit is typically, but not always, installed under a shelfs blower-air plenum section. Make sure you provide top and bottom space clearance for 23V and 19V units. Follow the manufacturers instructions for installing the tray unit.
DISPERSION COMPENSATION MODULE INSTALLATION

The Dispersion Compensation Module (DCM-A) can be installed before or after CPs are installed, but the DCM-A must be installed before any CP is fibered. Install the DCM-A with four screws (two on each side) below the fiber management trays. Four DCM-A rack configurations depict 7-foot racks and 43U front panel space (Figure 3-5 through Figure 3-5). Only these configurations meet the systems thermal requirements.
u u
Three 19V or 23V Shelves and One DCM-A on page 3-8 Three 19V or 23V Shelves and Two DCM-As on page 3-9
Refer to the ONLINE Metro Multiservice Dense Wave Division Multiplexing (DWDM) Transport Platform System Description Manual for additional DCM information.
3-7

660 mm 26.00"
Airflow clearance requirement
1U 1U
Circuit breaker
10 U
19V or 23V shelf #1
Airflow clearance requirement Airflow clearance requirement
1U 2U 1U 2134 mm 84.00" 19V or 23V shelf #2 Fiber tray
10 U
43 U 1911.35 mm 75.25"
10 U
19V or 23V shelf #3
1U 2U 2U Fiber tray Fiber tray
1U 1U
DCM-A
Figure 3-4. Three 19V or 23V Shelves and One DCM-A
3-8
660 mm 26.00" 1U Airflow clearance requirement 1 U Circuit breaker
10 U
19V or 23V shelf #1
Airflow clearance requirement 1 U 2U 1U 2134 mm 84.00" 19V or 23V shelf #2 Fiber tray
10 U
43 U 1911.35 mm 75.25"
10 U
19V or 23V shelf #3
Airflow clearance requirement 1 U 2U 2U 1U 1U Fiber tray Fiber tray
DCM-A DCM-A
Figure 3-5. Three 19V or 23V Shelves and Two DCM-As
3-9
SHELF AND TRAY INSTALLATION VERIFYING THE GROUND CONNECTION

To verify the ground connection, the following steps are performed.
Note:
This procedure requires a multimeter capable of measuring 1 of electrical resistance. Do not install any CPs or other assemblies in the shelf until you have verified good ground connections.
STEP 1: STEP 2:
Set the meter to the lowest resistance scale. Verify that the zero resistance calibration of the meter is correct by touching the two probes togetherthe reading should be less than 0.5 . Refer to the manufacturer literature for information about zero resistance calibration for your meter. Hold one of the meters test probes against the buildings ground conductor. Touch the meters other test probe to the ONLINE Metro shelf (be sure you have good contact with bare metal), and read the meter. The resistance should be less than 1 ohm. If the meter shows a resistance greater than 1 ohm, check the connection between the buildings ground conductor and the ONLINE Metro equipment rack, and correct any problems you find. Repeat Step 2 as needed for each shelf. Check the resistance between the ESD sockets on the front of the shelf and the buildings ground conductor. The 19V and 23V versions will have only one ESD socket on the top. If the meter shows a resistance greater than 1 between the ESD port and ground, inspect and repair any problems you find. If you cannot correct the problem so that you can measure less than 1 from the ESD ports to the buildings ground conductor, contact CIENA Services and Support.
STEP 3: STEP 4: STEP 5: STEP 6: STEP 7: STEP 8:
VERIFYING GROUND, SUPPLY VOLTAGE, AND POLARITY

Use the following procedure to verify that the ONLINE Metro shelf is properly grounded, that the correct supply voltage is available at the fuse panel, and that the supply voltage is polarized correctly.
Note:
This procedure requires a multimeter capable of measuring small amounts of electrical resistance and DC voltages from 0 to at least 57VDC.
RISK OF PERSONAL INJURY

Warning:
Set the meter to a DC voltage range capable of measuring from 0 to at least 57VDC. Verify the zero voltage calibration of the meter. Refer to the meter literature or manufacturer for information about the zero voltage calibration. Hold or clip the meters negative test probe (black) against the ONLINE Metro shelf. Ensure good contact with bare metal.
3 - 10

STEP 4: STEP 5:
Touch the meters positive test probe (red) to the rack (be sure to touch the probe to bare metal), and read the meter, as shown in Figure 3-6. If you read any voltage at all (negative or positive), check the connection between the buildings ground conductor and the ONLINE Metro equipment rack, and correct any problems you find. If you dont read any voltage, proceed to Step 6.
Critical
Major Minor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Black
ONI
Systems
IN
Power ACO
OUT
Red
Figure 3-6. Checking the Shelf Ground STEP 6: STEP 7: STEP 8: STEP 9: STEP 10: Set the meter to a lower DC voltage scale, and read the meter. Repeat Step 6 until you are reading 0 volts on the meters lowest range. If you read any voltage at any scale, inspect the grounding cables and their connections. Repeat Step 1 through Step 7 with the meter set to read AC voltage. Set the meter to read resistance () and verify the zero resistance calibration. Measure the resistance between the rack and the ONLINE Metro shelf. If you can measure any resistance greater than 1 between the shelf and the rack, inspect the grounding cables and their connections, and correct any problems you find. Do not continue to the next step until the resistance reading between the shelf and the rack is less than 1 ohm (Figure 3-6). Set the meter to a DC voltage range capable of measuring 48 VDC. Locate the power-input cable for the A power source of shelf 1. Turn on the A-side power source. Hold the meters negative test probe on the positive (return) side of the power input cable connector. At the same time, hold the positive test probe on the negative (-48 V) side of the power input connector. The meter should read -48 VDC (any reading between -40 VDC and -57 VDC is acceptable, but -48 VDC is optimum). If the reading is outside of this range, check the connections and the power source, and correct any problems you may find. Do not continue to the next step until you read between -40 VDC and -57 VDC. STEP 15: STEP 16: STEP 17: Turn off all power sources. Repeat steps 11 through 15 for the B-side power source. Repeat steps 11 through 16 for each of the remaining shelves in the installation.
STEP 11: STEP 12: STEP 13: STEP 14:
3 - 11

STEP 18:
Switch the meter to a high resistance scale. Measure the resistance between the positive input terminal of the power entry card and shelf ground. Then measure the negative input terminal of the power input card and the shelf ground. You should read either an open circuit or a very high resistance (>100 megohms). Repeat step 18 for each power entry card in the installation.
STEP 19:
POWERING-UP SHELVES
Each rack must have its own fuse panel or circuit-breaker panel with two sets of power-input terminals and fuses or circuit breakers. The two power inputs must be connected to separate 48VDC power sources for redundancy and fail-safe operation.
Overview of Power Sources

The power source to be used for the ONLINE Metro Transport Platform is specified in the site plan. While other possible power sources can be used, the most common power source is the sites 48VDC battery power. If a 48VDC source is not available, or the site plan indicates that it will not be used for the ONLINE, each rack must be equipped with two 48VDC power supplies that operate from the building's UPS-backed AC line voltage.
Connecting Power Input Cables to -48 VDC Power Source

Warning:
Two power input cables are supplied with each ONLINE Metro Platform shelf kit. These cables carry the power from the A and B power source output terminal blocks of the fuse or circuit breaker panel to the power input connector located on the front of each Power Entry card. STEP 1: STEP 2: STEP 3: STEP 4: Remove all power to the output terminals of the fuse or circuit breaker panel by either turning the input power sources off, or removing the fuses if the fuse panel is used, or turning off the breakers if a circuit breaker panel is used. Verify that the power is off by checking the output terminals of the panel for 0 volts with a voltmeter. Install terminal lugs on the unterminated ends of the power cable wires and connect as appropriate for the output power terminal block configuration of the fuse or circuit breaker panel. Connect the lug on the return (black) wire of one power input cable to the return output terminal (labeled RTN) of the A output power terminal block. Connect the lug on the negative (red) wire of the same power input cable to the corresponding negative output terminal (labeled -48 V) on the same output power terminal block. Repeat steps 3 - 4 for the other power input cable using the B output power terminal block. Repeat steps 3 - 5 for each of the remaining shelves in the installation. Locate the power input cable for the A power source of shelf 1. Verify that the power is off by checking the power input cable connector for 0 volts with a voltmeter. Align the power input cable connector with the connector of the A side power entry card. Insert the power cable connector. Tighten the connector screws.
STEP 5: STEP 6: STEP 7: STEP 8: STEP 9: STEP 10: STEP 11:
3 - 12

STEP 12: STEP 13:
Repeat steps 1- 5 for the B-side power entry card. Repeat steps 1 - 6 for each of the remaining shelves in the installation.
Connecting Power Input Cables to the 19V and 23V Shelves
Critical
Major Minor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
ONI
Systems
IN
Power ACO
OUT
Figure 3-7. Power Entry Card Connector (19V or 23V) STEP 1: STEP 2: STEP 3: STEP 4: STEP 5: STEP 6: STEP 7: Remove the protective cover from the power connector. Remove the screw from the lower left connector on the Power Entry card labeled 48V. Remove the screw from the upper right connector on the Power Entry card labeled RTN. Install the ring lug of the red wire to the lower left connector on the Power Entry card labeled 48V. Install the ring lug of the black wire to the upper right connector on the Power Entry card labeled RTN (Figure 3-7). Replace and tighten the connector screws. Replace the protective cover on the power connector. Repeat steps 1 - 5 for the B side power entry card. Repeat steps 1 - 6 for each of the remaining shelves in the installation.
SHELF COOLING EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

The blower-air plenum is located in the bottom of the ONLINE Metro Transport Platform main and expansion shelves. In the 19V or 23V shelves, the main-shelf plenum contains cooling blowers, an air-filter located below the cooling blowers, the Alarm LED card, and the Power/Alarm Cut-off LED card. In the expansion shelves, the plenum contains cooling blowers and the Power LED card.
Installing Assemblies in the Blower-Air Plenums (19V or 23V)

STEP 1: STEP 2: Loosen either the two captive screws for a 19V chassis or three captive screws for a 23V chassis which attach the fan tray cover to the lower portion of the shelf assembly (Figure 3-8). Remove the blower cover and set it aside.
3 - 13
Critical
Major Minor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
ONI
Systems
IN
Power ACO
OUT
Critical
Major Minor
ONI
Systems
IN
Power ACO
OUT
Fan Tray cover Captive screws
Figure 3-8. Fan Tray Cover Removal (19V or 23V)
Installing Cooling Fan Trays (19V or 23V)

Use the steps provided in this section to install a fan tray on a 19V or 23V shelf. Unpack the fan tray. Position it so that the connector on the back of the tray faces the shelf (Figure 3-9). STEP 3: STEP 4: Slide the fan tray into place. The 19V shelf has a connector on the left side of the fan tray. The 23V shelf has connectors on the left and right side of the fan tray. Insert the fan tray connector into the backplane plug(s) (Figure 3-10). Press firmly on the front of the fan tray to ensure that it is fully inserted.
Critical
Major Minor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Power ACO
Fan Tray
Figure 3-9. Fan Tray Insertion (19Vor 23V)
3 - 14
Connector
Back of Blower assembly
Shelf Plug
Critical
Major Minor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Power ACO
Figure 3-10. Blower Connector and Backplane Plug Alignment (19V or 23V)
Air Inlet Filter (19V or 23V)

An air filter must always be installed to ensure that the air used for cooling is clean. Use the steps provided in this section to install the air inlet filter on a 19V or 23V shelf. For a 23-inch shelf, use the steps provided in the section Verifying Fan Tray Operation on page 3-16. TO VERIFY THAT THE AIR FILTER IS INSTALLED: STEP 1: STEP 2: Remove the access panel and visually verify that the air filter is installed. If it is not, perform Step 2 to install the air filter. To install an air inlet filter, position the air inlet filter for air flowing from the bottom of the shelf up through the filter to the top of the shelf (Figure 3-11). Up and down arrows indicate how the filter should be installed. Slide the air inlet filter into the shelf.
Critical
Major Minor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
ONI
Systems
IN
Power ACO
OUT
Air Inlet Filter
Figure 3-11. Air Inlet Filter Installation (19V and 23V)
3 - 15

Verifying Fan Tray Operation
If the shelf is powered on, air should be flowing up from the bottom of the shelf through the open circuit pack section of the shelf. If no air can be felt or no fan noise is observed, then proceed to the Troubleshooting appendix in this document.
3 - 16
INSTALLING CIRCUIT PACKS
CHAPTER 4 INSTALLING CIRCUIT PACKS

This chapter provides information and instructions for installing circuit packs (CPs) in an ONLINE Metro shelf. The chapter includes these sections:
u u u
Shelf Backplane Connectors and CP Positions on page 4-1 Inserting Circuit Packs on page 4-2 Main Shelf Circuit Pack Latching Sequence on page 4-5

Caution: To avoid permanent electrostatic discharge (ESD) to the CPs, both the chassis and the telecommunications rack must be grounded before you start inserting CPs.
The specific shelf positions for most of the CPs depends on the optical network topology to be used and the installation plan for the site. Use the site plan in conjunction with these instructions.
Note:
To ensure adequate airflow for cooling, always install filler CPs (blank faceplates) to fill any slots not occupied by CPs.

Warning:
SHELF BACKPLANE CONNECTORS AND CP POSITIONS

Figure 4-1 shows a shelf with the backplane and the CP connectors visible. The backplane connectors of slots for the Processor Element Module (PEM) CP and Persistent Storage Module (PSM) CP are keyed differently than the other slots, providing protection against accidently installing the wrong CP. Slots 11 and 12 are keyed the same, and slots 1-10 and 13-23 are keyed the same in a 23V shelf. Slots 9 and 10 are keyed the same, and slots 1-8 and 11-18 are keyed the same in a 19V shelf. Slots 13 and 14 are keyed the same, and slots 1-12 and 15-26 are keyed the same in a 23-inch shelf. Note that the four center CP slots (slot 10 through slot 13 in a 23V shelf, slot 8 through slot 11 in a 19V shelf, and slot 12 through slot 15 in a 23-inch shelf have connectors that the remaining slots do not have. Remove the clear plastic backplane pin protector on the inside of the shelf before inserting CPs.
4-1

Circuit Pack Slot Assignments
The ONLINE Metro Platform circuit packs must be inserted in the slots designated by the designed site plan. Verify the slot assignments given with the rules in Appendix C. If there are any deviation from the slot assignment rules, then please contact the CIENA Systems Engineer who prepared the site plan. Deviating from the site plan without consulting a CIENA Systems Engineer may produce undesirable results.
Inserting Circuit Packs

The following procedure describes how to insert and latch all types of CPs.

STEP 1: STEP 2:
Using the site plan, determine the right-most circuit pack to be installed. Open the CP shipping container, and remove the antistatic CP container. Retain all packaging materials from the CPs and all other ONLINE Metro Platform assemblies. These materials must be reused to transport and store assemblies when they are not in use.
Note:
Retain all packaging materials from the CPs and all other ONLINE Metro Platform assemblies. These materials must be reused to transport and store assemblies when they are not in use. STEP 3: Open the antistatic container holding the CP, and carefully remove the CP, as shown in Figure 4-1. Hold the CP by the faceplate only.

Caution: Hold the CP by the metal faceplate only. Never touch any parts of the CP, the circuit board, or the connectors
4-2
Figure 4-1. Removing a CP from Its Antistatic Container STEP 4: STEP 5: STEP 6: STEP 7: STEP 8: Verify that all of the MU connectors on the inside of the circuit pack are firmly seated into the bulkhead connector. Position the CP so that it is the top end of the faceplate is up and the electrical connectors on the edge of the circuit board are facing the back of the shelf. Align the circuit card edge with the upper and lower guides of the appropriate slot. Carefully position the CP between the slot guides so that the top-rear corner of the circuit card enters the top card slot, while the bottom-rear corner of the circuit card remains in the lower card slot. Insert the circuit pack into the shelf to a point where the shelf will properly hold the card in place without touching the backplane connectors. Always begin inserting the circuit packs starting from the right side of the chassis and continue with the next right-most circuit pack. It is important the circuit packs are not inserted fully at this point. The correct order and procedure for latching the circuit packs to the backplane are contained in the following section. Repeat the insertion process to this point until all circuit packs are in their appropriate shelves of the NE (based on the site plan). After all circuit packs are inserted, proceed to the latching sequence.
Note:
4-3

Negative 48 volts DC is present in the equipment. Contact can cause personal injury. Take appropriate safety precautions as some of the CP connectors on the ONLINE backplane present an electrical shock hazard. Never reach into a shelf with a conductive tool when power is applied to the equipment. If it becomes necessary to place your hand inside a shelf when power is applied, be very careful not to touch any of the backplane connectors or the CPs
Warning:
CIRCUIT PACK LATCHING PROCEDURE

After all circuit packs for a particular node have been inserted into the appropriate shelves, backplane connectivity must be established and the circuit packs must be latched in place. The following is the generic procedure for latching the circuit packs into the shelf. Please review this section prior to proceeding with the latching sequence.
Active Active RTN

Fail Active
RTN
CRAFT
CRAFT
LAN
25/MODEM X
Critical
Major Minor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
ONI
Systems
IN
Power ACO
OUT
Figure 4-2. Inserting a CP STEP 1: STEP 2: Grasp the unlocked latches and slowly slide in the circuit pack until it seats into the backplane. The latch levers should be positioned in line with the upper and lower lip of the shelf slot area. Move the latch levers at the top and bottom of the CP to the locked position, as shown in Figure 4-3, and verify that they have fully engaged the latching slots at the top and bottom of the shelf.
4-4
Active Active RTN

Fail Active
RTN
Fail Active
C R A F T
C R A F T
L A N
X 2 5 / M O D E M
Critical
Major Minor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
ONI
Systems
IN
Power ACO
OUT
Figure 4-3. Latching a CP in the Shelf
MAIN SHELF CIRCUIT PACK LATCHING SEQUENCE

The ONLINE Metro Platform circuit packs must be latched to the shelf in a specific sequence to ensure a successful installation. Using the latching instructions provided in the previous chapter, proceed with the following circuit pack latching sequence.
Warning:
LASER RADIATION AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM CLASS 3B LASER PRODUCT

Laser emissions may cause eye damage. Never look directly into fiber connectors. Always assume that laser radiation is present even when equipment is turned off.
Note:
For SNMP GNE configuration: When in GNE mode, there is a primary and backup node configured for trap generation. An SNMP management station can connect to any NE in the subnetwork and the authenticated users, who are provisioned on that NE, decide if the request is allowed or not. The authenticated users list is only relevant when an SNMP management station is connected to that NE and making SNMP requests to the subnetwork via that NE.
To reduce the possibility of a PEM or PSM installation mistake, if a pre-provisioned PEM or PSM is inserted in a shelf whose EEPROM contains a node number which does not match the node number of the preprovisioned PEM or PSM, the CP Active and CP Fail LEDs will blink in an alternating fashion for approximately one minute. This allows the card to be removed, if required.
4-5
Note:
For SNMP GNE configuration: When in GNE mode, there is a primary and backup node configured for trap generation. An SNMP management station can connect to any NE in the subnetwork and the authenticated users, who are provisioned on that NE, decide if the request is allowed or not. The authenticated users list is only relevant when an SNMP management station is connected to that NE and making SNMP requests to the subnetwork via that NE.
The user must verify that the Power ACO card is installed prior to installing the circuit packs and power is being supplied to the shelf. STEP 1: STEP 2: STEP 3: STEP 4: STEP 5: Latch the PSM CP into its slot on the main shelf. It may take between five and ten minutes for the PSM to boot. A solid green LED appears when the PSM CP has booted successfully. Latch the PEM CP into its slot on the main shelf. It may take between five and ten minutes for the PEM to boot. A solid green LED appears when the PEM CP has booted successfully. Latch the OSC-East in its slot. Wait approximately one minute for the circuit pack to boot. A solid green CP LED and solid red OSC LED should appear Latch the OSC-West in its slot. Wait approximately one minute for the circuit pack to boot. A solid green CP LED and solid red OSC LED should appear. Latch the remaining circuit packs working from the right side to the left side of the shelf. Wait for each individual circuit pack to have a solid or slow blinking green CP LED before latching the next circuit pack.
4-6
Table 4-1. CP LED States After Installation 1 LEDs and States After installation CP Type LED Name PEM (CP) Fail (CP) Active (CP) Active PSM (CP) Fail (CP) Active (CP) Active OSC/COM/ MCOMH (CP) Fail (CP) Active (CP) Active (OSC) Fail (OSC) Active Blower A Blower B Pre-Amp/ Post-Amp Fail Active Active Line Fail Active Active WPS Fail Active Active Switch RSM Fail Active Active Switch Off Flashing green Solid green Off Flashing green Solid green Off Flashing green Solid green Red Off Off Off Off Flashing green Solid green Off Flashing green Solid green Off Flashing green Solid green Off Off Flashing green Solid green Off State Definition Normal operation (LED is red during boot) CP is booting. CP has booted and is ready. Normal operation (LED is red during boot.) CP is booting. CP has booted and is ready. Normal operation (LED is red during boot.) CP has booted but is not provisioned. CP has booted and is provisioned. No signal. No signal. Normal operation (red if blower failure.) Normal operation (red if blower failure.) Normal operation (LED is red during boot.) CP has booted but is not provisioned. CP has booted and is provisioned. Normal operation (LED is red during boot.) CP has booted but is not provisioned. CP has booted and is provisioned. Normal operation (LED is red during boot.) CP has booted but is not provisioned. CP has booted and is provisioned. Normal operation. Normal operation (LED is red during boot.) CP has booted but is not provisioned. CP has booted and is provisioned. Normal operation.
4-7
Table 4-1. CP LED States After Installation (Continued)1 LEDs and States After installation CP Type LED Name BWDM & BWDM-U Fail Active Active ABWDM & ABWDM-U Fail Active Active CWDM & CWDM-U Fail Active Active Switch WCI Fail Active Active Red Flashing green Solid green Red Flashing green Solid green Off Flashing green Solid green Off Red Flashing green Solid green State Definition CP is booting (LED is off after boot.) CP has booted but is not provisioned. CP has booted and is provisioned. CP is booting (LED is off after boot.) CP has booted but is not provisioned. CP has booted and is provisioned. Normal operation (LED is red during boot.) CP has booted but is not provisioned. CP has booted and is provisioned. Normal operation. CP is booting (LED is off after boot.) CP has booted but is not provisioned. CP has booted and is provisioned.
1. LED lights will flash if the slot is not yet provisioned. CP LEDs will be solid green if the slot is provisioned.
EXPANSION SHELF CIRCUIT PACK LATCHING SEQUENCE

The expansion shelf circuit packs must be latched into the shelf in a specific sequence to ensure a successful installation. Using proper latching technique, proceed with the following circuit pack latching sequence.
Note: STEP 1: STEP 2: STEP 3: STEP 4: STEP 5:
Verify the Power ACO card is installed prior to installing the circuit packs.
Latch one of the two COM circuit packs into the Expansion shelf. Wait approximately one minute for the COM to boot. A fast blinking green LED appears when the COM CP is waiting to be provisioned. Insert the second COM circuit pack into the Expansion shelf. Wait approximately one minute for the COM to boot. A fast blinking green LED appears when the COM CP is waiting to be provisioned. Connect an Ethernet cable from the Down port of the west OSC circuit pack to the Up port of the west COM circuit pack. Connect another Ethernet cable from the Down port of the east OSC circuit pack to the Up port of the east COM circuit pack. If after 5 minutes the LEDs on the COM circuit pack are solid green, then the shelf has been Installation, Turn-up, and Test Manual September 30, 2003 - Revision A 009-2003-294
4-8
added and provisioned successfully. Proceed to Step 15 for latching instructions for the remaining circuit packs in the shelf. STEP 6: STEP 7: STEP 8: If the LEDs are blinking, then use MTM software and follow steps 7 through 14 to verify the shelf has been added. Expand the node in the tree pane. If the shelf is not present, then the shelf must be added. Start by selecting the node in the tree pane. If the shelf is present and the COM CP LEDs are still blinking after 5 minutes, then the shelf ID must be configured. Refer to (Setting Shelf Number Procedure on page A-4) for instructions on using the Shelf ID Utility.
Note:
Select the provisioning option from the menu bar and select Add Shelf. Select shelf type. Click OK. Verify the shelf has been added by expanding the node icon in the tree pane. Reconnect the Ethernet cables from the shelf above to the expansion shelf. Wait up to 5 minutes for the COM CP LEDs to turn to a solid green state. If the shelf is present and the COM CP LEDs are still blinking after 5 minutes, then the shelf ID must be configured. Refer to (Setting Shelf Number Procedure on page A-4) for instructions on using the Shelf ID Utility.
Note:
STEP 15:
Proceed by latching the remaining circuit packs in the expansion shelf starting from the right most circuit pack and waiting for the circuit pack to fully boot (either solid green or blinking green).
Additional Expansion Shelves

It is possible the node has more than one expansion shelf. In this scenario, the Down ports on the COM circuit packs would be connected to the Up ports on the COM circuit packs of the expansion shelf next in line. Repeat steps 5 through 15 above as needed.
4-9
4 - 10
CABLE AND FIBER MANAGEMENT
CHAPTER 5 CABLE AND FIBER MANAGEMENT

This chapter provides cable management information for network elements (NEs) in these sections:
u u u u u
Connecting Fibers on page 5-1 Guidelines for Handling and Working with Fibers on page 5-1 Guidelines for Handling and Working with Fibers on page 5-1 Use of PADs on page 5-2 Connecting Circuit Pack Fibers on page 5-4
CONNECTING FIBERS
Note:
Cable connections are specified in the site plan for each installation.

GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING AND WORKING WITH FIBERS

Fibers are durable, but they can be damaged if they are not handled properly. Use the following guidelines whenever you handle optical fibers:
u u u
Do not remove fibers from their packaging until you are ready to connect them. Do not touch fiber ends with your hands. To avoid scratching or other damage, keep fiber ends capped when you expect to leave them unconnected for an extended period of time. Handle the fibers carefully to avoid nicking or cutting the sheath and the optical fiber within it. Handle the fibers carefully; rough handling can fracture a fiber internally. Always use a fiber management tray to contain any extra fiber length. Do not attempt to clean fiber ends or bulkhead connectors using any methods or materials other than the ones discussed in the next section.
u u u u
5-1
CABLE AND FIBER MANAGEMENT USE OF PADS
Power attenuating devices (PADs) are used with fibers to protect equipment from saturation or damage by strong light sources. When appropriate, PADs are used at the tributary and line interfaces to protect both ONLINE Metro Transport Platform and customer equipment. Required PAD values for fibers are provided in the site plan. PADs can be in MU, SC, or FC connector types. For example, Figure 5-1 shows a PAD installed on an SC connector.
Note:
To prevent saturation or damage from strong light sources, PADs may be necessary on some fibers to reduce the light power.
PAD
Figure 5-1. PAD Installed On SC Connector
DUAL MU BULKHEAD CONNECTOR CONVENTION

Dual MU bulkhead connectors are used on the faceplate of the CPs. The transmit and receive fibers are installed with the following convention:
u u
Top: Light in (receive) Bottom: Light out (transmit)
MANAGING FIBERS AND CABLING

Warning:

5-2
Because all fiber and cable connections (other than input power and ground) are on the front of the ONLINE Metro CPs, managing fibers and cables is a very critical part of the installation process. If fibers or intershelf cables connected to a CP are incorrectly routed so that they pass in front of one or more other CPs, you may not be able to remove and replace one of the CPs without disconnecting the incorrectly routed fibers or cables. If you are forced to disconnect fibers or cables not associated with a CP you need to remove, some other traffic (or possibly an entire node) could experience an outage. Other maintenance also may have to be interrupted simply because the incorrectly routed fibers or cables must be disconnected to provide physical access to the CP you need to remove. Therefore, it is extremely important to follow the rules and guidelines presented in this section.
Note:
All fibers and/or cables must be contained within the profile of their respective circuit pack faceplate.
An example of correct fiber routing is shown in Figure 5-2. This grouping prevents both mechanical interferences and overlap with the adjacent CPs. The fibers are curved horizontally for easy exit on left or right ends of the shelf.
Figure 5-2. Correct Fiber Routing Whenever possible, route intershelf cables, the metallic communications lines between Optical Service Channel (OSC) and Communication (COM) CPs, behind all fibers.
Note:
FIBER MANAGEMENT TRAYS

Each shelf typically requires a fiber management tray unit with a combination of patch and storage trays for organizing and routing fiber to and from the shelf. Fiber management trays are not part of the shelf and are typically ordered separately. Examples of fiber management trays are shown in Figure 5-3 and Figure 5-4. The appearance of the trays vary according to model and manufacturer and can look different than those depicted in the figures. Each rack usually has a fiber management tray unit. The trays can slide into the rack after routing has been completed. Refer to local fiber management practice for routing, splicing, and storing fibers.
5-3
Figure 5-3. Patch Fiber Management Tray
Figure 5-4. Storage Fiber Management Tray
CONNECTING CIRCUIT PACK FIBERS

The site plan Visio diagrams will provide all intra-node fiber connections. Connect each fiber to the respective circuit packs then follow by dressing the fiber using the fiber exit guides and fiber trays. Refer to site plan Visio diagram for site specific circuit pack fiber connections. Adhere to customer requirements for the fiber tray and/or individual fiber labeling.
5-4
PROVISIONING
CHAPTER 6 PROVISIONING
After the rack and shelf installation steps are completed, the following procedures must be applied to each individual network element (NE) within the proposed subnetwork design. These procedures are used for the turn-up of the ONLINE Metro Platform.
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
Task Flow on page 6-1 Verify Site Compliance on page 6-1 Verify ONLINE Metro CIT Compatibility on page 6-2 Initializing the NE on page 6-4 Provisioning Circuit Packs on page 6-15 Configuring Span Attributes on page 6-72a Circuit Provisioning on page 6-73 Creating 3rd party DWDM circuits with CWMD-U Cards on page 6-79 Provisioning Stand Alone DWDM Nodes (Virtual Nodes) on page 6-93
TASK FLOW
Before any subnetwork configuration can be correctly turned up and verified, each NE must be initialized, have its subnet topology defined, and the CPs must be provisioned. Before beginning to turn up NEs, you must perform the following tasks, in the order specified: 1. Verify site compliance. 2. Verify ONLINE Metro CIT Compatibility 3. Initializing the NE. 4. Provisioning the Circuit Packs. 5. Circuit Provisioning.
Note:
When the Node ID is assigned during node turn-up, it can not be modified without removing the node from service, bringing down the node, and turning it up again.
VERIFY SITE COMPLIANCE

STEP 1: STEP 2: STEP 3: Check the site plan and office records to confirm all of the required equipment has been delivered, unpacked, and correctly installed. Check the site plan and office records to confirm the environment is up to the required standards. Verify the CP LED is solid green for the PEM, PSM and both OSC circuit packs. The OSC circuit packs will have a solid red OSC LED. This is expected behavior.
Note:
Installation, Turn-up, and Test Manual November 3, 2003 - Revision A - Change 1 009-2003-294
6-1
PROVISIONING VERIFY ONLINE METRO CIT COMPATIBILITY

.
R E F E R T O D I S C L A I M E R I N
P R E F A C E !
To confirm that the software load installed on the NE is compatible with the ONLINE Metro CIT version used, the following steps are performed.
Note:
During network deployment, ONLINE Metro CIT is backwards compatible through three feature releases (Ex. 6.1 ONLINE Metro CIT will work with system software 4.2.x, 5.0.x, and 6.0.X).
STEP 1: STEP 2:
Using a DTE RS-232 cable with a male DB-9 connector on one end and a female DB-9 connector on the other, connect a PC, with VT100 terminal emulation software installed, from a serial port on the PC to the female DB-9 port on the PEM circuit pack. Launch the VT100 terminal application. Login to the node as superuser with a password of superuser Figure 6-1.
Figure 6-1. CLI Login STEP 3: Use the CLI show version command to view the current software version number on the NE. Verify that a compatible software load is listed as the Current Release Figure 6-2.
6-2
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-2. CLI Show Version
Note:
If a compatible software load is not listed as the Current Release, then a different version of ONLINE Metro CIT is needed to initialize and provision the node. It may be necessary to perform a system software upgrade after the initialization and provisioning process has been completed for the sub-network.
STEP 4:
Exit the CLI by using the logout command.
6-3
PROVISIONING INITIALIZING THE NE

P R E F A C E !
Initializing the NE
STEP 1: STEP 2: STEP 3: STEP 4: Connect a straight-through CAT 5 cable from the Ethernet interface of the PC to the CRAFT interface on the PEM. Manually configure the IP address of the PC with the ONLINE Metro CIT software installed to 10.1.4.x (Valid values for x are 2 through 254) After confirming that the new IP address on the PC has been changed, launch a command window on the PC and verify that the PC can PING the CRAFT interface IP Address at 10.1.4.1. Launch the ONLINE Metro CIT software. Log in to the to system using: User ID: superuser, Password: superuser Figure 6-3
Figure 6-3. ONLINE Metro CIT Login If the node has not been previously provisioned, the ONLINE Metro CIT will automatically launch the NE Setup Wizard Figure 6-4.
6-4
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-4. NE Setup Wizard STEP 5: STEP 6: Click Next. Select the Normal Turnup radio button from the Recovery Mode window as displayed below Figure 6-5.
Figure 6-5. NE Setup Wizard 2nd Installation, Turn-up, and Test Manual September 30, 2003 - Revision A 009-2003-294
6-5
PROVISIONING
STEP 7: Node ID (numeric only)
Click Next From the NE Panel, enter the following information Figure 6-6:
Note:
Once the Node ID is assigned during node turn-up, it can not be modified without removing the node from service, bringing down the node, and turning it up again.
Node Label (20 alphanumeric) SID (If applicable) The SID must be unique to the NE within any managed domain, and may contain up to 20 alphanumeric characters.
Figure 6-6. NE Setup Wizard 3rd STEP 8: If new IP Addresses for the LAN and CRAFT interfaces have been provided on the site plan, then proceed with steps 11 through 14 for both the LAN and CRAFT port. If no IP Addressing changes have been provided, leave the Assign IP Address selection unchecked and proceed to Step 15. From the Adapter pull-down menu, select the CRAFT interface Enter the IP Address as per the site plan Enter the Subnet mask as per the site plan Enter the Default Gateway as per the site plan Click Next To setup NE time options, click the Select button Figure 6-7.
6-6
PROVISIONING
Note:
If the Node is going to be configured as an NTP Client, the This is an NTP Client box must be checked, and the Select button for Date/Time will not be available. An NTP Client does not need to specify a date and time as it will receive that information form an NTP server.
Figure 6-7. NE Setup Wizard 4th STEP 15: The Chose Date/Time window appears. Select the appropriate date and time Figure 6-8. Time must be entered as GMT (Ex. GMT = Pacific Standard Time +8 hours).
6-7
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-8. Choose Date/Time STEP 16: STEP 17: Click OK. If the node is to be used as an NTP client, then check the This NE is an NTP client selection. It is possible for a node to be both a client and a server. If the node is going to be a server only, then proceed to Step 22. For an NTP Client, the Select button for Date/Time will not be available. An NTP Client does not need to specify a date and time as it will receive that information form an NTP server.
Note:
Example: A node may be a server for the sub-network it belongs to, but also act as a client to an external timing source such as a PC acting as an NTP server Figure 6-9.
6-8
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-9. NE Setup Wizard NTP Client STEP 18: STEP 19: STEP 20: STEP 21: Using either a Node ID or IP Address, enter the appropriate primary NTP server information into the respective field. If secondary NTP server information has been provided, enter either the Node ID or IP Address into its respective field. Click Next. Change Password screen. If the default password is to be changed, then check the Change Password selection and fill in all fields (Figure 6-10).
6-9
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-10. NE Setup Wizard Change Password STEP 22: STEP 23: Click Next. NE Topology screen. Using the site plan as a reference, select the appropriate NE Type from the pull-down menu displayed below Figure 6-11.
Figure 6-11. NE Setup Wizard Select Topology
6 - 10

STEP 24:
PROVISIONING
Using the site plan as a reference, select either the Open or Closed selection from the Unprotected pull-down menu in the Optical Circuit Type section Figure 6-12.
Figure 6-12. NE Setup Wizard Optical Circuit Type STEP 25: Based on the NE Type selection made, it may be necessary to make Band and Amplifier selections. Using the site plan as a reference, check the appropriate combination of Ampless Configuration, Optimal PMA, Symmetric Band, and Conjugate Band check boxes and radio buttons. Also, it is necessary to select a VOA mode of Open or Closed (Figure 6-13).
Figure 6-13. NE Setup Wizard Set Amp Configuration and VOA Mode Installation, Turn-up, and Test Manual September 30, 2003 - Revision A 009-2003-294
6 - 11
PROVISIONING
STEP 26:
O-BLSR Only: In the Optical Circuit Type area Figure 6-14: Select either Open or Closed from the Preemptible pull-down menu (refer to site plan). Select Open or Closed for the VOA Mode. Select Symmetric or Conjugate Bands. Select the appropriate slot number from the pull-down menus associated with each circuit pack: RSM, WPS East, and WPS West.
Figure 6-14. NE Setup Wizard O-BLSR STEP 27: STEP 28: Click Next. Using the site plan as a reference, select the appropriate fiber type settings. These settings are for the outside plant fibers only and not the fibers used to interconnect the nodes circuit packs (Figure 6-15).
6 - 12
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-15. NE Setup Wizard Fiber Types STEP 29: STEP 30: Click Next The Node ID/Type Window appears Figure 6-16. On the Node ID/Node Type window, click the Add button to add the additional nodes in the subnetwork. The Node ID and Node Type will need to entered and selected respectively. Perform this step for each node in the sub-network. PTP and LADM sub-networks: Node IDs must start with the west terminating node at the top of the list and then all other nodes must be listed in sequence moving from west to east. The list will end with the east terminating node. Note the specific Node ID order as the exact sequence must be entered when initializing the other nodes in the network. Use the Up and Down arrows to move the nodes into the appropriate order. Ring Configurations: Node IDs may start with any node in the ring and then proceed clockwise around the sub-network. Once the desired sequence has been established and entered, the exact order must be used with all of the other nodes in the sub-network. Use the Up and Down arrows to move the nodes into the appropriate order. Example: Node 1 sequence: 1, 2, 3 - Node 2 sequence: 1, 2, 3 - Node 3 sequence 1, 2, 3
6 - 13
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-16. NE Setup Wizard Node ID Window STEP 31: STEP 32: Click Finish. The Information success screen is displayed (Figure 6-17).
Figure 6-17. NE Setup Wizard Success Screen STEP 33: Click OK. After performing this step, the node will reboot and ONLINE Metro CIT Setup Wizard will automatically close.
6 - 14
ONLINE Metro Platform PROVISIONING CIRCUIT PACKS
PROVISIONING
After the node has been initialized, circuit pack provisioning must be performed. Follow the steps below for each circuit pack that must be installed To reach the individual circuit pack provisioning screens, select the node in the tree pane and then from the Provisioning menu, select Add Circuit Pack and select the appropriate circuit pack. Always refer to the site plan when making the appropriate selections for each circuit pack screen.
Provisioning Circuit Packs

STEP 1: From the ONLINE Metro CIT Main Menu, select Provisioning => Add Card => select the desired Card (Figure 6-18).
Figure 6-18. Add Card
Provisioning Line Circuit Packs

This section describes how to access and use the GCIT tool with which to add a line card to an ONLINE shelf.
6 - 15
PROVISIONING
Adding a Line Card to the Main Shelf
STEP 1:
Right-click on the shelf icon, then choose Provisioning Add Card pop-up menu to open the Add Line dialog box (Figure 6-19).
Add Line... in the
Figure 6-19. Add Line Card Dialog Box STEP 2: STEP 3: STEP 4: In the Card Position drop-down lists, select the shelf and slot in which the CP resides. Click west or east in the Side pane. Select one of the OLM, OSM, POSTAMP, or LINE option buttons to identify the line card type: OLM The Optical Line Module CP is used for UPSR configurations that need a fixed gain preamp and for all BLSR configurations. OSM The Optical Splitter Module is used along with the PMM CP (for pass-throughs) in UPSR configurations. This card removes the attenuation from the Line cards and provides it through pads or VOAs at other locationsthis improves the link budget. The regular Line/ Post-amp can be replaced with OSM cards with software upgrade, if fixed-gain Pre-amp CP are not present. OSM cards and regular Line cards can be mixed within the same NE. This CP is not used if a fixed gain pre-amp is required. POSTAMP Use this option if you are using a Postamp CP. LINE Use this option to assign the Line CP.
STEP 5: STEP 6: STEP 7: STEP 8: STEP 9:
After you complete the dialog box entries, click OK to add the Line CP to the shelf. The card is now displayed wherever its shelf is expanded. Repeat steps 1 through 5 for the other Line circuit pack. Before proceeding to further provisioning of other circuit packs, it will be necessary to set the span attributes based on the site plan. Verify the Line CP LED is solid green. With the node highlighted in the tree pane view, from the Configuration menu, select Network Element and then Set Span Attributes (Figure 6-20).
6 - 16
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-20. Setting Span Attributes STEP 10: STEP 11: STEP 12: Using the site plan, insert the west and east span loss values along with the number of planned channels for both the west and east side. Using the pull-down menu, select the number of channels per band. Click Apply.
Provisioning AMP Circuit Packs

TO ADD AN AMPLIFIER CARD TO THE MAIN SHELF STEP 1: Right-click on the shelf icon, then choose Provisioning pop-up menu as shown in Figure 6-21.
Add Card Add Amp... in the
6 - 17
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-21. Add Amplification Dialog Box STEP 2: STEP 3: STEP 4: In the Card Position drop-down lists, select the shelf and slot in which the CP resides. Click west or east in the Side pane. Set Mode and or Gain: The Variable Gain Amplifier CP improves the link performance. Click Post-VGA, PreVGA, or Pre-amp to select the type of amplification for the card: Post-VGA Amplifies optical signals leaving the node (BLSR and LADM configurations). Pre-VGA Amplifies optical signals coming into the node (UPSR configurations). Pre-amp Only permits fixed-gain operation.
The Variable Gain Amplifier CP can have the gain changed from 10dB to 25dB. Select one of the Fixed 23dB or Optimal option buttons to select the type of amplification for the card: Fixed 23dB Fixes the amplifier gain at 23dB. Optimal Enables variable gain in the range from 10db to 25dB.
STEP 5:
After you complete the dialog box entries, click OK to add the card to the shelf.
The card is now displayed wherever its shelf is expanded.
Provisioning BWDM Circuit Packs

This section describes how to add a Band Wavelength Division Multiplexer CP to an ONLINE NE . Before adding any card or service, verify the integrity of the fiber connections. Regardless, adding cards may create alarms.
Caution:
6 - 18

PROVISIONING
P R E F A C E !
ADDING A BWDM CP STEP 1: Right-click on the shelf icon, then choose Provisioning Add Card Add BWDM... from the pop-up menu, as shown in Figure 6-22.
Figure 6-22. Add BWDM Dialog Box STEP 2: Use the following guidelines to add the BWDM CP: Band The Band selection can be single- or all-band. Band drop CPs have both a multiplex (transmit) and demultiplex (receive) band. The selected band corresponds to the multiplex band. Channel Access Type Click Channel Access Type to choose BLSR protected or unprotected channel access. Side Click west or east in the Side pane. Card Position Click Card Position to select the shelf and slot position for the BWDM CP. Circuit Pack Role Click Primary or Backup in the Circuit Pack Role box to make the BWDM a primary or backup CP type. Fiber Chain Location Option Change the default of the Fiber Chain Option to insert a BWDM CP between existing BWDM CPs. You can specify the band number of an existing BWDM CP to which the newly-installed BWDM CP will be connected. The valid values for this option are B1 to B11, B1-B5 (All Band), B7-B11 (All Band), First in Chain, or Last in Chain. The default option for this field is First in the chain, which adds the BWDM Card in the first position of the fiber chain.
6 - 19
PROVISIONING
STEP 3:
After entering the dialog box entries, click OK to add the card. The fiber list reflects the added BWDM CP. For O-UPSR, PTP, and Linear configurations, a BWDM CP may be added as a unswitched (hitless or optimal) channel access type. For OBLSR configurations, a BWDM CP may only be added as a switched channel access type. However, a unswitched circuit (B6) is also supported.
Note:
Provisioning CWDM Circuit Packs

This section describes how to add a Channel Wavelength Division Multiplexer CP to an ONLINE Metro NE. . Before adding any card or service, verify the integrity of the fiber connections. Regardless, adding cards may create alarms.
Caution:
R E F E R
T O
D I S C L A I M E R
I N
P R E F A C E !
ADDING A CHANNEL WAVELENGTH DIVISION MULTIPLEXING CP STEP 1: Right-click on the shelf icon, then choose Provisioning Add Card Add CWDM... from the pop-up menu, as shown in Figure 6-23.
Figure 6-23. Add CWDM Dialog Box
6 - 20

STEP 2: Use the following guidelines to add the CWDM CP: CWDM Type
PROVISIONING
CWDM CWDM UE (includes VOAs, and trib side protection) Band Select the Band. Band drop cards have both a multiplex (transmit) and demultiplex (receive) band. The selected band corresponds to the multiplex band. Side Click west or east in the Side pane. Card Position Click Card Position to select the shelf and slot position for the CWDM card.
STEP 3: STEP 4:
Click OK to add the card. After the subnetwork is fully provisioned and locked, set the CWDM-U VOA at or below the PMA Suggested Value. The CWDM-U contains a demux VOA that must be manually set to the required attenuation during circuit turn up. The default value of 30 dB is squelch and will not allow power to come up. Loss of Signal Line alarms will be raised against the associated facilities until the VOAs are properly set. The VOA demux can be set by selecting the Power Management Facility in the ONLINE Metro CIT tree and from the right-click menu selecting Set Drop Side Attenutation or using the modify facility obs CLI command.
Note:
The CLI command uses the following syntax: modify facility obs [help|?] <facilityname> <attenuation> [-force] Refer to the ONLINE Metro Multiservice Dense Wave Division Multiplexing (DWDM) Transport Platform CLI Reference Manual for more details about this command.
Figure 6-24. Set VOA Attenuation
6 - 21
PROVISIONING
STEP 5: STEP 6: Set the Attenuation value and click Apply.
Click Refresh to verify the Actual Rx Power value is set appropriately based on the Target Rx Power. The Refresh button may need to be clicked several times as the VOA adjustment may take several seconds to stabilize. If required, reset the attenuation value based on the Actual and Target Rx Power values.
Note:
Provisioning WCI Circuit Packs

This section describes how to add a WCI CP to an ONLINE Metro NE. . Before adding any card or service, verify the integrity of the fiber connections. Regardless, adding cards may create alarms.
Caution:
R E F E R
T O
D I S C L A I M E R
I N
P R E F A C E !
ADDING A WAVELENGTH CONVERTER INTERFACE CP STEP 1: Right-click on the shelf icon, then choose Provisioning Add Card Add WCI... in the popup menu, as shown in Figure 6-25.
Figure 6-25. Add WCI Card Dialog Box
6 - 22

STEP 2: Use the following guidelines to add the WCI CP:
PROVISIONING
WCI Mode Click Single West, Single East, Static Regen, UPSR, Standalone or StandAloneUPSR to set the WCI CP transponder type. Single West activates West Band, Single East activates East Band, and Static Regen activates both bands. In a Two Fiber Och ODPR (O-UPSR) system, selecting Standalone UPSR will add one UPSR Splitter Card (also known as the Working/Protect SplitterWPS) card, and two associated WCI cards. Standalone modes are used for gateway node provisioning. The Standalone and Standalone UPSR feature allows the NE the ability to function as a gateway node and as a gateway node with a splitter for protected traffic. West Band Click West Band to select a westbound band. Band drop cards have both a multiplex (transmit) and demultiplex (receive) band; the selected band corresponds to the multiplex band. East Band Click East Band to select an eastbound band. Band drop cards have both a multiplex (transmit) and demultiplex (receive) band; the selected band corresponds to the multiplex band. Channel Click Channel to choose a channel within the band from C1 to C3. West or East Card Position Click West Card Position or East Card Position or both (whichever is activated) to select the shelf and slot position for the WCI card. WCI Type Select 2R: Standard 850nm, 2R: Standard 1310 nm, 2R: ESCON, 3R: Standard, 3R: Standard OC192, 3R Standard OC192-A, 3R: Enhanced, FEC at All Rates WCI, 2.5G Regional, or 10Gb E LAN WCI. The Two R (RR) transponder regenerates and reshapes the signal. The Three R (RRR) transponder regenerates, reshapes, and re-times the signal.
Figure 6-26. WCI Types in the ADD WCI Dialog Box Installation, Turn-up, and Test Manual September 30, 2003 - Revision A 009-2003-294
6 - 23
PROVISIONING
STEP 3:
After entering the dialog box entries, click OK to add the card
Configuring OC-48 STMX and STEM

ADDING A WCI CARD STEP 1: Right-click on the shelf icon, then choose Provisioning Add Card Add WCI... in the popup menu, as shown in Figure 6-27.
Figure 6-27. Add WCI Card Dialog Box STEP 2: WCI Mode Click Single West or Single East to set the WCI CP transponder type. West Band Click West Band to select a westbound band. Band drop cards have both a multiplex (transmit) and demultiplex (receive) band; the selected band corresponds to the multiplex band. East Band Click East Band to select an eastbound band. Band drop cards have both a multiplex (transmit) and demultiplex (receive) band; the selected band corresponds to the multiplex band. Channel Click Channel to choose a channel within the band from C1 to C3. West or East Card Position Click West Card Position or East Card Position or both (whichever is activated) to select the shelf and slot position for the WCI card. Installation, Turn-up, and Test Manual September 30, 2003 - Revision A 009-2003-294
Use the following guidelines to select the correct options:
Single West activates West Band Single East activates East Band
6 - 24

WCI Type Select 3R: Standard, 3R: Enhanced, FEC at All Rates WCI, or 2.5G Regional. STEP 3: STEP 4: After you enter the dialog box entries, click OK to add the card.
PROVISIONING
List the settings that were made (the settings will be needed later in the configuration).
ADDING AN STMX CARD . Before adding any card or service, verify the integrity of the fiber connections. Regardless, adding cards may create alarms.
Caution:
STEP 1:
Right-click on the shelf icon, then choose Provisioning the pop-up menu, as shown in Figure 6-28.
Add Card Add STMX... from
Figure 6-28. Add STMX Dialog Box STEP 2:

u u
Use the following guidelines to add the STMX card: STMX Configuration - Select Primary or Chained depending on the STMX configuration. Card Position - Click Card Position to select the shelf and slot position for the STMX card Table 6-1.
6 - 25
PROVISIONING
Table 6-1. STMX and STEM CP Slot Location 23V CP Connection STMX STEM 23 Main Not Applicable Not Applicable 1&3, 5&7, 16&18, 20&22 Expansion 1&3, 5&7, 16&18, 20&22 Main 1&3, 15&17 Expansion 1&3, 5&7, 11&13, 15&17 19V
Left or right of existing 8-port STMX restricted to vertical backplane slots
Band Click Band to select a band. Band drop cards have both a multiplex (transmit) and demultiplex (receive) band. The selected band corresponds to the multiplex band. Channel Click Channel to choose a channel within the band from C1 to C3. Side Click Side to choose the west or east side within a particular node. Port Configuration The STMX card multiplexes a 4-port or 8-port SONET/SDH OC-3/STM-1, OC-12/STM-4, or OC-48/STM16 to one higher speed SONET/SDH channel. It also performs the corresponding demultiplex function:
u
4 Port: This configuration supports a mix of OC-3(c)/STM-1 OC-12(c)/STM-4 channels at its tributary interfaces. 8 Port: The first four ports of the tributary interfaces support a mix of OC-3(c)/SMT-1 OC-12(c)/ STM-4 channels and the second four ports support only OC-3(c)/STM-1 channels.
Mode The STMX card has two mode options:

u
Transparent (default): The transparent mode allows the multiplexer to be transparent to other SONET equipment.
Note:
Setting the STMX card to operate in transparent mode results in AIS generation toward the OC-48 side unless at least one of the low-speed STMX tributaries receives a valid SONET signal. This option can be set only after the STMX is added.
Line Terminating Equipment (LTE): The LTE mode allows you to perform automatic protection switching in the future.
Transmission Format The STMX card has two transmission format modes: SONET or SDH. You must specify one of these modes. Further, the card can be provisioned in a specified node/band/channel/side only if a WCI card exists and only if the circuit has not already been provisioned.
6 - 26

STEP 3: After entering the dialog box entries, click OK to add the card.
PROVISIONING
ADDING AN STEM CARD STEP 1: Right-click on the shelf icon, then choose Provisioning the pop-up menu. The Add STMX dialog box opens (Figure 6-29).
Add Card Add STEM... from
Figure 6-29. Add STEM Dialog Box
Note:
Refer to the ONLINE Metro Engineering and Planning Guide for further details on SONET/SDH multiplexer configurations
Note: STEP 2:
The total bandwidth provisioned on the 16 ports must not exceed OC48.
Use the following guidelines to add the STEM card:
Card Position Click Card Position to select the shelf and slot position for the STMX card (Table 6-2). Table 6-2. STMX and STEM CP Slot Location CP Connection STMX STEM Band Click Band to select a band. Band drop cards have both a multiplex (transmit) and demultiplex (receive) band. The selected band corresponds to the multiplex band. 23 Not Applicable Not Applicable 23V Main 1&3, 5&7, 16&18, 20&22 Expansion 1&3, 5&7, 16&18, 20&22 Main 1&3, 15&17 19V Expansion 1&3, 5&7, 11&13, 15&17
Left or right of existing 8-port STMX to restricted vertical backplane slots
6 - 27
PROVISIONING
Channel Click Channel to choose a channel within the band from C1 to C3. Side Click Side to choose the West or East side within a particular node. STEP 3:
After you enter the dialog box entries, click OK to add the card.
Provision Gigabit-Rate Data Mux (GRDM and GRDMII) CPs

This section contains the following procedures:

u u
Adding a WCI Card on page 6-28 Add GRDM and GRDMII CPs on page 6-30
Assign Line-side OC-48 Equipment

Subrate multiplexers with an OC-48 line-side can get line-side signals from either 3RWCIs or an OC-48 port of the SMX-10G. In the SMX-10G scenario, you must first provision the SMX node and the OC-192 lineside connections. See Provisioning an ONWAVE Node With SMX-10G CP on page 6-47. In the OC-48 optical circuit scenario, first provision WCIs, as shown below. . Before you add any card or service, verify the integrity of the fiber connections. Regardless, adding cards may create alarms.
Caution:
Adding a WCI Card

ADDING A WAVELENGTH CONVERTER INTERFACE CARD STEP 1: Right-click on the shelf icon, then choose Provisioning the ADD WCI configuration window (Figure 6-30).
Add Card Add WCI... to open
6 - 28
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-30. ADD WCI Dialog Box STEP 2: Use the following guidelines to select the correct options:
WCI Mode - Click Single West, Single East, Stand Alone, Stand Alone UPSR to set the WCI CP transponder type Figure 6-30. Single West activates West Band Static Regen activates both bands. Stand Alone Stand Alone UPSR
West Band - Click West Band to select a westbound band. Band drop cards have both a multiplex (transmit) and demultiplex (receive) band; the selected band corresponds to the multiplex band. East Band - Click East Band to select an eastbound band. Band drop cards have both a multiplex (transmit) and demultiplex (receive) band; the selected band corresponds to the multiplex band. Channel - Click Channel to choose a channel within the band from C1 to C3. West or East Card Position - Click West Card Position or East Card Position or both (whichever is activated) to select the shelf and slot position for the WCI card. WCI Type - Select 3R: Standard. This is the only option supported for this configuration.
6 - 29
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-31. WCI Types in the ADD WCI Dialog Box STEP 3: STEP 4: List the settings that you have made (youll need them later in the configuration). After you enter the dialog box entries, click OK to add the card.
Add GRDM and GRDMII CPs

Note:
GRDMII can also be added to an ONWAVE node.
GRDMII can also be added to an ONWAVE node. ADDING A GRDM AND GRDMII CP STEP 1: Right-click on the shelf icon, then select from the drop menu Provisioning > Add Card > Add GRDM to open the Add GRDM configuration window Figure 6-32.
6 - 30
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-32. Provision GRDM Configuration Window STEP 2: Select the settings for Card Position, Tributary Tansceiver Type, Transmission Format, Data Protocol, and DCC cluster Id, then click on the OK button to add the GRDM card. The Transmission Format is not available for GRDMII cards. The ONWAVE node transmission format is used when the tributary port transmission type is different from the line side transmission type. After the transmission format is set, the format is static and cannot be changed dynamically. If the transmission format needs to be changed, delete all associated cross connects and remove and the GRDM CPs before making the format change. Changes to the transmission format are allowed only when no CPs are present in the ONWAVE node. STEP 3: Right-click on the new GRDM icon, then click on Modify Line Trail... to open the Modify Line Trail configuration window Figure 6-33.
6 - 31
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-33. Modify Line Trail Configuration Window STEP 4: Click on the + symbol of the unfilled card-blank to open the Connect Line Port configuration window Figure 6-34.
Figure 6-34. Connect Line Port Configuration Window STEP 5: Click on the WCI or SMX tributary port to which you want to connect the GRDM card, then click on the OK button to complete your selection. In the Configure GRDM line circuit configuration window, images appear representing the OC48 connection and the card to which youve connected the GRDM Figure 6-35.
6 - 32
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-35. Modify Line Trail Configuration Window STEP 6: Click on the Close button. You have added and configured the equipment. The GRDM facilities appear in the ONLINE Metro CIT Tree Figure 6-36.
6 - 33
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-36. GRDM AND GRDMII Facilities in ONLINE Metro CIT Tree
6 - 34

Creating GRDMII ONWAVE Node
PROVISIONING
P R E F A C E !
. Before you add any card or service, verify the integrity of the fiber connections. Regardless, adding cards may create alarms.
Caution:
CREATING A GRDMII ONWAVE NODE STEP 1: Right-click on the optical Nodes icon, then select the main menu Provisioning > Provision ONWAVE Node to open the Provision ONWAVE Node configuration window Figure 6-37.
Figure 6-37. Provision ONWAVE Node Configuration Window An ONWAVE Node icon will appear in the tree view. STEP 2: Right-click on the new ONWAVE icon, then click on Configure ONWAVE Node to open the Configure ONWAVE Node configuration window. Figure 6-38.
6 - 35
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-38. Configure ONWAVE Node STEP 3: STEP 4: Click on a middle + symbol to open the Add GRDM configuration window Figure 6-39. In the Add GRDMII configuration window you must assign a name, choose the card position, and choose card type.
Figure 6-39. Add GRDM Card Configuration Window Installation, Turn-up, and Test Manual September 30, 2003 - Revision A 009-2003-294
6 - 36

STEP 5:
PROVISIONING
After you complete the configuration window entries, click OK to add the card (Figure 6-39). The card is now displayed wherever its shelf is expanded.
Figure 6-40. Configure ONWAVE Node Configuration Window With Single GRDMII. STEP 6: Click on the + symbol of the outside card-blank that is nearest the representation of the card that you added to open the Connect Line Port configuration window. Figure 6-41.
Figure 6-41. Connect Line Port Configuration Window
6 - 37
PROVISIONING
STEP 7:
Click on the OC-48 line port to which you want to connect the GRDMII card, then click on the OK button to engage your selection. In the Configure ONWAVE Node configuration window, images appear representing the OC48 connection and the card to which youve connected the GRDMII Figure 6-42.
Figure 6-42. Configure ONWAVE Node Configuration Window With Connection STEP 8: STEP 9: In order to pair the GRDMII within the ONWAVE node, apply the procedure to the other side, starting with Step 3. The GRDMIIs must be the same type, and the cards that they connect to across the OC-48 must match each other. After you add the other GRDMIIs to complete the ONWAVE pair, the Configure ONWAVE node configuration window should match.
After you make the line port connection to the second WCI card, the Configure ONWAVE node configuration window should match Figure 6-43.
6 - 38
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-43. Configure ONWAVE Node GRDMII Pair Configuration Window You have configured an GRMDII node to operate in an OC-48 SONET ring.
6 - 39
PROVISIONING
Overhead Provisioning on GRDMII
P R E F A C E !
SETTING GRDMII OVERHEAD PROVISIONING MODE STEP 1: Right-click on the desired GRDM line facility, then from the right-click menu select Overhead Provisioning Mode. The Overhead Provisioning Mode dialog box appears Figure 6-44.
Figure 6-44. Overhead Provisioning Dialog Box STEP 2: STEP 3: Select the desired section and path trace options. Click the OK button to apply the selected setting. Otherwise, click the Cancel button.
6 - 40

Configuring DCC On GRDMII
PROVISIONING
The ONLINE Metro CIT allows you to configure DCC communication on the GRDMII CP. This feature enables the data communications channel between the GRDMII CPs.
CONFIGURING DCC ON THE GRDMII STEP 1: Right-click on the desired GRDMII line facility and select from the right-click menu select Configure DCC. The Configure DCC dialog box appears Figure 6-45.
Figure 6-45. Configure DCC Dialog Box STEP 2: STEP 3: Click the DCC check box and select the desired Cluster ID assignment, IP mapping, and DCC type. Click the OK button to apply the selected setting. Otherwise, click the Cancel button.
6 - 41
PROVISIONING
Configuring PPP On GRDMII
P R E F A C E !
CONFIGURING PPP ON THE GRDMII STEP 1: Right-click on the desired GRDM line facility and select from the right-click menu select Configure PPP. The Configure PPP dialog box appears Figure 6-46.
Figure 6-46. Configure PPP Dialog Box STEP 2: STEP 3: STEP 4: STEP 5: STEP 6: Specify the peer IP address. Specify the desired subtending IP addresses. Specify the maximum transfer unit. Select the desired frame check sequence. Click the OK button to apply the selected setting. Otherwise, click the Cancel button.
6 - 42

Set Fault Propagation Mode On GRDM And GRDMII
PROVISIONING
The ONLINE Metro CIT allows you to set the fault propagation mode for the GRDM CP to shut off the laser, keep laser on, or insert K30.7 error code when a remote or line side fault occurs. This feature allows the fault propagation mode to be set differently for the tributary ports.
SETTING GRDM FAULT PROPAGATION MODE STEP 1: Right-click on the desired GRDM tributary facility, then select Configuration > Facility > Fault Propagation Mode to open the Modify GRDM Fault Propagation dialog box Figure 6-47.
Figure 6-47. Modify GRDM Fault Propagation Mode Dialog Box STEP 2: Click the radio button for the desired propagation mode. Shut Off Laser: Turns off the laser when a fault occurs. The default setting. Keep Laser On: Allows the laser to stay on when a fault occurs. Insert K30.7:Keeps laser on and inserts the K30.7 error code Delay Laser Shut Off: Specifies laser shut off delay for GbE traffic. Delay K30.7 Insertion: Specifies K30.7 insertion delay GbE traffic. Delay Time: Specifies the amount of delay.
Click the OK button to apply the selected setting. Otherwise, click the Cancel button.
6 - 43
PROVISIONING
Provisioning a WCI10G-LAN Card
WCI10G-LAN cards can be added to an ONLINE optical node to create a 10GbE LAN wavelength circuit. The WCI10G-LAN CP is a double-wide CP that supports add, drop, or regeneration of 10GbE traffic. The node fiber type must be configured on the node before the WCI10G-LAN CP is added.
Note: STEP 1:
The WCI10G-LAN CP does not support bulk circuits or line-side SONET and cannot be connected to 10G SMX CPs.
Right-click on the node icon, then choose Provisioning the ADD WCI configuration window Figure 6-48.
Add Card Add WCI.. to open
Figure 6-48. Add WCI Card Dialog Box STEP 2: Use the following guidelines to select the correct options: Click Single West or Single East to set the WCI CP transponder type. Single West activates West Band STEP 3:
Single East activates East Band
Select the desired West and East bands. Band drop cards have both a multiplex (transmit) and demultiplex (receive) band; the selected band corresponds to the multiplex band.
Select the desired shelf and slot positions for West and East cards. Select 10GbE LAN WCI as the WCI type. Select the West and East channels within the specified band from C1 to C3. Click the Add this WCI card without CWDM check box if you want to use the WCI10G-LAN CP without coarse wavelength division multiplexing. Installation, Turn-up, and Test Manual September 30, 2003 - Revision A 009-2003-294
6 - 44

STEP 8: STEP 9: Repeat this procedure for the required WCI10G-LAN cards.
PROVISIONING
Click the OK button to add the card. Otherwise, click the Cancel button.
Provisioning Splitter Circuit Packs

Right-click on the node icon, then choose Provisioning open the ADD Splitterconfiguration window Figure 6-49. Click OK
Add Card Add Splitter... to
Select the card position by using the pull-down menus for the shelf and slot locations.
Figure 6-49. Add Splitter
Provisioning PMM Circuit Packs

The PMM card is required if the pass-through channel power is higher than the added channel. This is the case if you use a Pre-amp or a VGA Pre-amp. This section describes how to place a PMM in an ONLINE shelf and slot. . Before you add any card or service, verify the integrity of the fiber connections. Regardless, adding cards may create alarms.
Caution:
R E F E R
T O
D I S C L A I M E R
I N
P R E F A C E !
ADDING A PMM CARD STEP 1: Right-click on the shelf icon, then choose Provisioning the Add PMM dialog box Figure 6-50.
Add Card Add PMM... to open
6 - 45
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-50. Add PMM Dialog Box STEP 2: In the Add PMM dialog box, Click on the Card Position shelf and slot number. Use PMM cards in configurations with mux pass-throughs (MPT) or Band pass-throughs (BPT). STEP 3: STEP 4: Select the type from the drop-down list for the applicable VOA. After you enter the dialog box entries, click OK to add the card. The cards icon appears in the tree pane, and the new equipment appears in the shelf pane. MPT: Multiplex Pass-Through (Use site plan as reference)
Note:
Note: STEP 5: Click OK.
BPT: Band Pass-Through (Use site plan as reference)
Provisioning SYNC Circuit Packs

ADDING A SYNC CARD STEP 1: Right-click on the shelf icon, then choose Provisioning the pop-up menu.
Add Card Add SYNC... from
The Add SYNC dialog box opens for the selected node Figure 6-51.
6 - 46
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-51. Add SYNC Card Dialog Box STEP 2: STEP 3: STEP 4: In the Add SYNC dialog box, select either the SYNC-A or SYNC-B option button to identify the addition as a primary or secondary card. Click on the Card Position shelf and slot number. Select one of the four formats for the Input Timing frame field: T1 ESF, T1 SF, CEPT 2.048 Kbits/s, or CEPT 2.048 kHz (default is T1 ESF). The Input Timing Frame field determines the Line Coding field as follows: STEP 5: If T1 ESF or T1 SF is selected as the input timing frame format, either B8ZS or AMI must be selected in the Line Coding field (default value is B8ZS) If CEPT 2.048 Kbits/s is selected, HDB3 must be selected in the Line Coding field If CEPT 2.048 kHz is selected, confirm that None is selected in the Line Coding field.
Select the check box to enable or disable Synchronization Status Messaging (SSM) SSM option is available if T1 ESF or E1 2Mbps Input Timing Frame is selected. Set the Sa Bit if E1 2Mbps Input Timing Frame is selected and SSM is enabled.
STEP 6:
After you enter the dialog box entries, click OK to add the card.
Provisioning an ONWAVE Node With SMX-10G CP

. Before you add any card or service, verify the integrity of the fiber connections. Regardless, adding cards may create alarms.
Caution:
6 - 47
PROVISIONING

P R E F A C E !
ADDING AN SMX-10G CP STEP 1: Right-click on the ONWAVE Nodes icon, then select the main menu Provisioning > Provision ONWAVE Node to open the Provision ONWAVE Node configuration window Figure 6-52.
Table 6-3 outlines the card requirements to select cross-connect options.
Table 6-3. SMX-10G Cross connect Options SMX CP SMX-10G CPs Cross connect Options Cross-connect Optical Splitter Trib Mated Trib connection default TWO SMX-10Gs must reside in adjoining slots 2.5G Line port must be available Conditions
6 - 48
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-53. Configure ONWAVE Node STEP 3: STEP 4: Click on a middle + symbol to open the Add ADM/SMX configuration window Figure 6-54. In the Add ADM/SMX configuration window you must assign a name, choose the slot, and choose card type: Remember that an SMX is a 2-slot, right-justified card.
Figure 6-54. Add ADM/SMX Card Configuration Window STEP 5: After you complete the configuration window entries, click OK to add the card Figure 6-55.
6 - 49
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-55. Configure ONWAVE Node Configuration Window With Single SMX-10G. STEP 6: Click on the + symbol of the outside card-blank that is nearest the representation of the card that you added to open the Connect Line Port configuration window. Figure 6-56.
Figure 6-56. Connect Line Port Configuration Window STEP 7: Click on the OC-192 line port to which you want to connect the SMX-10G card, then click on the OK button to engage your selection. In the Configure ONWAVE Node configuration window, images appear representing the OC192 connection and the card to which you have connected the SMX-10G Figure 6-57.
6 - 50
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-57. Configure ONWAVE Node Configuration Window With Connection STEP 8: In order to pair the SMX-10Gs within the ONWAVE node, apply the procedure to the other side, starting with Step 3. The cards to which the SMX-10Gs connect to across the OC-192 must match each other. Add the other SMX-10G to complete the ONWAVE pair. Make the line port connection to the second WCI card.
STEP 9:
You have configured an SMX-10G node to operate in an OC-192 SONET ring.
6 - 51
PROVISIONING
Configure ADM/SMX ONWAVE Node
Configure the ONWAVE node for the desired ADM and ADMII. After the ONWAVE nodes are configured, provision the connections between the ONWAVE nodes. . Before adding any card or service, verify the integrity of the fiber connections. Regardless, adding cards may create alarms.
Caution:
R E F E R
T O
D I S C L A I M E R
I N
P R E F A C E !
ASSIGNING THE NODE NAME AND TRANSMISSION FORMAT To add an ADM/SMX CP STEP 1: Right-click on the ONWAVE Nodes icon, then select the main menu Provisioning > Provision ONWAVE Node to open the Provision ONWAVE Node configuration window Figure 6-58.
6 - 52
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-59. Configure ONWAVE Node STEP 3: STEP 4: Click on a middle + symbol to open the Add ADM/SMX configuration window Figure 6-60. In the Add ADM/SMX configuration window you must assign a name, choose the card position, and choose card type: Remember that an ADM is a 2-slot, left-justified card. 4 Port (ADM04): Supports the following options: Aggregating multiple OC-3/STM-1 and OC-12/STM-4 tributaries to an OC-48/STM-16 tributary. Mating with an adjacent 4-port ADM04 card. 8-Port (ADM08): Supports the following: Mixing OC-3/STM-1 and OC-12/STM-4 tributaries in the first 4 portsthe second 4 ports must be OC-3/STM-1. Mating with an adjacent 8-port ADM08 card.
6 - 53
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-60. Add ADM/SMX Card Configuration Window STEP 5: After you complete the configuration window entries, click OK to add the card Figure 6-61.
Figure 6-61. Configure ONWAVE Node Configuration Window With Single ADM.
6 - 54

STEP 6:
PROVISIONING
Click on the + symbol of the outside card-blank that is nearest the representation of the card that you added to open the Connect Line Port configuration window. Figure 6-62.
Figure 6-62. Connect Line Port Configuration Window STEP 7: Click on the OC-48 line port to which you want to connect the ADM card, then click on the OK button to engage your selection. In the Configure ONWAVE Node configuration window, images appear representing the OC48 connection and the card to which youve connected the ADM Figure 6-63.
Figure 6-63. Configure ONWAVE Node Configuration Window With Connection STEP 8: In order to pair the ADMs within the ONWAVE node, apply the procedure to the other side, starting with Step 3.
The ADMs must be the same type, and the cards that they connect to across the OC-48 must match each other. After you add the other ADM to complete the ONWAVE pair, the Configure ONWAVE node configuration window should match Figure 6-64. Installation, Turn-up, and Test Manual September 30, 2003 - Revision A 009-2003-294
6 - 55
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-64. Configure ONWAVE Node Configuration Window (Paired ADM Cards) After you make the line port connection to the second WCI card, the Configure ONWAVE node configuration window should match Figure 6-65.
Figure 6-65. Configure ONWAVE Node Configuration Window You have configured an ADM node to operate in an OC-48 SONET ring. Installation, Turn-up, and Test Manual September 30, 2003 - Revision A 009-2003-294
6 - 56

CONFIGURING 32-PORT NODES Four (4) ADM CPs can be cascaded to create a 32-port node Note the following restrictions on this configuration:
u u
PROVISIONING
The line side of the chained ADM or STMX CPs must not be connected to a WCI CP. The primary ADM CPs must be an ADM08 or an 8-port STMX attached to a WCI CP.
The chained ADM CPs must be placed on the opposite side of the primary ADM CPs.
Provisioning ESCON and ESCONII Mux (EMX12) CPs

This section contains the following procedures:
u u
Adding a WCI Card on page 6-57 Adding An ESCON And ESCONII MUX Card on page 6-60
Adding a WCI Card

. Before adding any card or service, verify the integrity of the fiber connections. Regardless, adding cards may create alarms.
Caution:
R E F E R
T O
D I S C L A I M E R
I N
P R E F A C E !
ADDING A WAVELENGTH CONVERTER INTERFACE CARD STEP 1: Right-click on the shelf icon, then choose Provisioning Add Card the ADD WCI configuration window Figure 6-66.
Add WCI... to open
Figure 6-66. Add WCI Card Dialog Box
6 - 57
PROVISIONING
STEP 2: Use the following guidelines to select the correct options:
WCI Mode - Click Single West, Single East, Static Regen, UPSR, Stand Alone, or Stand Alone UPSR to set the WCI CP transponder type Figure 6-66.
u u u
Single West activates West Band

Single East activates East Band
Static Regen activates both bands. Optical line protection is not available. UPSR enables splitter for protection. Standalone allows the node to function as a gateway node. Standalone UPSR allows the node to function as a gateway node with a splitter for protection. West Band - Click West Band to select a westbound band. Band drop cards have both a multiplex (transmit) and demultiplex (receive) band; the selected band corresponds to the multiplex band. East Band - Click East Band to select an eastbound band. Band drop cards have both a multiplex (transmit) and demultiplex (receive) band; the selected band corresponds to the multiplex band. Channel - Click Channel to choose a channel within the band from C1 to C3. West or East Card Position - Click West Card Position or East Card Position or both (whichever is activated) to select the shelf and slot position for the WCI card. WCI Type - Select 3R: standard.
u u u
List the settings that you have made (youll need them later in the configuration). After you enter the dialog box entries, click OK to add the card. Right-click on the new ESCON icon, then click on Modify Line Trail... to open the Modify Line Trail configuration window Figure 6-67.
Figure 6-67. Modify Line Trail Configuration Window Installation, Turn-up, and Test Manual September 30, 2003 - Revision A 009-2003-294
6 - 58

STEP 6:
PROVISIONING
Click on the + symbol of the unfilled card-blank to open the Connect Line Port configuration window Figure 6-68.
Figure 6-68. Connect Line Port Configuration window STEP 7: Click on the WCI or SMX tributary port to which you want to connect the EMX card, then click on the OK button to complete your selection. In the Configure EMX line circuit configuration window, images appear representing the OC-48 connection and the card to which youve connected the EMX. Figure 6-69
Figure 6-69. Modify Line Trail Configuration Window
6 - 59
PROVISIONING
STEP 8: Click on the Close button.
You have added and configured the equipment. Chapter 8, Configure DWDM Equipment contains further information on configuring tributary equipment. Chapter 9, Provisioning DWDM Services contains further information on provisioning tributary services.
Adding An ESCON And ESCONII MUX Card

ADDING AN ESCON AND ESCONII MUX STEP 1: Right-click on the shelf icon, then choose Provisioning open the Add ESCON MUX dialog box Figure 6-70.
Add Card Add ESCON... to
Figure 6-70. Add ESCON MUX Dialog Box
Note: STEP 2:
ESCONII CPs can also be added to an ONWAVE node.
Use the following guidelines to add the ESCON MUX card: Card Position: Click Card Position to select the shelf and slot position for the ESCON MUX card. Transmission Format: Match the transmission format to the receiving cards. The ONWAVE node transmission format is used when the tributary port transmission type is different from the line side transmission type. After the transmission format is set, the format is static and cannot be changed dynamically. If the transmission format needs to be changed, delete all associated cross connects and remove and all CPs before making the format change. Changes to the transmission format are allowed only when no CPs are present in the ONWAVE node. Installation, Turn-up, and Test Manual September 30, 2003 - Revision A 009-2003-294
6 - 60

STEP 3: After entering the dialog box entries, click OK to add the card.
PROVISIONING
The card icon appears, and EMXs 1 line port plus the 12 tributary ports appear under the trees Trib-side hierarchy. Figure 6-71
Figure 6-71. EXM-12 Ports In Tree
6 - 61
PROVISIONING
Creating ESCONII ONWAVE Node
P R E F A C E !
CREATING AN ESCONII ONWAVE NODE STEP 1: Right-click on the optical Nodes icon, then select the main menu Provisioning > Provision ONWAVE Node to open the Provision ONWAVE Node configuration window Figure 6-58.
Figure 6-73. Configure ONWAVE node STEP 3: STEP 4: Click on a middle + symbol to open the Add ESCON configuration window Figure 6-60. In the Add ESCONII configuration window you must assign a name, choose the card position, and choose card type.
6 - 62
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-74. Add ESCONII Card Configuration Window STEP 5: After you complete the configuration window entries, click OK to add the card Figure 6-61.
6 - 63
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-75. Configure ONWAVE Node Configuration Window with Single ESCONII. STEP 6: Click on the + symbol of the outside card-blank that is nearest the representation of the card that you added to open the Connect Line Port configuration window (Figure 6-62).
Figure 6-76. Connect Line Port Configuration Window
6 - 64

STEP 7:
PROVISIONING
Click on the OC-48 line port to which you want to connect the ESCONII card, then click on the OK button to engage your selection. In the Configure ONWAVE Node configuration window, images appear representing the OC48 connection and the card to which youve connected the ESCONII Figure 6-63.
Figure 6-77. Configure ONWAVE Node Configuration Window With Connection STEP 8: STEP 9: In order to pair the ESONII within the ONWAVE node, apply the procedure to the other side, starting with Step 3. The ESCONIIs must be the same type, and the cards that they connect to across the OC-48 must match each other. After you add the other ESCONIIs to complete the ONWAVE pair, the Configure ONWAVE node configuration window should match.
After you make the line port connection to the second WCI card, the Configure ONWAVE node configuration window should match Figure 6-65.
6 - 65
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-78. Configure ONWAVE Node ESCONII Pair Configuration Window You have configured an ESCONII node to operate in an OC-48 SONET ring.
Set Overhead Provisioning On ESCONII

SETTING ESCONII OVERHEAD PROVISIONING MODE STEP 1: Right-click on the desired ESCON line facility, then from the right-click menu select Overhead Provisioning Mode. The Overhead Provisioning Mode dialog box appears (Figure 6-79).
6 - 66
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-79. Overhead Provisioning Dialog Box STEP 2: STEP 3: Select the desired section and path trace options. Click the OK button to apply the selected setting. Otherwise, click the Cancel button.
6 - 67
PROVISIONING
Configuring DCC On ESCONII
P R E F A C E !
CONFIGURING DCC ON THE ESCONII STEP 1: Right-click on the desired ESCON line facility and select from the right-click menu select Configure DCC. The Configure DCC dialog box appears Figure 6-80.
Figure 6-80. Configure DCC Dialog Box STEP 2: STEP 3: Click the DCC check box and select the desired Cluster ID assignment, IP mapping, and DCC type. Click the OK button to apply the selected setting. Otherwise, click the Cancel button.
6 - 68

Configuring PPP on ESCONII
PROVISIONING
P R E F A C E !
STEP 1:
Right-click on the desired ESCON line facility and select from the right-click menu select Configure PPP. The Configure PPP dialog box appears Figure 6-81.
Figure 6-81. Configure PPP Dialog Box STEP 2: STEP 3: STEP 4: STEP 5: STEP 6: Specify the peer IP address. Specify the desired subtending IP addresses. Specify the maximum transfer unit. Select the desired frame check sequence. Click the OK button to apply the selected setting. Otherwise, click the Cancel button.
Provisioning Channel Pass-Through

STEP 1:
Right click on the appropriate node and select Provisioning > Add Channel Pass Through.
6 - 69
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-82. Add Channel Pass Through STEP 2: STEP 3: STEP 4: STEP 5: Select the West Band from the pull-down menu. Select the East Band from the pull-down menu. Select the Channel from the pull-down menu. Click OK
Provisioning Band Pass-Through

STEP 1:
Right click on the appropriate node and select Provisioning > Add Band Pass Through.
Figure 6-83. Add Band Pass Through STEP 2: STEP 3: STEP 4: Select the West Band from the pull-down menu. Select the East Band from the pull-down menu. Click OK.
6 - 70

Provisioning Dispersion Compensation Modules
PROVISIONING
P R E F A C E !
ADDING A DCM STEP 1: Right-click on the node to which you will add the DCM, then choose Provisioning > Add DCM to open the Add DCM configuration window. (See Figure 6-84.)
Figure 6-84. Add DCM Configuration Window Select the parameter values in the fields as follows:
u u u
Type field Choose the DCM type and distance (DCM-A_KM) or (DCM-LF_KM). Housing Box Id Specify the housing box ID. From CP field Choose the Upstream CP. The CP must be upstream of the DCM. From Band Choose the upstream band. To CP field Choose the downstream CP. To Band Choose the downstream band. The From Band and To Band are only enabled when available. After youve entered all the correct values, click on the OK button to add the DCM. Otherwise, click Cancel. You have added a DCM to the node.
u u
STEP 2:
VIEWING ALL DCMS

STEP 1:
Right-click on the DCMs node, then select Provisioning > View/Delete DCM to open the DCM List configuration window (Figure 6-85).
6 - 71
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-85. DCM List Configuration Window STEP 2: Click Cancel to close this dialog box.
6 - 72
ONLINE Metro Platform CONFIGURING SPAN ATTRIBUTES
PROVISIONING
This section describes how to access and use the ONLINE Metro CIT to define span attribute settings. All span attribute values are taken directly from the subnetwork design validated by the ONLINE Metro Designer Software Tool. These values should be modified only when re-optimizing the subnetwork or changing the subnetwork topology. It is important to use only values validated by the ONLINE Metro Designer Software Tool. Span attributes impact power management and, therefore, should not be modified without validation from the ONLINE Metro Designer Software Tool. Changing the values without validation may invalidate the optical design of the subnetwork. . After installation or modification of a subnetwork, actual span loss values may vary from the values used during network planning. In this case, the user must work with the network planner to revalidate the subnetwork design with the ONLINE Metro Designer Software Tool based on the actual span loss values. The provisioned span loss settings may then be updated with the new values after the design is validated and any required modifications to the subnetwork design are physically implemented.
Caution:
R E F E R
T O
D I S C L A I M E R
I N
P R E F A C E !
To Modify Span Loss for a Node

STEP 1: Right-click on a a node icon, then choose Set Span Attributes to open the Set Span Attributes dialog box (Figure 6-85a). Span loss attributes may also be set on the span between two nodes. If launched on the span, the user can modify connecting node power values.
Note:
Figure 6-85a. Set Span Loss Dialog Box Installation, Turn-up, and Test Manual November 3, 2003 - Revision A - Change 1 009-2003-294
6 - 72a
PROVISIONING
STEP 2:
Use the following guidelines to set parameters in the Set Span Attributes dialog box. Span Loss For the east and west spans, specify the span loss and span loss discrepancy between NEs. The default span loss discrepancy is 2.0 dB and can be provisioned from 2.0 dB to 99.0 dB.
Topology Manager application software on each NE runs a span loss mismatch audit every 10 minutes. If span loss measured by the audit deviates from the provisioned span loss by more than the provisioned span loss discrepancy value, a Topology Mismatch alarm is raised against the NE with the type of mismatch indicated in the alarm's additional text. To temporarily clear this alarm, the span loss discrepancy value can be reprovisioned to a larger value; however, the discrepancy must be rectified to the provisioned span loss value or the subnetwork design must be re-optimized using the ONLINE Metro Designer Software Tool. After the span loss discrepancy is resolved, it is recommended that the span loss discrepancy value be returned to the 2.0 dB default value. It is not acceptable to change the provisioned value to match the actual span loss without first validating the change with the ONLINE Metro Designer Software Tool and implementing any required design changes as this may invalidate the existing optical design. Check with the network planner to obtain the assigned span loss values used in the ONLINE Metro Designer Software Tool. Current Channels The value for current channels represents the maximum number of channels that the power management algorithm currently accommodates for the given span. This nonmodifiable field contains a value in the range of 0 to 33. Planned Channels Depending on the anticipated traffic growth in a subnetwork, the planned channel value can be used to allow the Power Management Algorithm (PMA) to accommodate the number of channels anticipated. This eliminates any pad changes within the subnetwork when adding additional channels as long as the current channel value does not exceed the planned channel value.
The default planned channel value is 0 to ensure backward compatibility. Check with the network planner to obtain the assigned planned channel value used in the ONLINE Metro Designer Software Tool. Fiber Type Select the fiber types (NDSF, MetroCor, Truewave, AllWave, DSF, and LEAF) from the drop-down list for both the east and west spans. Check with the network planner to obtain the fiber type values used in the ONLINE Metro Designer Software Tool. Channels Per Band Select the number of channels per band from the drop-down list (choice of 1 or 3). This optional field has a default value of 3, which is the proper value for most implementations. The value of 1 is intended for band-only configurations; however, the value of 3 may also be used, depending on the PMA option selected in the subnetwork design. Check with the network planner to obtain the channels per band value used in the ONLINE Metro Designer Software Tool. Note: For more information about span loss measurements, see the ONLINE Metro Multiservice Dense Wave Division Multiplexing (DWDM) Transport Platform Engineering and Planning Guide.
6 - 72b
ONLINE Metro Platform CIRCUIT PROVISIONING

PROVISIONING
P R E F A C E !
Note:
Prior to provisioning circuits, ensure that all line and trib side facilities are unlocked. For more details on circuit provisioning, refer to the ONLINE Metro CIT User Manual.
STEP 1:
From the ONLINE Metro CIT Main Menu, expand the subnetwork directory in the tree-pane.
Figure 6-86. ONLINE Metro CIT Main Menu STEP 2: Expand the Circuits directory and then select the Circuits icon.
6 - 73
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-87. Circuits Directory STEP 3: From the menu bar, select Provisioning > Circuit > Provision Circuit...
Figure 6-88. Provisioning Circuits STEP 4: Using the pull-down menus, select the Circuit Attributes.
6 - 74
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-89. Circuit Attributes STEP 5: STEP 6: Click Retrieve. Select one of the available circuits in the Possible Circuits section. At this time, single-click on any of the circuits to display a graphical view of the circuit.
Note:
6 - 75
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-90. Retrieving Circuits STEP 7: STEP 8: With the desired circuit selected, Click Provision Circuit. Rename the circuit in the Circuit Label field. The Circuit Label can be alphanumeric and select special characters. The software will not allow the user to enter characters that are not supported. Installation, Turn-up, and Test Manual September 30, 2003 - Revision A 009-2003-294
Note:
6 - 76
PROVISIONING
STEP 9:
Click OK. After clicking the OK button, the new circuit is moved from the Possible Circuits table to the Circuits directory in the tree pane view. Circuits will default to the locked state.
Note: STEP 10: STEP 11:
Repeat Circuit Provisioning steps for all desired circuits. Once all circuits have been provisioned, Click Close.
CREATING 3RD PARTY DWDM CIRCUITS WITH CWMD-U CARDS

ONLINE Metro CIT allows you to create up to 33 DWDM wavelength circuits to transport 3rd party DWDM signals using an ONLINE Metro Platform. A 3rd party DWDM circuit can be used to launch a signal from a 3rd party DWDM wavelength or CIENA DWDM wavelength directly to the optical filters on the ONLINE 7/9/ 11 transport system and then terminate the wavelength on identical 3rd party system or CIENA equipment. A 3rd party DWDM circuit can also be used to interconnect ONLINE Metro Platform subnetworks without an optical-electrical-optical (OEO) wavelength conversion. . Creating 3rd party DWDM interfaces using the CWDM-U cards is available only after contacting CIENA Technical Support.
Caution:
3rd party DWDM circuits using CWDM-U cards must be in point-to-point, linear, or UPSR configurations using unprotected, symmetrical bands. These circuits must also use open-VOA mode and be optically transparent. There are four possible types of 3rd party DWDM circuits with CWDM-U cards:
u u
Band-only circuit using only 1 wavelength on channel 2 Figure 6-91 Full band circuit for ring-to-ring band-level optical pass through without OEO conversion Figure 6-92 and Figure 6-93. Channelized circuit using up to three wavelengths (Figure 6-94) Channelized circuit for channel pass-through
u u
6 - 77
PROVISIONING
When an external interface is provisioned for channel access using the BWDM CP interface, this creates a band-only circuit as shown in Figure 6-91. This type of circuit uses only channel 2 for passing traffic.
Figure 6-91. Band-Only Circuit Using Channel 2 When an external interface is provisioned for band access using the BWDM CP interface, this creates a Full Band 3rd party circuit as shown in Figure 6-92. This circuit is a band of 3 ONLINE Metro Platform wavelengths provisioned as a 3rd party wavelength group. This type of circuit is used to create a ring-toring band level optical pass through that interconnects ONLINE Metro Platform subnetworks and uses only band multiplexing.
Figure 6-92. Full Band 3rd Party
6 - 78
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-93. Full Band 3rd Party Pass Thru (Ring-to-Ring) When an external interface is provisioned for channel access using the CWDM CP interface, this creates a full channel circuit that allows up to 3 external interfaces to be provisioned as shown in Figure 6-94. This type of circuit is used to create external connections through the CWDM ports.
Figure 6-94. Channelized 3rd Party DWDM
6 - 79
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-95. Channelized Third Party DWDM (Ring-to-Ring)
CREATING 3RD PARTY DWDM CIRCUITS WITH CWMD-UE CARDS

ONLINE Metro CIT allows you to create up to 33 DWDM wavelength circuits to transport 3rd party DWDM signals using an ONLINE Metro Platform system. A 3rd party DWDM circuit can be used to launch a signal from a 3rd party DWDM wavelength or CIENA DWDM wavelength directly to the optical filters on the ONLINE Metro Platform and then terminate the wavelength on identical 3rd party system or CIENA equipment. A 3rd party DWDM circuit can also be used to interconnect ONLINE Metro Platform subnetworks without an optical-electrical-optical (OEO) wavelength conversion. 3rd party DWDM circuits using CWDM-UE cards must be in UPSR configurations using unprotected or OUPSR line-side protected symmetrical bands. These circuits must use closed-VOA mode for power balancing and be optically transparent. 3rd party DWDM circuits with CWDM-UE cards support channelized circuits using up to three wavelengths and channel pass through. When an external interface is provisioned for channel access using the CWDM-UE CP interface, this creates a full channel circuit that allows up to 3 external interfaces to be provisioned in the same band. A mix of channels within the same band is also supported as shown in Figure 6-99. This type of circuit is used to create external connections through the CWDM-UE ports.
6 - 80
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-96. Unprotected Channelized 3rd Party DWDM (CWDM-UE)
Figure 6-97. O-UPSR Protected Channelized 3rd Party DWDM (CDWM-UE) Ring interconnection at the optical channel level without need for OEO Each ring treats wavelength coming from the other ring as from a 3rd party source In a CWDM-UE 3rd party DWDM circuit, each ring has its own 3rd party circuit so no end to end multi-ring circuit management is available. Both rings must use closed VOA mode.
6 - 81
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-98. O-UPSR Protected Channel Pass Through 3rd Party DWDM (CDWM-UE) A mixed environment of CWDM-U and CWDM-UE CPs can be provisioned in the same circuit. The CWDMUE provides ring interconnection without OEO if link budget permits.
Figure 6-99. Channel Pass Through 3rd Party DWDM (CWDMU and CDWM-UE) Regardless of the type of 3rd party external interface, in-service additions, upgrades, and deletions can be made without interrupting the current traffic. To provision a 3rd party DWDM circuit:
u u u
Set optical configuration Add external interfaces Provision the 3rd party DWDM circuit
6 - 82

Set Optical Configuration
The optical configuration for a ONLINE Metro Platform node provides settings for:
u
PROVISIONING
Optical circuit type 3rd party DWDM circuits require unprotected, non-preemptive circuits. VOA mode 3rd party DWDM circuits require Open VOA mode. Band scheme 3rd party DWDM circuits require symmetrical bands Optimal PMA 3rd party DWDM circuits require PMA to be disabled.
SET OPTICAL CONFIGURATION STEP 1: Select the desired optical node in the ONLINE Metro CIT Tree and from the main menu choose Configuration > Network Element > Set Optical Configuration. The Set Optical Configuration dialog box appears (Figure 6-100).
Figure 6-100. Set Optical Configuration STEP 2: STEP 3: Click Modify to change the current settings. Add info about settings. Click Close to close the dialog box.
6 - 83
PROVISIONING
Add External Interfaces
The external interface settings specify the signal type, signal direction, band/channel interface, and power values. Each node in the 3rd party DWDM circuit requires an external interface.
Note:
The required BWDM and CWDM cards must be installed and provisioned an external interface can be added.
R E F E R
T O
D I S C L A I M E R
I N
P R E F A C E !
ADD AN EXTERNAL INTERFACE STEP 1: Select the desired optical node in the ONLINE Metro CIT Tree and from the main menu choose Provisioning > Add External Interface. The Add External Interface dialog box appears (Figure 6-101).
Figure 6-101. Add External Interface STEP 2: Specify the desired settings. Band/channel access. Side East/West Interface BWDM/CWDM Band/Channel info Power values
6 - 84
PROVISIONING
Power values per channel can be +12 to -25 for input channels and +12 to -30 for output channels. STEP 3: Click OK to apply the settings and close the dialog box. Otherwise, click Cancel. When an external interface is added, it appears under the External Interface folder in the ONLINE Metro CIT Tree Figure 6-102.
Figure 6-102. External Interface In ONLINE Metro CIT Tree
Provisioning 3rd Party DWDM Circuit

Provisioning the 3rd party DWDM circuit connects the configured external interfaces for circuit communications.
PROVISION A 3RD PARTY DWDM CIRCUIT STEP 1: Select the Circuit folder in the ONLINE Metro CIT Tree and from the main menu choose Provision > Circuit. The Provision Circuit wizard appears (Figure 6-103).
Figure 6-103. Provision Circuit
6 - 85
PROVISIONING
STEP 2: STEP 3:
Specify the access type as unprotected and the service type as Optical Transparent. Click Retrieve to return the available circuits Figure 6-104.
Figure 6-104. Provision Circuit STEP 4: Select the desired circuit and click Provision Circuit. Specify the circuit label and click OK. ONLINE Metro CIT provisions the selected circuit and displays the provisioned circuit in the Circuits folder. STEP 5: Click Close to close the provisioning wizard. Otherwise, click Cancel. When an external interface circuit is added, the circuit appears under the Circuit folder in the ONLINE Metro CIT Tree Figure 6-105. Also, circuits for provisioned external interfaces appear in the as 3rd party interface circuits in the channel map.
Figure 6-105. External Interface Circuit In ONLINE Metro CIT Tree
6 - 86
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-106. External Interface Circuit In Channel Map
Displaying 3rd Party DWDM Circuit

ONLINE Metro CIT enables you to display 3rd party DWDM circuit in the Display Window.
DISPLAY A 3RD PARTY DWDM CIRCUIT STEP 1: Select the desired 3rd party DWDM circuit in the Circuit folder in the ONLINE Metro CIT Tree and from the right-click menu choose Information. The circuit appears in the Display window (Figure 6-107).
6 - 87
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-107. 3rd Party DWDM Circuit In Display Window STEP 2: Click the upper right corner to close the dialog box.
Displaying 3rd Party DWDM Circuit Information

ONLINE Metro CIT enables you to display 3rd party DWDM circuit information.
DISPLAY 3RD PARTY DWDM CIRCUIT INFORMATION STEP 1: Select the desired 3rd party DWDM circuit in the Circuit folder in the ONLINE Metro CIT Tree and from the right-click menu choose Information. The Circuit Information dialog box appears Figure 6-108.
6 - 88
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-108. 3rd Party DWDM Circuit Information Dialog Box STEP 2: Click OK to close the dialog box.
Modifying 3rd Party DWDM Circuits and External Interfaces

ONLINE Metro CIT enables you to modify the circuit name and payload type of provisioned 3rd party DWDM circuits and the interface power settings of provisioned external interfaces. To make other changes, the circuits and external interfaces must be deleted and then re-provisioned.
MODIFY 3RD PARTY DWDM CIRCUITS STEP 1: Select the desired 3rd party DWDM circuit in the Circuit folder in the ONLINE Metro CIT Tree and from the right-click menu choose Modify Circuit. The Modify Circuit dialog box appears for the selected circuit Figure 6-109.
6 - 89
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-109. Modify Circuit Dialog Box STEP 2: Select the desired interface in the External Interface folder and from the right-click menu choose Provisioning>Modify External Interface. The Modify External Interface dialog box appears for the selected interface Figure 6-110.
Figure 6-110. Modify External Interface Dialog Box STEP 3: STEP 4: Modify the desired settings. Click OK to close the dialog box.
6 - 90
PROVISIONING
PROVISIONING STAND ALONE DWDM NODES (VIRTUAL NODES)

A Stand Alone DWDM node is a Virtual node (VNE) configuration that exists within a regular optical node. The Stand Alone DWDM node is similar to a regular DWDM node except that the Sand Alone DWDM does not use Line cards, and has no power management (PMA). Up to 99 Virtual NEs can be provisioned under one Optical NE. Figure 6-113 gives an example of how a Stand Alone node (No Line Cards) and regular DWDM node exist in the same optical node configuration.
Figure 6-111. Stand-alone Node and DWDM in the Same Shelf
Supported Stand-alone DWDM CPs

u u u
WCI: ALL CWDM: CWDM, CWDM-U BWDM: BWDM, BWDM-U, ABWDM, ABWDM-U
Note:
CWDM-UE, Line CPs, and Amplifiers are not supported for Stand Alone DWDM
6 - 91
PROVISIONING
Supported Stand-alone DWDM Configurations
Stand Alone nodes support the following configurations:
u
BWDM configuration: WCI to CWDM to BWDM Figure 6-112
Figure 6-112. Stand-alone with BWDM
Note:
6 - 92

u
PROVISIONING
CWDM Configuration: WCI connected to CWDM
Figure 6-113. Stand-alone DWDM (No BWDM)
Note:
Provisioning a Stand-alone DWDM

To provision the stand alone DWDM configuration, a Virtual node (VNE) must be provisioned first. All the components of one stand alone DWDM will be enclosed into one VNE. The following outlines the order of provisioning based upon which type of VNE configuration is chosen. VNE with BWDM
u u u u
Provision VNE Provision BWDM Provision CWDM Provision WCI Provision VNE Provision CWDM Provision WCI
VNE without BWDM

u u u
6 - 93
PROVISIONING
Note:
During the provisioning process, if a CWDM is the first CP provisioned on a VNE, it is not possible to provision a BWDM on that same VNE. The CWDM will have to be deleted first to provision a BWDM CP on the same VNE.
R E F E R
T O
D I S C L A I M E R
I N
P R E F A C E !
STEP 1:
From the ONLINE Metro CIT tool bar select Provision -> Virtual Node -> Provision Virtual Node (Figure 6-114).
Figure 6-114. Provision VNE A Provision VNE dialog box appears Figure 6-115
Figure 6-115. Provision VNE Dialog Installation, Turn-up, and Test Manual September 30, 2003 - Revision A 009-2003-294
6 - 94

STEP 2:
u u u
PROVISIONING
Select the following and click OK VNE User Label: Unique name to identify this VNE Optical Circuit Type: Open or Closed Band: Conjugate or Symmetrical Select the VNE object in the ONLINE Metro CIT Tree view, right click -> Provisioning -> Add Card to provision CPs on the VNE. Valid choices BWDM, CWDM, WCI
The Provisioned VNE will display in the ONLINE Metro CIT Tree view. STEP 3:
BWDM PROVISIONING ON VNE STEP 4:
Figure 6-116. VNE Add BWDM CWDM PROVISIONING ON VNE STEP 5:
6 - 95
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-117. VNE Add CWDM STEP 6: Select the following for the CWDM and click OK CWDM Type: CWDM
Note:
CWDM-UE is not supported in VNE
Band: B1 through B11 Side: East or West
Note:
When a BWDM is already provisioned in the VNE, the CWDM is provisioned on that BWDM.
6 - 96

WCI PROVISIONING ON VNE
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-118. VNE Add WCI STEP 7:

u u
Select the following and click OK WCI Mode: Single East, Single West, Static Regen, UPSR East and West Band Card Position: WCI type:
u u u
Channel: 1-3 Working Side: East or West Splitter card Protection: Shelf and slot location of associated Splitter CP
Modifying a VNE
Once a VNE is created, it is possible to modify the User Label, and the Circuit type. The following steps describe how to modify a VNE. STEP 1: Right click the VNE to be modified, select Modify VNE
6 - 97
PROVISIONING
Figure 6-119. Modify VNE STEP 2: STEP 3: STEP 4: To modify the VNE user label, type in a new user able. To change the Optical Circuit type, use the combo box to chose Open or Closed Click OK to accept the changes
Provision a Band Pass-through

Complete the following steps to provision a Band Pass Through. STEP 1: STEP 2: Right click the VNE icon and select Provisioning. Select Add Band Pass Through Add Band Pass Dialog box appears Figure 6-120
Figure 6-120. Add Band Pass Dialog Box STEP 3: STEP 4: Select the appropriate East and West Band for the pass through. Click OK to accept. Installation, Turn-up, and Test Manual September 30, 2003 - Revision A 009-2003-294
6 - 98

Provision a Channel Pass-through
PROVISIONING
P R E F A C E !
Complete the following steps to provision a Channel Pass Through. STEP 1: STEP 2: Right click the VNE icon and select Provisioning. Select Add Channel Pass Through Add Channel Pass Dialog box appears Figure 6-121
Figure 6-121. Add Channel Pass Dialog Box STEP 3: STEP 4: Select the appropriate East and West Bands and the appropriate channel for the pass through channel. Click OK to accept. Circuit provisioning is not supported on a VNE
Note:
6 - 99
PROVISIONING
6 - 100
VERIFICATION PROCEDURES
CHAPTER 7 VERIFICATION PROCEDURES

CONFIRMING CPS ARE PROVISIONED
After a CP boots correctly, it can then be provisioned for service. When a CP is not provisioned, the Active LED blinks green. After successful provisioning of the circuit pack, the LED becomes solid green.
READING CP LEDS
Before connecting fibers to the node, confirm that all of the CPs boot properly. Whether or not a CP has booted can be verified by observing the behavior of the CP Active LEDs on the faceplate of the CP. A solid green LED at the faceplate of the PEM, PSM, and OSC CPs indicates that the CP has booted properly. All other CPs display either a blinking green LED if booted and un-provisioned, or a solid green LED if booted and provisioned.
Note:
Note that in a preprovisioned node, the PEM attempts to provision the CPs when they are inserted in the shelf.
The expected behavior of LEDs on the CP faceplate is summarized in Table 7-1. Table 7-1. Correct Behavior Of LEDs After Booting Circuit Pack ADM ABWDM, ABWDM-U BWDM, BWDM-U COM CWDM, CWDM-U EMX12 GRDM Line OLM OSC OSM PEM PMM Post-Amp Pre-Amp PSM RSM LED CP Active CP Active CP Active CP Active CP Active CP Active CP Active CP Active CP Active CP Active CP Active CP Active CP Active CP Active CP Active CP Active CP Active Behavior Expected If CP Boots Correctly Blinking or solid green1 Blinking or solid green1 Blinking or solid green1 See note2 Blinking or solid green1 Blinking or solid green1 Blinking or solid green1 Blinking or solid green1 Blinking or solid green1 Solid green Blinking or solid green1 Solid green Blinking or solid green1 Blinking or solid green1 Blinking or solid green1 Solid green Blinking or solid green1
Installation, Turn-Up and Test Manual September 30, 2003 - Revision A 009-2003-294
7-1
Table 7-1. Correct Behavior Of LEDs After Booting Circuit Pack SMX10G STEM STMX Sync UPSR Splitter VGA WCI WPS Alarm I/O card Power I/O card LED CP Active CP Active CP Active CP Active CP Active CP Active CP Active CP Active Active Active Behavior Expected If CP Boots Correctly Blinking or solid green1 Blinking or solid green1 Blinking or solid green1 Blinking or solid green1 Blinking or solid green1 Blinking or solid green1 Blinking or solid green1 Blinking or solid green1 Solid green Solid green
1. LED appears solid green if pre provisioned 2. The COM card LED is red until the expansion shelf is provisioned and Ethernet cables are connected to the COM CP. The COM card LED is solid green after the expansion shelf is provisioned and Ethernet cables are connected to the COM CP.
After a CP is provisioned, the blinking green LED becomes solid green. All CPs should be provisioned automatically (by means of the PEM) or from the CLI or the ONLINE Metro CIT, and the LEDs identified in Table 7-1 should appear solid green, before connecting any inter-node or intra-node fibers. The following troubleshooting guide will provide assistance should a circuit pack not boot up as expected.
7-2
ONLINE Metro Platform COMPLETE LIST OF CP LEDS
The following tables (Table 7-2 through Table 7-30) include a complete lest of CP LEDs.
ABWDM And ABWDM-U LEDs

This table is valid for ABWDM and ABWDM-U CPs Table 7-2. ABWDM LEDs ABWDM LEDs CP Fail CP Active Red Solid green Fast blinking green Slow blinking green Red = on/ Green = on Red = on/Green = off Red = off/Green = on Color Description Failure has been detected or CP is booting. Normal operation. CP is provisioned and available for use. CP is up and waiting to contact PEM. CP has contacted PEM and is waiting to be provisioned. Hardware failure detected. CP is booting. CP is OK.
Fail (Red)/Active (Green) Combination Possibilities
7-3
10 GbE LAN LEDs
Table 7-3. 10GbE LAN WCI CP Specifications 10 GbE LAN LEDs CP Fail CP Active Description Red Failure has been detected or CP is booting. Solid green Normal operation. CP is provisioned and available for use. Fast blinking green CP is up and waiting to contact PEM. Slow blinking green CP has contacted PEM and is waiting to be provisioned. Fail (Red)/Active (Green) Combination Possibilities Red = on/ Green = on Hardware failure detected. Red = on/Green = off CP is booting. Red = off/Green = on CP is OK. Red A critical, service-affecting alarm exists. Examples: LOS, Och-AIS. Off No critical alarms as described in the RED state or facility is locked. Green Incoming signal detected. Off Loss of incoming signal. Red A critical, service-affecting alarm exists. Examples: LOS from tributary, LOF, SF, BER. Off No critical alarms as described in the RED state or facility is locked. Green Incoming signal detected from tributary side. Off Loss of signal from tributary or facility is locked. Color
LN Fail
LN Active TR Fail
TR Active
ADM CP LEDs
Table 7-4. ADM LEDs LEDs CP Fail CP Active Red Solid green Fast blinking green Slow blinking green Red = on/ Green = on Red = on/Green = off Red = off/Green = on Line Fail Line Active Red Off Green Off Color Description Failure has been detected or CP is booting. Normal operation. CP is provisioned and available for use. CP is up and waiting to contact PEM. CP has contacted PEM and is waiting to be provisioned. Hardware failure detected. CP is booting. CP is OK. Loss of incoming signal. Normal operation. Incoming signal detected. Loss of incoming signal.
7-4

ADMII CP LEDs
Table 7-5. ADMII LEDs LEDs CP Fail CP Active Red Solid green Fast blinking green Slow blinking green Red = on/ Green = on Red = on/Green = off Red = off/Green = on Line Fail Line Active Red Off Green Off Color Description Failure has been detected or CP is booting. Normal operation. CP is provisioned and available for use. CP is up and waiting to contact PEM. CP has contacted PEM and is waiting to be provisioned. Hardware failure detected. CP is booting. CP is OK. Loss of incoming signal. Normal operation. Incoming signal detected. Loss of incoming signal.
Power ACO Card Specifications

Table 7-6. Power And ACO LED Card Specifications Power ACO LEDs Power Green Color Description Power is being supplied to the shelf through either of the Power Entry cards; at least one of the two power inputs is within acceptable limits. No power to the shelf. ACO is active. ACO is inactive.
Off ACO Amber Off
Alarm LED Card LEDs

Table 7-7. Alarm LED Card LEDs Alarm LED Card LEDs Critical Color Red Off Red Off Amber Off Description At least one critical alarm is active in system. Normal operation. At least one major alarm is active in system. Normal operation. At least one minor alarm is active in system. Normal operation.
Major Minor
7-5
BWDM & BWDM-U LEDs
This table is valid for BWDM and BWDM-U CPs Table 7-8. BWDM LEDs BWDM LEDs CP Fail CP Active Red Solid green Fast blinking green Slow blinking green Red = on/ Green = on Red = on/Green = off Red = off/Green = on Color
Description Failure has been detected or CP is booting. Normal operation. CP is provisioned and available for use. CP is up and waiting to contact PEM. CP has contacted PEM and is waiting to be provisioned. Hardware failure detected. CP is booting. CP is OK.
COM CP LEDs
This table is valid for COM, COMH and MCOMH CPs Table 7-9. COM CP LEDs COM CP LEDs CP Fail CP Active Red Solid green Fast blinking green Slow blinking green Red = on/ Green = on Red = on/Green = off Red = off/Green = on Fan A Fan B Red Off Red Off Color Description Failure has been detected or CP is booting. Normal operation. CP is provisioned and available for use. CP is up and waiting to contact PEM. CP has contacted PEM and is waiting to be provisioned. Hardware failure detected. CP is booting. CP is OK. Fan A failure. Normal operation. Fan B failure. Normal operation.
7-6

CWDM LEDs
This table is valid for CWDM and CWDM-U CPs
Table 7-10. CWDM LEDs LEDs CP Fail CP Active Red Solid green Fast blinking green Slow blinking green Red = on/ Green = on Red = on/Green = off Red = off/Green = on Switch Amber Off Color Description Failure has been detected or CP is booting. Normal operation. CP is provisioned and available for use. CP is up and waiting to contact PEM. CP has contacted PEM and is waiting to be provisioned. Hardware failure detected. CP is booting. CP is OK. Equipment protection switch in progress. Normal operation.
EMX12 LEDs
This Table is valid for ESCON MUX and ESCON-II MUX CPS Table 7-11. EMX12 LEDs LEDs CP Fail CP Active Red Solid green Fast blinking green Slow blinking green Red = on/ Green = on Red = on/Green = off Red = off/Green = on Facility Fail Red Color Description Failure has been detected or CP is booting. Normal operation. CP is provisioned and available for use. CP is up and waiting to contact PEM. CP has contacted PEM and is waiting to be provisioned. Hardware failure detected. CP is booting. CP is OK. SF, LOS. LOF, or AIS-L failure.
7-7
GRDM LEDs
This table is valid for GRDM and GRDM-II CPS Table 7-12. GRDM LEDs LEDs CP Fail CP Active Red Solid green Fast blinking green Slow blinking green Red = on/ Green = on Red = on/Green = off Red = off/Green = on OC-48 Fail OC-48 Active Tributary Ports Fail Tributary Ports Active Red Green Red Green Color
Description Failure has been detected or CP is booting. Normal operation. CP is provisioned and available for use. CP is up and waiting to contact PEM. CP has contacted PEM and is waiting to be provisioned. Hardware failure detected. CP is booting. CP is OK. Failure has been detected. OC-48 is active. Failure has been detected. Trib port is active.
Line CP LEDs
Table 7-13. Line CP LEDs Line CP LEDs CP Fail CP Active Red Solid green Fast blinking green Slow blinking green Red = on/Green = off Red = off/Green = on LN (line) Fail LN (line) Active Red Off Green Off Color Description Failure has been detected or CP is booting. Normal operation. CP is provisioned and available for use. CP is up and waiting to contact PEM. CP has contacted PEM and is waiting to be provisioned. CP is booting. CP is OK. Loss of incoming signal. Normal operation. Incoming signal detected. Loss of incoming signal.
7-8

OLM CP LEDs
Table 7-14. OLM CP LEDs OLM CP LED CP Fail CP Active Red Solid green Fast blinking green Slow blinking green Red = on/Green = off Red = off/Green = on LN (line) Fail LN (line) Active Red Off Blinking green Green Off ND (node) Fail Red Off ND (node) Active Green Off Color Description Failure has been detected or the CP is booting. The CP is provisioned and available for use. Normal operation. CP is up and waiting to contact PEM. CP has contacted PEM and is waiting to be provisioned. CP is booting or hardware failure. CP is OK. Loss of incoming signal from line. Normal operation, or no traffic, or circuits are locked. After booting, the VOA has not yet reached its target attenuation. It is not yet safe to fiber the card. Incoming signal from line present. No traffic. Circuits are locked. Loss of incoming signal from node. No channel is provisioned. Circuits are locked or associated facilities are locked. Incoming signal from the node present. Normal operation. No traffic. Circuits are locked or associated facilities are locked.
7-9
OSCH CP LEDs
Table 7-15. OSCH CP LEDs OSCH CP LED CP Fail CP Active Red Solid green Fast blinking green Slow blinking green Red = on/ Green = on Red = on/Green = off Red = off/Green = on OSCH Fail OSCH Active Fan A Fan B Red Off Green Off Red Off Red Off Description
Failure has been detected or CP is booting. Normal operation. CP is provisioned and available for use. CP is up and waiting to contact PEM. CP has contacted PEM and is waiting to be provisioned. Hardware failure detected. CP is booting. CP is OK. Rx or Tx failure or loss of signal. Normal operation. Signal detected and no failure. Rx or Tx failure or loss of signal. Fan A failure. Normal operation. Fan B failure. Normal operation.
OSM CP LEDs
Table 7-16. OSM CP LEDs OSM CP LEDs CP Fail CP Active Red Solid green Fast blinking green Slow blinking green Red = on/Green = off Red = off/Green = on LN (line) Fail Red Off LN (line) Active Green Off ND (node) Fail Red Off Color Meaning Failure has been detected or the CP is booting. CP is provisioned and available for use. Normal operation. CP is up and waiting to contact PEM. CP has contacted PEM and is waiting to be provisioned. CP is booting or hardware failure. CP is OK. Loss of incoming signal from line. Normal operation, or no channel is provisioned, or circuits and/or associated facilities are locked. Incoming signal from line present. No traffic, or circuits are locked, or associated facilities are locked. Loss of incoming signal from node. Normal operation, or no traffic, or circuits are locked, or associated facilities are locked.
7 - 10
Table 7-16. OSM CP LEDs (Continued) OSM CP LEDs ND (node) Active Green Off Color Meaning Incoming signal from node present. Normal operation. No traffic, or circuits are locked, or associated facilities are locked.
PEM LEDs
Table 7-17. PEM LEDs PEM LEDs CP Fail CP Active Red Green Red On/Green Off Red Off/Green Off Red Off/Green On Red Off/Green Blink Color Description Failure has been detected or CP is booting. Normal operation. CP is provisioned and available for use. Failure or booting. No power. Available. Booting.
Fail (Red) /Active (Green) Possibilities
PMM CP LEDs
Table 7-18. PMM CP LEDs PMM CP LEDs CP Fail CP Active Red Solid green Fast blinking green Slow blinking green Color Description Failure has been detected or the CP is booting. CP is provisioned and available for use. Normal operation. CP is up and waiting to contact PEM. CP has contacted PEM and is waiting to be provisioned. CP is booting or hardware failure. CP is OK. Loss of incoming signal. No traffic. Circuits are locked, or associated facilities are locked. After booting, the VOA has not yet reached its target attenuation. It is not yet safe to fiber the CP. Incoming signal present. No traffic. Circuits are locked, or associated facilities are locked.
Fail (Red)/Active (Green) Combination Possibilities Red = on/Green = off Red = off/Green = on VOA 1 and VOA 2 Fail Red Off VOA 1 and VOA 2 Active Blinking green Green Off
7 - 11
Post-Amp CP LEDs
Table 7-19. Post-Amp CP LEDs Post-Amp LEDs CP Fail CP Active Red Solid green Fast blinking green Slow blinking green Color
Description Failure has been detected or CP is booting. Normal operation. CP is provisioned and available for use. CP is up and waiting to contact PEM. CP has contacted PEM and is waiting to be provisioned. Hardware failure detected. CP is booting. CP is OK. Loss of incoming signal. Normal operation. Incoming signal detected. Loss of incoming signal. Loss of incoming signal. Normal operation. Incoming signal detected. Loss of incoming signal.
Fail (Red)/Active (Green) Combination Possibilities Red = on/ Green = on Red = on/Green = off Red = off/Green = on LN (line) Fail (For CP revision 09M and below) LN (line) Active (For CP revision 09M and below) ND (node) Fail (For CP revision 09M and above) ND (node) Active (For CP revision 09M and above) Red Off Green Off Red Off Green Off
Power Entry Card LEDs

Table 7-20. Power Entry Card LEDs Power Entry Card LED Status Green Off Color Description Power present and card functioning properly. No power or blown fuse.
Power LED Card LEDs

Table 7-21. Power LED Card LEDs Power LED Card LED Power Color Green Off Description Power is being supplied to the shelf through either Power Entry card; at least one of the two power inputs is within acceptable limits. No power to the shelf.
7 - 12

Pre-Amp CP LEDs
Table 7-22. Pre-Amp CP LEDs Pre-Amp CP LEDs CP Fail CP Active Red Solid green Fast blinking green Slow blinking green Red = on/ Green = on Red = on/Green = off Red = off/Green = on LN (line) Fail LN (line) Active Red Off Green Off Color Description Failure has been detected or CP is booting. Normal operation. CP is provisioned and available for use. CP is up and waiting to contact PEM. CP has contacted PEM and is waiting to be provisioned. Hardware failure detected. CP is booting. CP is OK. Loss of incoming signal. Normal operation. Incoming signal detected. Loss of incoming signal.
PSM CP LEDs
Table 7-23. PSM CP LEDs PSM CP LEDs CP Fail CP Active Red Green Red On/Green Off Red Off/Green Off Red Off/Green On Red Off/Green Blink Color Description Failure has been detected or CP is booting. CP is available for use. Failure or booting. No power. Available. Booting.
Fail (Red) /Active (Green) Possibilities
7 - 13
RSM CP LEDs
Table 7-24. RSM CP LEDs RSM CP LEDs CP Fail CP Active Red Solid green Fast blinking green Slow blinking green Red = on/ Green = on Red = on/Green = off Red = off/Green = on Switch Amber Off Color
Description Failure has been detected or CP is booting. Normal operation. CP is provisioned and available for use. CP is up and waiting to contact PEM. CP has contacted PEM and is waiting to be provisioned. Hardware failure detected. CP is booting. CP is OK. Ring switch or protect pass-through mode. Normal operation.
SMX-04 10G CP LEDs

Table 7-25. SMX-04 10G CP LEDs LEDs CP Fail CP Active Red Solid green Fast blinking green Slow blinking green Red = on/ Green = on Red = on/Green = off Red = off/Green = on Facility Fail Red Color Description Failure has been detected or CP is booting. Normal operation. CP is provisioned and available for use. CP is up and waiting to contact PEM. CP has contacted PEM and is waiting to be provisioned. Hardware failure detected. CP is booting. CP is OK. SF, LOS. LOF, or AIS-L failure.
7 - 14

STEM CP LEDs
Table 7-26. STEM CP LEDs STEM CP LEDs CP Fail CP Active Red Solid green Fast blinking green Slow blinking green Red = on/ Green = on Red = on/Green = off Red = off/Green = on Facility Fail Red Color Description Failure has been detected or CP is booting. Normal operation. CP is provisioned and available for use. CP is up and waiting to contact PEM. CP has contacted PEM and is waiting to be provisioned. Hardware failure detected. CP is booting. CP is OK. SF, LOS. LOF, or AIS-L failure.
STMX CP LEDs
Table 7-27. STMX CP LEDs LEDs CP Fail CP Active Red Solid green Fast blinking green Slow blinking green Red = on/ Green = on Red = on/Green = off Red = off/Green = on Facility Fail Red Color Description Failure has been detected or CP is booting. Normal operation. CP is provisioned and available for use. CP is up and waiting to contact PEM. CP has contacted PEM and is waiting to be provisioned. Hardware failure detected. CP is booting. CP is OK. SF, LOS. LOF, or AIS-L failure.
7 - 15
VGA CP LEDs
Table 7-28. VGA CP LEDs VGA CP LEDs CP Fail CP Active Red Solid green Fast blinking green Slow blinking green Red = on/Green = off Red = off/Green = on SG (signal) Fail SG (signal) Active Red Off Green Off Color
Meaning Failure has been detected or the CP is booting. The CP is provisioned and available for use. Normal operation. CP is up and waiting to contact PEM. CP has contacted PEM and is waiting to be provisioned. CP is booting or hardware failure. CP is OK. Loss of incoming signal. Channel count through the path equals zero. Incoming signal present. No traffic. Circuits are locked, or associated facilities are locked.
7 - 16

WCI CP LEDs
Table 7-29. WCI CP Specifications WCI LEDs CP Fail CP Active Red Solid green Fast blinking green Slow blinking green Color Description Failure has been detected or CP is booting. Normal operation. CP is provisioned and available for use. CP is up and waiting to contact PEM. CP has contacted PEM and is waiting to be provisioned. Hardware failure detected. CP is booting. CP is OK. A critical, service-affecting alarm exists. Examples: SONET LOS, LOF, SF BER, OchAIS. No critical alarms as described in the RED state or facility is locked. Incoming signal detected. Loss of incoming signal. A critical, service-affecting alarm exists. Examples: LOS from tributary, LOF, SF, BER. No critical alarms as described in the RED state or facility is locked. Incoming signal detected from tributary side. Loss of signal from tributary or facility is locked.
Fail (Red)/Active (Green) Combination Possibilities Red = on/ Green = on Red = on/Green = off Red = off/Green = on LN Fail Red
Off LN Active TR Fail Green Off Red Off TR Active Green Off
WPS CP LEDs
Table 7-30. WPS CP LEDs WPS CP LEDs CP Fail CP Active Red Solid green Fast blinking green Slow blinking green Red = on/ Green = on Red = on/Green = off Red = off/Green = on Switch Amber Off Color Description Failure has been detected or CP is booting. Normal operation. CP is provisioned and available for use. CP is up and waiting to contact PEM. CP has contacted PEM and is waiting to be provisioned. Hardware failure detected. CP is booting. CP is OK. Equipment protection switch in progress. Normal operation.
7 - 17
VERIFICATION PROCEDURES INITIAL CHECKS
1. Prior to beginning installation, obtain a copy of the network Visio diagrams, build out report and the ONLINE Metro Designer Tool .Met file from which the diagrams are generated. 2. Verify via the systems engineer or the ONLINE Metro Designer Tool .Met file whether any or all of the nodes are to be provisioned as 'Ampless' or 'Pad Equalized PMA'. 3. Verify that the Node Ids have been appropriately assigned for the network. Contact the project manager for more information. 4. Travel around the network completing the following initial checks: 5. Verify that every external connector (other than WCI line Rx) is firmly seated in the corresponding bulkhead both at all cards and in the patch trays by applying pressure at every connection. A spot check is usually not accurate.
6. Pull all WCI Line Rx fibers halfway out of the bulkhead at all nodes until later in the procedure.
Note:
Pulling the fibers halfway out of the bulkhead will help avoid damage to the CP that could be caused by excessive input power.
7. Verify that all interfaces are labeled in the patch tray according to the standards in Appendix D. 8. For BLSR networks, verify that all WCA (protected) circuits and working side regenerators (i.e. all circuits with a backup BWDM) are padded between the Primary and Backup BWDM ('Bx' Tx port) and the CWDM (Bx-1 and Bx-2 Rx ports). The 'x' represents the band number. 9. At least one node should be designated as the NTP server and all NTP Clients should reference the node ID of the server. Verify that all times synchronize. 10. Verify the provisioning of each node, including the ring map, optical configuration, NE Time and NE Attributes (all found under the 'Configuration' menu after highlighting the node). Compare the ONLINE Metro CIT fiber list for each shelf with the Visio diagram for the shelf. The fiber list is found by highlighting each shelf and choosing View->Fibers. If these fiber lists do not correspond completely with the Visio diagram, either the ONLINE Metro CIT provisioning or the Visio diagram is incorrect. Common discrepancies include: 11. Ampless or Pad Equalized PMA options mistakenly enabled or disabled. Verify either via the ONLINE Metro Designer Tool build out report or by contacting the appropriate systems engineer whether any or all nodes in the network were designed under these circumstances. 12. Order of BWDMs on each side of the node (which COM ports connect to which PASS ports?) 13. Open vs. closed node (there may be missing connections either in the diagram or in the ONLINE Metro CIT, if so determine whether the provisioning or Visio is incorrect) 14. Channel or band pass-through not provisioned (connections in the diagram will be missing in the ONLINE Metro CIT) 15. Regenerators provisioned as terminating WCI cards - 'line side regenerators' (tributary ports disabled), whether working side or protection side (used only under BLSR ring switch), should be fibered to two different CWDM cards since the channel wavelength is to be conserved during regeneration (CWDM modules multiplex one band and demultiplex the complimentary band). These must be provisioned in pairs as regenerators in order to provision a circuit that passes through them. Installation, Turn-up, and Test Manual September 30, 2003 - Revision A 009-2003-294
7 - 18
16. Variable Gain Amplifiers (VGAs) provisioned in the wrong amplification mode (Optimal or Fixed) 17. PMMs provisioned as MPT using the ONLINE Metro CIT must use the following values for both VOAs: 18. Ext. Pad: 0.0 19. Max Out Power: 99.9 20. Verify span properties: 21. Using an OTDR, from the Telect tray bulkheads, verify the span length, loss and back-reflection for each span in the network. ANSI/EIA/TIA 568A REQUIREMENTS 1. Maximum Splice Loss/splice = 0.3dB 2. Maximum Connector Loss/pair of mated connectors = 0.75dB CIENA DWDM REQUIREMENTS 1. Maximum Back Reflectance per event = -40dB (i.e. -50dB is acceptable, -30dB is unacceptable) 2. Unlock all of the line facilities (East and West) on every node. 'Facilities -> Line' 3. Using an Optical Power Meter (OPM), verify the span losses are +/- 2dBm of network design. 4. At the Telect tray, measure the Line TX power, scope and reseat connector. 5. At the adjacent node, measure the Line RX at the MU connector at the Line Interface Module (Post-Amp, OSM, OLM, Line Card), scope and reseat connector 6. Calculate the fiber loss and compare these loss values to the Network design. 7. If the span loss values are > 2dBm, please forward the results to the SE for a new design. 8. Input the OPM span loss values into the software for each node. This must be done for the east and west sides of every node (except for linear system terminals). To set span losses for a node, highlight the node and go to Configuration->Set Span Loss. 9. Unlock 1 circuit on each span and verify that the software measured span loss matches the ONLINE Metro Designer Tool design (provisioned value) for each line fiber. To find the software measured span loss, highlight 'subnetwork' and choose Diagnostics->Span Loss. The 'From Node' in the ONLINE Metro CIT span loss measurement screen is the node transmitting light (Tx) on that fiber.
Note:
All spans may not have circuits traversing through them. Perform line switches on BLSR networks to route a circuit across those spans and verify the ONLINE Metro CIT span loss on those spans and release the switches.
UPSR networks may not have circuits across certain spans and the OPM measured span loss must be used as the primary reference. Please reference the Span Loss Quick Reference Guide for valid span loss results and fiber balancing. If ONLINE Metro CIT results are valid and they are > or 1dB < the designed values then these span loss values must be sent to the Systems Engineer who designed the network and another .Met file and Visio must be created. 10. Unlock all remaining circuits in the network.
7 - 19
11. Verify that all WCI Line lasers in the network are enabled. To do this highlight 'subnetwork' and go to Diagnostics->WCI Measurements. Note: For 2R, GbE (3R or 3RL) and OC-192 WCI cards, the line lasers are only enabled with a tributary port input and the tributary lasers are only enabled with a line port input. For the purposes of optical verification, use test sets, 'loopbacks' and 'daisy chains' to turn all of these lasers on. Any number of circuits can be 'daisy chained' for this purpose, but there are restrictions to the number of circuits that can be chained together for the purposes of BER testing. Also, the OC-192 WCI cards require a 10dB pad when going from any tributary Tx to any tributary Rx and require tributary loopbacks for line side regenerators. Please see the BER testing section below for more information. 3R and 3RL WCI cards should always have their line laser enabled when the circuit is unlocked.
Note:
12. Verify that all WCI tributary lasers are enabled for all circuits except UPSR protected circuits. For UPSR protected circuits, verify that only the 'working' or the 'protection' path have tributary lasers on at one time (for example, if at node 1 the B2C3 tributary laser is enabled, the B8C3 tributary laser should be disabled). The procedure is similar to the previous step. 13. Change the switching options for the purposes of testing (these must be changed again later in the procedure before the network is considered complete). For BLSR subnetworks set ring switch criterion on all nodes to 'OSC signal fail or signal degrade', 'revertive' and 5 second delay using the ONLINE Metro CIT. This is done by highlighting each node and choosing 'Switching->Ring Switch Setup' For each UPSR protected circuit in UPSR subnetworks, change the delay time to 5 seconds. This option is found by highlighting each circuit and selecting 'Switching'. You will need to change the delay back to 300 seconds for all BLSR nodes or UPSR protected circuits after the verification procedures are complete, This is the amount of time the network waits after all alarms associated with the 'working path' clear before switching back to that path. 14. Travel to each node in the network and complete the following: 15. Verify that all pads in the network meet the following restrictions based upon the latest design. 16. All Tx or Pass Through pads must match the network design. 17. All WCI Rx pads must match the network design within 1dB. If all verification specifications are met and during optical verification it is determined that these pad values are not fully functional, contact product support and the systems engineer for investigation. 18. For each WCI line Rx fiber (except OC-192 WCI), check with an OPM (@1550nm and set to dBm) that each power is less than -6 dBm and seat the Rx fibers in the bulkhead. Complete this process for each node. Sometimes the initial open loop VOA setting will not be at the target value. In this case, the values will reach the target after all LOS alarms for cleared. If the Rx powers are too hot, change the pad values to achieve <-6 dBm. Seat the fibers and wait a couple of minutes for all LOS alarms on that node to clear (this allows the VOA loops close and begin to adjust). Now pull the Rx fibers and measure the values again. If all provisioning is correct, you should now be able to change back to the original pads without exceeding the maximum Rx power of the card (if all of the pads are functioning properly).
7 - 20
For OC-192 transponders, the ONLINE Metro Designer Tool does not predict the pad values to needed accuracy due to the tolerances imbedded in the software. Prior to seating the OC-192 Line Rx fibers, measure the Line Rx with an optical power meter and pad the Line Rx using the following guideline: If LR Rx power > -9 dBm, pad the LR Rx power to between -9 and -11 dBm (-10 dBm is optimal). If LR Rx power <= -9 dBm, do not pad the LR Rx. After all Line Rx fibers are seated and all Loss of Signal alarms are cleared on that node, check the ONLINE Metro CIT measured OC-192 LR Rx powers and clean connections/adjust padding if necessary. Typically, the LR Rx powers will change slightly after all VOAs reach closed loop. OC-192 is not supported for optically protected (WCA) circuits on BLSR, so the LR Rx power is constant and only needs to be measured and attenuated (if necessary) once during installation. Important: OC-192 LR Rx power must never be greater than -9 dBm. OC-192 regenerators require a 10dB pads in the loopback on the tributary ports. 19. For both OSCs on each node, remove the OSC Rx fiber from the bulkhead of the OSC card and verify that the OSC reports a LOS in the ONLINE Metro CIT. 20. For BLSR subnetworks, also verify that an 'autoswitch' is executed by checking both the 'switch' LED on the RSM and the network display in the ONLINE Metro CIT. Verify with an OPM (@1550nm) that the OSC Rx power is between -25 and -30 dBm. If an extended range OSC (XOSC) is used, the Rx power at that type of card should be between -33 and -38dBm. If the power is too low, find the source of the extra attenuation (dirty fiber on Tx or Rx end between Line Card/ Postamp and the OSC or a faulty attenuator). If the power is too high either the network design does not match the actual span loss or the existing pad is faulty. Replace the OSC Rx fiber and verify that the switch is released after 5 seconds. Repeat for the other OSC. If no switch is observed the problem may be:
u u u
A forced switch or lockout in place in the network, take it down The ring switch criterion is set to 'line signal failure' for that node For spans that no circuits traverse under normal conditions, no ring switch should be observed when pulling the OSC Rx fibers (the software is aware that no circuits cross that path and will not execute the switch). A faulty OSC For UPSR, Pt-Pt and LADM, while at each node verify that each OSC Rx power is greater than -30dBm (-38dBm for X-OSC).
u u
21. For all rings, take down both line fibers on each side of the node (one side at a time). With one pair of line fibers removed, verify that all other nodes in the network are still visible with the ONLINE Metro CIT (either wait 3-5 minutes to see if any communication failure alarms are raised, or try to pull some type of information from another node). Complete this test for both sides of each node. A loss of visibility may indicate a faulty OSC. 22. Verify that all OSCs in the subnetwork are communicating error free. This should be checked after the OSCs have been communicating without interruption for a few hours or more. This is done by highlighting the appropriate OSC facility under the tributary facilities and choosing Performance>Current 15 min. History Data. There should be no Code Violations (CV) or Errored Seconds (ES) since the last time the OSCs were manually interrupted (by pulling a line or OSC fiber, reseating the card or the OSC on the neighboring node, or cold reset of the card or the OSC on the neighboring node).
7 - 21
23. Verify that all alarms on the network have been cleared except for tributary LOS (it says 'OPRtrib' in the description), LOF and AIS-L alarms for each circuit and potentially The following are suggestions for clearing the following alarms, if they still exist: Line Facilities Threshold Crossings - these usually require changing the thresholds to allow for the optical powers experienced on each individual system. 'Line facility' refers to postamp or line card. For each line facility with a threshold crossing warning, find the software measured line port Tx and Rx power. This is done by highlighting either the west or east line facility and going to Performance->Current 15 min. Data (OPR= optical receive power, OPT =optical transmit power). Change the thresholds to allow for the current values with a 2-3 dB margin (as long as there are no other alarms such as Line LOS). This is done by highlighting the east or west line facility and going to Performance->Modify Threshold Data.
Note:
For BLSRs, more threshold crossings will usually be generated under each switching scenario due to optical switching and the thresholds will need to be continually modified until a value is reached in which no warnings appear under any switched condition.
Note:
It is best not to change these thresholds until after completion of the Optical Verification section of this procedure, as the threshold may need to be changed again if the network was not in its ideal state at the time.
Excessive Input Power/Laser Bias Current Failure/Transmitter Failure - When these alarms arise in reference to a postamp or preamp, it usually indicates that too much light is entering the node port of the amplifier (not likely to be a faulty card). Check that the CWDM and WPS VOAs are all 'in-range closed' for all VOAs in which 'VOA Channel Count' is >0 (see step #13 for more information). Verify that the VOA channel count (# of wavelengths going through that VOA) is correct. If that value is not correct, either the node is provisioned incorrectly or the database is corrupt. Another cause of this alarm can be provisioning nodes as Pad Equalized PMA when the network was not designed using this option. If the problem was not one of the above, proceed with optical verification. The alarm will be addressed again that section. Line Facilities- LOS Postamp - This is usually the opposite of LBC Failure in that not enough light is entering the node port of the Postamp/Line Card. If all earlier checks have been made, the problem is usually one of the ends of the fiber that connects into the node port of the Postamp/Line Card. Trib Facilities - LOS Line - Since all WCI line lasers are enabled (checked earlier); this is a fiber, pad or VOA issue. Connect an OSA at the preamp monitor port or at the appropriate line Rx fiber and check that the appropriate wavelength(s) are arriving at the node with the LOS. If the wavelength is present, the problem is at the node with the LOS (either a faulty attenuator, a connector not seated fully, a connection between the wrong ports, a 'crossed' connection (Tx-Tx, Rx-Rx) or a dirty connection somewhere in that light path). If the wavelength is not present, the problem is usually a crossed fiber at either the 'transmit' node or at one of the nodes the signal passes through. If the wavelength is present but has an extremely low power, the problem is probably a dirty connection or an 'open' VOA at either the 'transmit' node or one of the nodes the signal passes through. If the problem is a VOA, try clearing all the LOS's at that node by reducing the pad values. Be sure to then change back to the original pad value after the VOA feedback loop closes for the first time. Peer Communication Failure - these alarms indicate that the OSC cannot communicate well with the other OSC on the same node.
7 - 22
Reboot both OSCs on the node. If the alarm persists there may be a problem with an OSC or the backplane (run testcomm). Signaling Failure - these alarms indicate that the OSC cannot communicate well with another OSC on the neighboring node. For Signaling Failure alarms, try rebooting the OSC with the alarm and the OSC that it communicates with on the neighboring node. To reboot an OSC, highlight the card and go to 'Reset Card'. If an OSC LOS is also present on the same card/facility, the LOS is the root cause of the alarms. Communications Failure (on a particular card, not a node) - indicates that the PEM cannot communicate with the card that is in alarm. Attempt to communicate with the card via the ONLINE Metro CIT or a telnet session. If communication is possible, the alarm may be erroneous. In this case, try rebooting the card from the ONLINE Metro CIT, rebooting the PEM, and rebooting the OSC cards. If the alarm still exists, it may indicate a faulty card, a faulty OSC, a faulty PEM or a faulty shelf backplane
OPTICAL VERIFICATION
For UPSR, Pt-Pt, LADM and BLSR with only UCA circuits, items #1-7 only need to be performed once at each node if all requirements are met initially. Otherwise, a final check for the purposes of data collection is required after all optical powers are at their target values.
Note:
Refer to Appendix A, Troubleshooting Optical Interfaces for optical
parameters.
For BLSR networks with WCA circuits, items #1-7 must be completed again at each node for equipment switch (at all nodes at same time) and for every ring switch circumstance. The reason is that BLSRs with WCA circuits actually perform optical switching. This uses different fibers and attenuators in the nodes under different circumstances and can change the power levels and OSNRs seen under each possible switching circumstance. For UPSR networks, no switching affects any spectrums, Rx powers or VOAs. The best way to avoid traveling around the ring multiple times is to perform all steps at each node before moving on to the next node. Open nodes or nodes without any band or channel pass-throughs are usually the best place to start. If problems are found at any point, the problem should be rectified and the procedure restarted since you will need a complete final set of data and any optical power changes on one channel can affect the powers on other channels. Use the following procedure:
For BLSR Subnetworks with WCA Circuits

u u
Complete items #1-7 under normal working conditions for one node Execute a manual equipment switch to backup on each node in the ring by highlighting the node you want to execute the switch on and then choosing Switching->Equipment Switch-> Manual switch to backup. Begin the next step after every node is switched to backup. Complete items #1-7 for equipment switch circumstances Release equipment switches on all nodes Repeat items #1-7 for ring switches on each span in the ring individually. For example, highlight 'node 1' and execute a forced switch on the East side (this is referred to as 'ring switch span 1' in the verification results documentation). This is found in Switching->Ring Protection Switch. After completing the items #15-20 for a ring switch away from that span, release the 'request on working' on the East side of the node on which the switch was applied. Repeat this process for each span in the network working clockwise around the ring.
u u u
7 - 23
Note:
u
When you execute a ring switch on one side of a span, the node on the other side of the span executes its ring switch automatically.
Repeat this entire sequence for each of the nodes in the network working clockwise around the ring.
For a UPSR, Pt-Pt, LADM, or BLSR with Only UCA Circuits

u
Complete items #1-7 under normal conditions for 'node 1' (i.e. the node with the smallest node ID, usually ends in '1'). Repeat items #1-7 for each of the other nodes in the network working clockwise around the ring. Important Notes: Preamp/Pre VGA monitor ports show the wavelengths which are entering that particular side of the node from a neighboring node Postamp/Post VGA monitor ports show the wavelengths which are exiting the node where the measurement is taking place When choosing the monitoring location for OSA measurements, choose the same location at every node and use the following guideline: If preamps/pre VGAs are available on both sides of every node use the preamp monitor ports for all verification and data collection. However, you can still use the postamp monitor ports to verify that the node in front of you is functioning correctly before leaving that site (it saves a lot of traveling time). If preamps/pre VGAs are not available at every node, for each side of each node which does not contain a preamp or pre-VGA, use the postamp, line card, OLM or OSM Line Rx fibers (also accessible as the Line Rx (In) connections in patch trays) on each side without preamp/ pre-VGA ports of each node for verification and data collection. To accomplish this verification on a BLSR one must use lockouts on all spans (or for verifying a switched condition, a forced switch accompanied by lockouts on the working side of all other spans) to ensure that measurements are taken with all expected wavelengths are present under that particular condition. A 16dB pad must be used for attenuating the signal going to the Optical Spectrum Analyzer (OSA). Postamp/post VGA monitor ports and line card, OLM, OSM Line Tx fibers (also accessible as Line Tx (Out) connections in the patch tray) are the most useful for troubleshooting since most problems identified at these ports are problems originating at the node you are currently working on; however, these values are not to be used for comparison with the ONLINE Metro Designer Tool values nor for data collection. Problems found for channels that pass through that node could also be due to fiber problems at other nodes.
u u
7 - 24
Note:
Note: None of the nodes in a subnetwork should be provisioned as 'Ampless ' without confirming with the SE that this was the design intent. Ampless is a property of the entire network and all nodes must be provisioned as such. Ampless configurations do not use any type of power management and all VOAs are 'open' with an attenuation of 0dBm. For networks provisioned as Ampless, ONLINE Metro CIT expected values will not be available and the ONLINE Metro Designer Tool buildout report and output files must be used for all verification. The absence of amplifiers in a network does not guarantee an Ampless configuration.
Note: 1.
Refer to Appendix A, Troubleshooting Optical Interfaces for optical parameters.
Verify that all VOAs in the entire network are in the expected state ('in range' and 'closed' under most circumstances, exceptions listed below). This information is found by highlighting 'subnetwork' and choosing Diagnostics->VOA Measurements.
u u
2. All VOAs should be 'closed' except for: VOAs for which the channel count is 0. Postamp, Line card and CWDM VOAs for which the Expected TX Total Power is +4dBm or greater. The Expected Tx Total Power is found in the VOA Measurements diagnostic for 4.x and above software versions. For 3.2.x software, the Expected TX Channel Power must be converted to total power for verification using the conversions in Appendix D. If an LOS exists in the network, all VOAs through which that wavelength passes will be 'open' (go to step #14 above, clear the alarm, and verify that the VOAs are now 'closed').
VOAs should always be 'in range'. For VOA's which are 'out of range', check to see whether the current attenuation value is 0 dB or 20 dB. If the attenuation is 0 dB, there is probably either dirty or crossed fiber causing too little light to reach the VOA or the span loss values are too high. If the attenuation is 20dB, there is probably either another VOA that is not 'in range', too little span loss, or a configuration error/corrupt database at one or more nodes. If the expected attenuation is negative, contact Product Support. Also verify that the channel count is correct under each circumstance. If not, there is a configuration error or a corrupt database (see database removal in appendix). For CWDMs used in p-side regenerators, the CWDM VOA channel count may show '3' in the ONLINE Metro CIT when these regens are not in use. Disregard this value since it is the value given when the regenerators are not in use. When an appropriate ring switch is executed, these cards become active and display a relevant value. Verify that the current attenuation is within 2dB of the expected attenuation for all VOAs in which the VOA Channel Count is >0. If not, this will later cause problems when verifying the WCI line Rx values. This can be completed by verifying that the 'delta' column is between -2 to +2 dB. 3. Verify that the expected wavelengths are present using an OSA. This should be done for each direction (W/E) of each node. Remember that for a BLSR, wavelengths only change directions at the nodes bordering the span with a 'line cut'. This means that you should many times expect to see the same wavelength entering and/or exiting the node on both sides for BSLR WCA circuits (this is also seen for UCA circuits in which the same band/channel is used on both sides of the node). 4. Verify that the difference between the lowest and highest channel power at the postamp monitor port, preamp monitor port or the line Rx (if only line cards are present) are less than 3dB using an Installation, Turn-Up and Test Manual September 30, 2003 - Revision A 009-2003-294
7 - 25
OSA. This should be done for each direction (W/E) of each node. This restriction may be increased to 5 dB on high channel counts (4 or more bands). 5. Using an OSA, verify that the OSNR for every channel is >20dB (>26dB for OC-192) and within 2dB of the expected OSNR value given in the ONLINE Metro Designer Tool BOL (beginning of life).csv output files. Since the 20dB and 26dB OSNR restrictions refer to the required OSNR at the WCI Line Rx port, the OSNRs predicted by the ONLINE Metro Designer Tool will usually be much higher than these values. The more distance and amplifiers that exist between the transmit and receive nodes, the worse the OSNR will be at the WCI Rx port. This step should be completed for each direction (W/E) of each node. Once the spectrums are level and the OSNRs meet the expected values, record all OSNR data at the Rx end of each fiber (i.e. light coming into the node from each direction after traversing OSP fiber). The OSNR values reported must be taken from postamp, linecard, OLM, or OSM Line Rx ports, or if available from preamp/pre VGA monitor ports. 6. Verify that all AMP/Line cards are in the expected state. To find this information highlight 'subnetwork' and choose Diagnostics->Amp/Line Measurements. The EDFA Status should be 'Okay' if the 'Channel Count' is greater than 0. Verify that all measured Node/Line Tx/Rx Total Powers are within 2dB of the ONLINE Metro CIT expected values. For the 3.2 software stream, the expected value is given in the ONLINE Metro CIT diagnostics is on a 'per channel' basis; use Appendix D to determine the 'Expected Total Power' for each port. For software versions 4.0 and above, Expected and Measured Total powers exist in the diagnostic (no calculation necessary). For all post amplifiers (not post VGAs), compare the expected and measured node Rx levels and pad the measured value to equal to or less than, but still within 1db of, the expected value. These can be obtained for the node by highlighting the node and choosing Diagnostic-> Amp/Line Measurements. For example, if the expected node Rx total power is -6.5dBm and the measured node Rx total power is -5.9dBm, use a 1dB pad to bring the measured value to -6.9dBm (ideally, the new connections required for the padding will usually increase the actual amount of attenuation introduced). This procedure should only be completed after all other aspects of the network have been optimized (steps #1-18). If the padding required exceeds 2dB, please contact Special Operations or Product Support. If Excessive Power or Laser Bias Current Failure alarms are being reported by the circuit pack, these alarms will be cleared as a result. Any padding added for this purpose must be added to the 'as-built' Visio, patch tray layouts and the Production Network Deficiency list. 7. Verify that the WCI Line Rx power for each transponder is between -6 and -28dBm and within 3dB of the ONLINE Metro CIT expected value (based upon the provisioning information). Also, verify that the ONLINE Metro CIT predicted value is within the range given in the ONLINE Metro Designer Tool buildout report (if not the provisioning may be incorrect). To find the measured values and the ONLINE Metro CIT expected value, highlight 'subnetwork' and go to Diagnostic>WCI Measurements. The expected Line Rx power without padding is given in one column and the measured Line Rx value is in another column. Subtract the value for the pad actually used from the expected value to get the 'true' expected Line Rx optical power (that is, expected value without pad - pad value = expected value). This negative of value is already calculated in the 'Delta' column. The measured Line Rx value should be within 3 dB of this calculated value. Otherwise there is too much or too little attenuation somewhere in the network or the provisioning information is incorrect.
Note:
The last column gives the 'delta' (difference) between the measured Rx and expected Rx without a pad. This value (if negative) should be within 3 dB of the pad value that is currently installed otherwise there is a problem. If the value is positive, the measured power is greater than expected without any padding. In this case, use the equation above to determine if the restrictions is met.
7 - 26
Verify that the WCI receive powers are also within the range specified by the ONLINE Metro Designer Tool design buildout report. Unlike the values above, these values are the designed values and are not based upon the provisioning information (i.e. faulty provisioning could still pass the above check). 8. Immediately after the network meets the optical verification specifications above, send the latest All Power Measurements (including files for all switched conditions for BLSRs, see result template documentation for file naming), as-built Visio and .Met files to list.special_Ops@ciena.com for audit
SWITCH TIMES AND BER TESTING

For UPSR, Pt-Pt, LADM and BLSR with only UCA circuits, items #1-7 only need to be performed once at each node if all requirements are met initially. Otherwise, a final check for the purposes of data collection is required after all optical powers are at their target values. For BLSR networks with WCA circuits, items #1-7 must be completed again at each node for equipment switch (at all nodes at same time) and for every ring switch circumstance. The reason is that BLSRs with WCA circuits actually perform optical switching. This uses different fibers and attenuators in the nodes under different circumstances and can change the power levels and OSNRs seen under each possible switching circumstance. For UPSR networks, no switching affects any spectrums, Rx powers or VOAs. The best way to avoid traveling around the ring multiple times is to perform all steps at each node before moving on to the next node. Open nodes or nodes without any band or channel pass-throughs are usually the best place to start. If problems are found at any point, the problem should be rectified and the procedure restarted since you will need a complete final set of data and any optical power changes on one channel can affect the powers on other channels. Use the following procedure: FOR BLSR SUBNETWORKS WITH WCA CIRCUITS
u u
Complete items #1-7 under normal working conditions for one node Execute a manual equipment switch to backup on each node in the ring by highlighting the node you want to execute the switch on and then choosing Switching->Equipment Switch-> Manual switch to backup. Begin the next step after every node is switched to backup. Complete items #1-7 for equipment switch circumstances Release equipment switches on all nodes Repeat items #1-7 for ring switches on each span in the ring individually. For example, highlight 'node 1' and execute a forced switch on the East side (this is referred to as 'ring switch span 1' in the verification results documentation). This is found in Switching->Ring Protection Switch. After completing the items #1-7 for a ring switch away from that span, release the 'request on working' on the East side of the node on which the switch was applied. Repeat this process for each span in the network working clockwise around the ring.
u u u
Note:
u
When you execute a ring switch on one side of a span, the node on the other side of the span executes its ring switch automatically.
Repeat this entire sequence for each of the nodes in the network working clockwise around the ring.
7 - 27
FOR A UPSR, PT-PT, LADM, OR BLSR WITH ONLY UCA CIRCUITS:
u
Complete items #1-7 under normal conditions for 'node 1' (i.e. the node with the smallest node ID, usually ends in '1'). Repeat items #1-7 for each of the other nodes in the network working clockwise around the ring.
Important Notes
u
Preamp/Pre VGA monitor ports show the wavelengths which are entering that particular side of the node from a neighboring node Postamp/Post VGA monitor ports show the wavelengths which are exiting the node where the measurement is taking place When choosing the monitoring location for OSA measurements, choose the same location at every node and use the following guideline: If preamps/pre VGAs are available on both sides of every node use the preamp monitor ports for all verification and data collection. However, you can still use the postamp monitor ports to verify that the node in front of you is functioning correctly before leaving that site (it saves a lot of traveling time). If preamps/pre VGAs are not available at every node, for each side of each node which does not contain a preamp or pre-VGA, use the postamp, line card, OLM or OSM Line Rx fibers (also accessible as the Line Rx (In) connections in patch trays) on each side without preamp/ pre-VGA ports of each node for verification and data collection. To accomplish this verification on a BLSR one must use lockouts on all spans (or for verifying a switched condition, a forced switch accompanied by lockouts on the working side of all other spans) to ensure that measurements are taken with all expected wavelengths are present under that particular condition. A 16dB pad must be used for attenuating the signal going to the Optical Spectrum Analyzer (OSA). Postamp/post VGA monitor ports and line card, OLM, OSM Line Tx fibers (also accessible as Line Tx (Out) connections in the patch tray) are the most useful for troubleshooting since most problems identified at these ports are problems originating at the node you are currently working on; however, these values are not to be used for comparison with the ONLINE Metro Designer Tool values nor for data collection. Problems found for channels that pass through that node could also be due to fiber problems at other nodes.
Note:
None of the nodes in a subnetwork should be provisioned as 'Ampless ' without confirming with the SE that this was the design intent. Ampless is a property of the entire network and all nodes must be provisioned as such. Ampless configurations do not use any type of power management and all VOAs are 'open' with an attenuation of 0dBm. For networks provisioned as Ampless, ONLINE Metro CIT expected values will not be available and ONLINE Metro Designer Tool buildout report and output files must be used for all verification. The absence of amplifiers in a network does not guarantee an Ampless configuration.
1. Verify that all VOAs in the entire network are in the expected state ('in range' and 'closed' under most circumstances, exceptions listed below). This information is found by highlighting 'subnetwork' and choosing Diagnostics->VOA Measurements. 2. All VOAs should be 'closed' except for:
u
VOAs for which the channel count is 0. Installation, Turn-up, and Test Manual September 30, 2003 - Revision A 009-2003-294
7 - 28

u
Postamp, Line card and CWDM VOAs for which the Expected TX Total Power is +4dBm or greater. The Expected Tx Total Power is found in the VOA Measurements diagnostic for 4.x and above software versions. For 3.2.x software, the Expected TX Channel Power must be converted to total power for verification using the conversions in Appendix D. If an LOS exists in the network, all VOAs through which that wavelength passes will be 'open' (go to step #14 above, clear the alarm, and verify that the VOAs are now 'closed').
VOAs should always be 'in range'. For VOA's which are 'out of range', check to see whether the current attenuation value is 0 dB or 20 dB. If the attenuation is 0dB, there is probably either dirty or crossed fiber causing too little light to reach the VOA or the span loss values are too high. If the attenuation is 20dB, there is probably either another VOA that is not 'in range', too little span loss, or a configuration error/corrupt database at one or more nodes. If the expected attenuation is negative, contact Product Support. Also verify that the channel count is correct under each circumstance. If not, there is a configuration error or a corrupt database (see database removal in appendix). For CWDMs used in p-side regenerators, the CWDM VOA channel count may show '3' in the ONLINE Metro CIT when these regens are not in use. Disregard this value since it is the value given when the regenerators are not in use. When an appropriate ring switch is executed, these cards become active and display a relevant value. Verify that the current attenuation is within 2dB of the expected attenuation for all VOAs in which the VOA Channel Count is >0. If not, this will later cause problems when verifying the WCI line Rx values. This can be completed by verifying that the 'delta' column is between -2 to +2 dB. 3. Verify that the expected wavelengths are present using an OSA. This should be done for each direction (W/E) of each node. Remember that for a BLSR, wavelengths only change directions at the nodes bordering the span with a 'line cut'. The same wavelengths will be seen entering and/or exiting the node on both sides for BSLR WCA circuits (this is also seen for UCA circuits in which the same band/channel is used on both sides of the node). 4. Verify that the difference between the lowest and highest channel power at the postamp monitor port, preamp monitor port or the line Rx (if only line cards are present) are less than 3dB using an OSA. This should be done for each direction (W/E) of each node. For high channel counts (4 or more bands) the allowable difference between the channels can be up to 5 dB. 5. Using an OSA, verify that the OSNR for every channel is >20dB (>26dB for OC-192) and within 2dB of the expected OSNR value given in the ONLINE Metro Designer Tool BOL (beginning of life) .csv output files. Since the 20dB and 26dB OSNR restrictions refer to the required OSNR at the WCI Line Rx port, the OSNRs predicted by the ONLINE Metro Designer Tool will usually be much higher than these values. The more distance and amplifiers that exist between the transmit and receive nodes, the worse the OSNR will be at the WCI Rx port. This step should be completed for each direction (W/E) of each node. Once the spectrums are level and the OSNRs meet the expected values, record all OSNR data at the Rx end of each fiber (i.e. light coming into the node from each direction after traversing OSP fiber). The OSNR values reported must be taken from postamp, linecard, OLM, or OSM Line Rx ports, or if available from preamp/pre VGA monitor ports. 6. Verify that all AMP/Line cards are in the expected state. To find this information highlight 'subnetwork' and choose Diagnostics->Amp/Line Measurements. The EDFA Status should be 'Okay' if the 'Channel Count' is greater than 0. Verify that all measured Node/Line Tx/Rx Total Powers are within 2dB of the ONLINE Metro CIT expected values. For the 3.2 software stream, the expected value is given in the ONLINE Metro CIT diagnostics is on a 'per channel' basis; use Appendix D to determine the 'Expected Total Power' for each port. For software versions 4.0 and above, Expected and Measured Total powers exist in the diagnostic (no calculation necessary). For all post amplifiers (not post VGAs), compare the expected and measured node Rx levels and pad the measured value to equal to or less than, but still within 1db of, the expected value. These can be obtained for the node by highlighting the node and choosing Diagnostic-> Amp/Line Measurements. For example, if the expected node Rx total power is -6.5dBm and the measured node Rx total power is -5.9dBm, use a 1dB Installation, Turn-Up and Test Manual September 30, 2003 - Revision A 009-2003-294
7 - 29
pad to bring the measured value to -6.9dBm (ideally, the new connections required for the padding will usually increase the actual amount of attenuation introduced). This procedure should only be completed after all other aspects of the network have been optimized (steps #1-18). If the padding required exceeds 2dB, please contact Special Operations or Product Support. If Excessive Power or Laser Bias Current Failure alarms are being reported by the circuit pack, these alarms will be cleared as a result. Any padding added for this purpose must be added to the 'as-built' Visio, patch tray layouts and the Production Network Deficiency list. 7. Verify that the WCI Line Rx power for each transponder is between -6 and -28dBm and within 3dB of the ONLINE Metro CIT expected value (based upon the provisioning information). Also, verify that the ONLINE Metro CIT predicted value is within the range given in the ONLINE Metro Designer Tool buildout report (if not the provisioning may be incorrect). To find the measured values and the ONLINE Metro CIT expected value, highlight 'subnetwork' and go to Diagnostic>WCI Measurements. The expected Line Rx power without padding is given in one column and the measured Line Rx value is in another column. Subtract the value for the pad actually used from the expected value to get the 'true' expected Line Rx optical power (i.e. expected value w/o pad - pad value = expected value). This negative of value is already calculated in the 'Delta' column. The measured Line Rx value should be within 3 dB of this calculated value. Otherwise there is too much or too little attenuation somewhere in the network or the provisioning information is in correct. Hint: The last column gives the 'delta' (difference) between the measured Rx and expected Rx w/o a pad. This value (if negative) should be within 3 dB of the pad value that is currently installed otherwise there is a problem. If the value is positive, the measured power is greater than expected without any padding. In this case, use the equation above to determine if the restrictions is met. Verify that the WCI receive powers are also within the range specified by the ONLINE Metro Designer Tool design buildout report. Unlike the values above, these values are the designed values and are not based upon the provisioning information (i.e. faulty provisioning could still pass the above check). 8. Immediately after the network meets the optical verification specifications above, send the latest All Power Measurements (including files for all switched conditions for BLSRs, see result template documentation for file naming), as-built Visio and .met files to list.special_Ops@ciena.com for audit
LABELING STANDARDS
In the event the customer does not have any specific labeling requirements, use the following section as recommendation for labeling connections on the ONLINE Metro Platform system.
Note:
In 'BxCy' and 'TRz' below, 'x' and 'y' are the band number and channel number and 'z' is the tributary port number for SONET and Data multiplexor modules. Also, x and x' represent complimentary bands.
7 - 30
ONLINE Metro Platform CUSTOMER INTERFACES

Line Fibers
u u u u
West Line Out (Tx) West Line In (Rx) East Line Out (Tx) East Line In (Rx)
Tributary Fibers
BLSR-PROTECTED (WCA), BLSR UNPROTECTED (UCA), UPSR UNPROTECTED CIRCUITS:
u u u u
West BxCy Trib Out (Tx)For example: West B2C3 Trib Out (Tx) West BxCy Trib In (Rx) East BxCy Trib Out (Tx) East BxCy Trib In (Rx)
SONET/DATA MUX UNPROTECTED CIRCUITS SONET

u u u u
West BxCy STMX TRz Out (Tx)For example: West B4C2 STMX TR3 Out (Tx) West BxCy STMX TRz In (Rx) East BxCy STMX TRz Out (Tx) East BxCy STMX TRz In (Rx)
DATA
u u u u
West BxCy GRDM TRz Out (Tx)For example: West B4C2 GRDM TR3 Out (Tx) West BxCy GRDM TRz In (Rx) East BxCy GRDM TRz Out (Tx) East BxCy GRDM TRz In (Rx)
UPSR PROTECTED CIRCUITS WITHOUT SONET/DATA MUX (FROM WPSU SPLITTER CPE PORT):
u u
West BxCy/ East Bx'Cy WPSU CPE Out (Tx) West BxCy/ East Bx'Cy WPSU CPE In (Rx) Example: West B9C1/ East B3C1 WPSU CPE Out (Tx)
Note:
UPSR PROTECTED CIRCUIT VIA SONET/DATA MUX PROTECTED CROSS CONNECTION SONET
u u
West BxCy STMX TRz/ East Bx'Cy STMX TRz WPSU CPE Out (Tx) West BxCy STMX TRz/East Bx'Cy STMX TRz WPSU CPE In (Rx)
7 - 31
DATA
u u
West BxCy GRDM TRz/ East Bx'Cy GRDM TRz WPSU CPE Out (Tx) West BxCy GRDM TRz/East Bx'Cy GRDM TRz WPSU CPE In (Rx) Example: West B7C1 STMX TR4/ East B1C1 STMX TR4 WPSU CPE Out (Tx)
Note:
Attenuator Interfaces
Note: WCI (TERMINATING AND REGEN)
Attenuator values must be visible.
BLSR UNPROTECTED CIRCUITS (UCA), UPSR PROTECTED CIRCUITS, UPSR UNPROTECTED CIRCUITS, BLSR PREEEMPTIBLE CIRCUITS (PCA)
u u u u
West BxCy WCI Line Out (Tx)For example: West B2C3 WCI Line In (Rx) West BxCy WCI Line In (Rx) East BxCy WCI Line Out (Tx) East BxCy WCI Line In (Rx)
BLSR PROTECTED CIRCUITS (WCA), WORKING SIDE REGENERATORS (WCA)

u u u u u u u u
West Bx Primary BWDM Bx Tx to West Bx CWDM Bx-1 Rx West Bx Primary BWDM Bx Rx to West Bx CWDM Bx-1 Tx East Bx Primary BWDM Bx Tx to East Bx CWDM Bx-1 Rx East Bx Primary BWDM Bx Rx to East Bx CWDM Bx-1 Tx West Bx Backup BWDM Bx Tx to West Bx CWDM Bx-2 Rx West Bx Backup BWDM Bx Rx to West Bx CWDM Bx-2 Tx East Bx Backup BWDM Bx Tx to East Bx CWDM Bx-2 Rx East Bx Backup BWDM Bx Rx to East Bx CWDM Bx-2 Tx
BLSR UNPROTECTED CIRCUITS REGENERATOR, UPSR PROTECTED CIRCUIT REGENERATOR, UPSR UNPROTECTED CIRCUIT REGENERATOR, BLSR PROTECTION SIDE REGENERATOR
u u u u
West BxCy WCI Line Rx to East Bx' CWDM Bx'-1 Tx West BxCy WCI Line Tx to West Bx CWDM Bx-1 Rx East BxCy WCI Line Rx to West Bx' CWDM Bx'-1 Tx East BxCy WCI Line Tx to East Bx CWDM Bx-1 Rx
OTHER POTENTIALLY PADDED CONNECTIONS
7 - 32

OSC PADDING
u u u u
West OSC Tx West OSC Rx East OSC Tx East OSC Rx
Band Pass-through
u u
West Bx BWDM Bx Tx to East Bx' BWDM Bx' Rx West Bx BWDM Bx Rx to East Bx' BWDM Bx' Tx
Example: West B7 BWDM B7 Tx to East B1 BWDM B1 Rx
Channel Pass-through
u u
West Bx CWDM BxCy Tx to East Bx' CWDM Bx'Cy Rx West Bx CWDM BxCy Rx to East Bx' CWDM Bx'Cy Tx Example: West B7 CWDM B7C1 Tx to East B1 CWDM B1C1 Rx
Note:
All Other Connections

Use the following guideline:
u
'Direction' 'Card' 'Bulkhead' 'Port' to 'Direction' 'Card' 'Bulkhead' 'Port' Direction - West, East Card - Bx BWDM, Bx CWDM, BxCy WCI, STMX, GRDM, Line card, PostAmp, PreAmp, WPS, WPSU, RSM Bulkhead - Bx, BxCy, Bx-1, Bx-2, TRz, LINE, TRIB, NODE, WCA, PCA, WLN, PLN, PWCA, COM, PASS Port - Tx, Rx
The possibilities for each entry are:

u u
7 - 33
THIN MUX (STMX), DATA MUX (GRDM), AND ADM CP PROVISIONING AND TESTING
STMX
To add a thin mux to one or both ends of a circuit, the following steps are performed. STEP 1: STEP 2: STEP 3: STEP 4: STEP 5: STEP 6: STEP 7: STEP 8: Lock and delete the circuit onto which the thin mux will be added Remove the tributary interface fibers from both ends of the circuit Slot the thin mux card and run MU-MU fibers from the OC-48 port to the trib port of the WCI card. Run tributary interface fibers from each trib port on the thin mux to the patch tray (and as always, label the bulkhead connections). Provision the thin mux card. The card will need to be provisioned as LTE and SONET (at least for the purposes of testing). Provision the OC-48 circuit that was deleted before (as always, 'A' node to 'Z' node clockwise around the ring for the working path). This time circuit has 'Bulk Rate' attached to the beginning of the name. To provision the thin mux ports and cross connects use the procedure in the ONLINE Metro CIT Users Manual. The thin-mux will require BER testing beyond the testing completed for the circuit to which it will be attached. It is recommended that the ports are tested at both the highest possible bit rate for each port and also at the bit rate the customer intends to use for each port (if different). Recommended and required BER testing times for each port are 24 and 6 hrs. respectively. The timing for these cards needs to be set in a manner to provide both cards with a single clock source. The timing source is chosen by highlighting the card and choosing 'Clock Synchronization'. If thin mux cards exist on both ends of the circuit, set one card to obtain timing from a tributary port where a test set will be connected and set the card on the other end of the circuit to obtain timing from the line. If more than one test set is used in testing multiple circuits on one thin mux card, one test set should be set to internal clock (the test set which connects to the port which the card will use for timing). All other test sets should be set to obtain timing from 'line' or 'external' (this will remove the pointer adjustments that were necessary to keep the signal framing synchronized. The timing will need to be set up according to the customer's needs after BER testing is complete. If the customer plans to provide SDH signals rather than SONET to the card, the thin mux cards will need to be locked and deleted. The thin mux cards and cross connects must then be reprovisioned using the SDH option.
STEP 9:
STEP 10:
GRDM/GRDMII
STEP 1: STEP 2: STEP 3: STEP 4: STEP 5: Lock and delete the circuit onto which the GRDM is being added. Follow steps from Provisioning a WCI10G-LAN Card on page 6-44 to add a GRDM Select Fiber Channel or Gigabit Ethernet for the data protocol. A GRDM can provide 2 subrate Fiber Channel circuits, or 2 subrate GbE circuits, but not a mixture of the two. Choose SONET or SDH for the line transmission protocol. Consult SE or customer for which is preferred. Provision the OC-48 circuit that was deleted before (as always, 'A' node to 'Z' node clockwise around the ring for the working path). This time circuit has 'Bulk Rate' attached to the beginning of the name. Set up test as appropriate with given test sets. Please note, the GRDM trib ports have multimode receivers and a single mode transmitter. This means either single mode or multi mode fiber can be used for the connections. If using a test set with a multi-mode Tx, a multi-mode fiber should be used to connect to the tributary ports.
7 - 34

ADM/ADMII
STEP 1: STEP 2:
Lock and delete the circuits onto which the SONET ADM ring will be added. Before you can provision an ADM card, you must first provision an ONWAVE Node. See (Configure ADM/SMX ONWAVE Node)Provision the ADM cards and assign them to the appropriate ONWAVE Node. Please note, ADM cards are slot specific, please reference System Planning Manual slot assignment guidelines. Provision the ports. When provisioning ports, you are given the option of auto provision. This feature will select the appropriate trib timeslot automatically, and will provision the port as OC3 or OC-12 as specified by the user. Do not use this feature unless specified by the SE and customer. Ask the SE for the customer's desired service rates if you are unsure. You can also consult the service listing and the ONLINE Metro Designer Tool file to get service rates. If no rates are specified, for testing purposes, select the fastest rate that uses up all ports, for example, 8 port ADM, choose OC-3. Reference ONLINE Metro Multiservice Dense Wave Division Multiplexing (DWDM) Transport Platform Engineering and Planning Manual ADM CP Overlay ADM Provisioning Requirements, for more details. Same comments on SDH or SONET: a. A single ADM can provide both SDH and SONET subrate services to the customer simultaneously. In addition, the ADM 2.5G line can be either SONET or SDH. b. When provisioning the ADM node in step 1, you are asked to specify SONET or SDH. This is only provisioning the 2.5G lines of the ADM node. c. When provisioning ports, you can only choose OC3/12, there is no option for STM1/4. The same is true when provisioning subrate circuits from the EMS. This does not mean the port or circuit is SONET. See Next.
STEP 3:
STEP 4:
d. To make a given port SDH or SONET, In the ADM facilities tree, select the appropriate tr-x p-x- facility for the port you want to configure, Right Click Modify Mode. Select SDH or SONET. STEP 5: Cross connect the ADM cards to the appropriate WCI or ADM circuit packs. With the ONLINE Metro CIT, under ONWAVE Nodes, select the ADM Node you are currently provisioning. Right Click Configure ONWAVE Node. This brings up a graphic of the ADM cards you have provisioned at that ONWAVE Node. By clicking the - underneath the outlined boxes shown to the right and left of the ADM cards, you will be shown a list of possible WCI and ADM circuit packs to which the ADM can be connected. Select the appropriate card as dictated by the Visio diagram. Provision the OC-48 circuits that were deleted in step 1. This time circuit has 'Bulk Rate' attached to the beginning of the name. Set up the cross connects. Please note, if the customer uses EMS and would like to view the cross connects as end to end subrate circuits, provisioning must currently be done from the EMS. If the customer does not use EMS, please refer to the Configuration Management Configuration Commands Port Provisioning ADM Cross Connect View, for instructions.
STEP 6: STEP 7:
7 - 35
7 - 36
TROUBLESHOOTING
APPENDIX A TROUBLESHOOTING
This appendix provides troubleshooting information for the installation and turn-up of the ONLINE Metro Multiservice Dense Wave Division Multiplexing (DWDM) Transport Platform. The appendix contains the following sections:
u u u u u u u u u
Troubleshooting Span Loss on page A-1 Troubleshooting CP Boot-up on page A-2 Troubleshooting CP Provisioning on page A-3 Troubleshooting Expansion Shelf Initialization on page A-3 Troubleshooting Ethernet Connections Between Shelves on page A-6 Troubleshooting Power Conversions on page A-8 Troubleshooting Database Removal on page A-9 Troubleshooting Optical Interfaces on page A-10 Troubleshooting Cooling Equipment on page A-25
TROUBLESHOOTING SPAN LOSS

Prior to deploying the network, all spans (fibers) in the network need to undergo an OTDR shot to determine the quality of the link. The results from the OTDR shot will allow the network to be modeled on proper span loss.
Note:
If a span loss greater than 3 dB is measured, it will be necessary to verify the span loss values used in designing the network. Contact the customer or CIENA Global Services and Support (GSS) to verify the span loss values that were entered into the ONLINE Metro Designer Software Tool during the network planning stage. (It is possible that the span loss entered into ONLINE Metro Designer Software Tool was estimated as opposed to measured). If the correct measured span loss value was entered into the ONLINE Metro Designer Software Tool at the network planning stage, the customer should check the installed fiber for impairments. Examples of impairments that could cause reflection and excess loss include but are not limited to the following: dirty connectors, attenuators, bulkheads, splice points and patch panels. If the measured span loss value was not entered into the ONLINE Metro Designer Software Tool at the network planning stage, then span loss measurements need to be completed for all spans. Once the span loss has been measured, a CIENA GSS engineer will rerun the ONLINE Metro Designer Software Tool with the new span loss values to determine if changes to the hardware and/or software configuration are needed. For example, different power attenuating devices (PADs) or updated provisioned PAD values may be necessary.
A-1
TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING CP BOOT-UP
The following guidelines tell you what to do if a CP does not boot, as indicated by the absence of blinking green or solid green LEDs. STEP 1: STEP 2: STEP 3: STEP 4: STEP 5: STEP 6: Check that the power is supplied to the shelf. For the main shelf, if all CPs are red, contact CIENA Global Service and Support to confirm that the node ID has been correctly configured in the EEPROM. If the PEM/PSM is red, replace it. If the PEM is blinking green, contact CIENA Corporation Global Service and Support to investigate possible software error. If the PEM is solid green and all other cards are red, then it is possible that the OSC card is not providing a path from the PEM to all other cards. If so, replace the OSC card. In an expansion shelf, if all CPs are red (including the COM CP) then the shelf EEPROM probably has not been set, or is set to 0. It is also possible the Ethernet cables are not connected from the shelf above. If the condition persists after the Ethernet cables have been verified, then refer to the Trouble Shooting Expansion Shelf Initialization section in this document on page 3. In an expansion shelf, if all CPs except the COM CPs are red, confirm that the expansion shelf has been provisioned by using the ONLINE Metro CLI or CIT. Otherwise, recheck the Ethernet connections from the main shelf to the expansion shelf. If there are no problems with these connections, then replace the COM CPs.
STEP 7:
If Problems Persist
STEP 1: STEP 2: STEP 3: Remove the CP which is not booting properly. Visually inspect the back-plane connection of the CPs slot for bent pins. If pins are bent, call CIENA Corporation Global Service and Support. For WCI, CWDM, or BWDM CPs, install the CP in a different slot. If the CP boots in the new slot, then a problem may exist with the backplane of the original slot. In this case, contact CIENA Corporation Global Service and Support.
If you cannot correct the problem after following the troubleshooting guides above, contact CIENA Worldwide Customer Services and Support.
A-2
ONLINE Metro Platform TROUBLESHOOTING CP PROVISIONING
TROUBLESHOOTING
Use the guidelines in this section if a CP cannot be provisioned, such as when no solid green LED appears and only blinking green LEDs are observed. Look for a Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch alarm, which indicates that the CP installed in the shelf does not match the provisioning information. If multiple CPs display blinking green LEDs there may be a problem with the PEM CP or the communication medium between the PEM and the Transport Complex (TC) cards. For example:
u
If an expansion shelf has been installed and all CPs in the expansion shelf display blinking green LEDs, it is possible that the PEM is not communicating with the expansion shelf. In this case, check the Ethernet cable connection from the OSC card in the main shelf to the COM CP in the expansion shelf. If all CPs on the main shelf display blinking green LEDs, with the exception of the PEM CP, remove the PEM CP and check for a bent pin on the backplane. Replace the PEM CP if all pins appear to be undamaged.
If the problem persists, call CIENA Worldwide Customer Services and Support.
TROUBLESHOOTING EXPANSION SHELF INITIALIZATION

The shelf number assignment procedure is part of the NE turn-up. For communication between the expansion shelves and the main shelf, individual shelf numbers must first be assigned to all expansion shelves in the NE. The main shelf is automatically assigned as the number 1 shelf during the turn-up. The shelf numbers for the expansion shelves must be assigned directly to the expansion shelves, to complete the NE turn-up. Each expansion shelf must be assigned a unique shelf number to communicate with the main shelf of its NE. The shelf requires two identifiers: Shelf Number and Shelf ID. The Shelf Number is assigned by the craft computer through one of the COM circuit packs of the expansion shelf with the Shelf Number Utility. The Shelf Number is also stored on an EEPROM on the Power LED Card of the expansion shelf. The shelf ID for the expansion shelf is assigned at the factory and is also stored on the EEPROM. Connecting a Craft Computer to Shelf Perform the following procedure to connect the Craft computer to the expansion shelf: STEP 1: Determine the number of Ethernet cards in the Craft computer and identify the Ethernet card being used for the shelf number assignment procedure. If using a cross over Ethernet cable (CROSSED) to set the shelf ID, connect to the Up port. Note: If using a straight-through Ethernet cable (STRAIGHT), connect to the Down port. STEP 2: STEP 3: Connect the cross over or straight-through Ethernet cable to the appropriate port of the identified Ethernet card in the craft computer. If using a cross over Ethernet cable, connect the other end of the cable to the "Up" port of the selected COM CP. on either east or west If using a straight-through Ethernet cable, connect the other end of the cable to the "Down" port of the selected COM CP.
A-3
TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP 4: STEP 5:
Remove all other Ethernet cables connected to the expansion shelf being assigned the shelf number. Power down the expansion shelf to ensure a clean boot for the assignment procedure. Power down the shelf by removing both the A and B power feed fuses in the fuse panel or switching the breakers to OFF on the circuit breaker panel. Power up the shelf by re-installing both A and B power feed fuses in the fuse panel or switching the breakers to ON on the circuit breaker panel. Wait 1 minute for the COM CPs to reboot.
SETTING SHELF NUMBER PROCEDURE

Perform the following procedure to assign the shelf number to the expansion shelf: STEP 1: STEP 2: STEP 3: Verify that the Power LED card is installed. Verify that the expansion shelf COM CPs are powered up. The COM LED is flashing green. From the Windows desktop, select StartProgramsCIENA LightWorksONLINE Metro CIT 6.1Set Shelf Number. The Set Shelf Number window appears, as shown in Figure A-1. If the Set Shelf Number window does not appear after 5 minutes, the utility has timed out. Verify that you are connected to the correct Ethernet card on the Craft computer and check the cable connection.
Figure A-1. Set Shelf Number Window STEP 4: STEP 5: STEP 6: Refer to the site plan and obtain the assigned number for the shelf. The allowed expansion shelf numbers are 2-15. Type the assigned shelf number and press Enter. Enter the shelf type. Enter 1 for a 19V shelf, or 2 for a 23-inch shelf, or 3 for a 23V shelf. The Ethernet Adapter IP address is prompted as shown in Figure A-2
A-4
TROUBLESHOOTING
Figure A-2. Set Shelf Number (2nd) Window STEP 7: Select the Ethernet Adapter IP address of the PC running the Set Shelf Utility Press Enter. The Confirmation window appears, as shown in Figure A-3.
Figure A-3. Set Shelf Number Confirmation Window STEP 8: STEP 9: Select Y. The Assigned Shelf Number window appears confirming the assignment of the shelf number. To initiate the shelf number, the shelf must be powered down and rebooted. Perform the following steps to initiate the shelf: STEP 10: Power down the shelf by removing both the A and B power feed fuses in the fuse panel or switching the breakers to OFF on the circuit breaker panel. Power up the shelf by re-installing both A and B power feed fuses in the fuse panel or switching the breakers to ON on the circuit breaker panel. Wait 1 minute for the COM CPs to reboot.
Disconnect the Craft computer Ethernet cable from the COM CP port.
A-5
TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP 11: STEP 12: Connect the shelf Ethernet cable to the COM CP port. Repeat steps 1-11 for each expansion shelf.
TROUBLESHOOTING ETHERNET CONNECTIONS BETWEEN SHELVES

When the NE configuration includes expansion shelves, the expansion shelves are connected to the main shelf by Ethernet cables. Refer to the site plan to determine the number of expansion shelves in the NE configuration. For an NE configuration with a single expansion shelf, the expansion shelf connects to the main shelf with two Ethernet cables (Figure A-4). An Ethernet cable is connected from the UP RJ-45 Ethernet port of each COM CP in the expansion shelf to the Down RJ-45 Ethernet port of the associated OSC CP in the main shelf (east to east and west to west). The supported COM CPs can be MCOMH, COMH, OSCE, or OSCH depending on the network configuration.
Down
Down
Up
Up
Figure A-4. Ethernet Cable Connections For One Expansion Shelf When multiple expansion shelves are present, the cable connections are shown as in Figure A-5 for two expansion shelves, Figure A-6 for three expansion shelves, and Figure A-7 for four expansion shelves. Cables between expansion shelves go from RJ-45 Ethernet port of COM CP to RJ-45 Ethernet port of COM CP (east to east and west to west). Each expansion shelf must be assigned a shelf number at the expansion shelf itself before it can communicate with the main shelf. The main shelf is automatically assigned 1 during turn-up. Figure A-5. Ethernet Cable Connections For Two Expansion Shelves
Main shelf
Down Down Up Down Up
Expansion shelf
Up Down Up
Expansion shelf
A-6
TROUBLESHOOTING
Figure A-6. Ethernet Cable Connections For Three Expansion Shelves
Main shelf
Expansion shelf
Expansion shelf Expansion shelf
Main shelf
Expansion shelf
Expansion shelf Expansion shelf Expansion shelf

Figure A-7. Ethernet Cable Connections For Four Expansion Shelves
A-7
TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING POWER CONVERSIONS
Most of the expected powers at specific ports in cards can be found in the ONLINE Metro CIT and are given in dBm/channel. To find the total expected power for all channels arriving at that port just identify how many channels are expected at that port and add the corresponding factor to the Expected per Channel (dBm/ch). For example, from the ONLINE Metro CIT Line/Amp Measurements, we find the Expected Node Rx Channel Power is 16.25 dBm/ch. In the same screen we see that the Expected # of channels is 5. Using the table below we see that the corresponding factor which we need to add to find the total expected power based upon the power per channel is +7.0 dB. Thus, we would expect the Current Node Rx Total Power to be:
u
-16.25 + 7.0 = -9.25 dBm
If the ONLINE Metro CIT measured power is 2 dB or more away from this value, action must be taken to correct the situation.
Note:
For software versions 4.0.x and above, expected and measured total powers are explicitly given in the Amp/Line measurements and these conversions are not necessary for comparison.
# of Channels 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Add to Expected per Channel (dB) +0 +3.0 +4.8 +6.0 +7.0 +7.8 +8.5 +9.0 +9.5 +10.0 +10.4 +10.8 +11.1 +11.5 +11.8 +12.0 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
# of Channels
Add to Expected per Channel (dB) +15.3 +15.4 +15.6 +15.7 +15.8 +15.9 +16.0 +16.1 +16.2 +16.3 +16.4 +16.5 +16.6 +16.7 +16.8 +16.9
A-8

# of Channels 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 Add to Expected per Channel (dB) +12.3 +12.6 +12.8 +13.0 +13.2 +13.4 +13.6 +13.8 +14.0 +14.1 +14.3 +14.5 +14.6 +14.8 +14.9 +15.1 +15.2 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 # of Channels
TROUBLESHOOTING
Add to Expected per Channel (dB) +17.0 +17.1 +17.2 +17.2 +17.3 +17.4 +17.5 +17.6 +17.6 +17.7 +17.8 +17.9 +17.9 +18.0 +18.1 +18.1 +18.2
TROUBLESHOOTING DATABASE REMOVAL

The procedure for removing a database is as follows: STEP 1: STEP 2: STEP 3: Backup the database for the node to your computer. This is done by highlighting the node and going to File->Backup Database. Record the node IP, LAN IP, subnetwork map, optical configuration and NTP server information. These will be needed for reprovision the node. Telnet to the pem at the craft port using telnet 10.1.4.1 7654
For Networks Running 3.2.2 Software

The user types the following:
u u u u u
killapps (enter) Stops the running applications on the PEM killapps psm (enter) Stops the running applications on the PSM rmdb psm (enter) Removes the database from the PSM rmdb (enter) Removes the database from the PEM reboot both (enter) Reboots both the PEM and PSM
A-9
TROUBLESHOOTING
For Networks Running Software Loads 3.2.3 and Above

The user types:
u
rmdb both (enter) Stops the running applications on the PEM Stops the running applications on the PSM Removes the database from the PSM Removes the database from the PEM
reboot both (enter) Reboots both the PEM and PSM
When you log back in with the ONLINE Metro CIT, the Setup Wizard will help you start the provisioning process. If you need more information about the previous configuration you can always restore the database you saved earlier and start the process again.
TROUBLESHOOTING OPTICAL INTERFACES

For any circuit that uses the WPSU splitters (UPSR protected circuits), the tributary input range into the splitter is 3dB higher than for the transponders to which the splitter is connected (i.e. the splitter introduces a 3dB loss).
Note:
10 GbE LAN
Table A-1. 3R 10GbE LAN -FEC WCI Specifications Line Interface Fiber types Data rate Transmitter output power (dBm) Receiver overload and sensitivity (dBm) SMF 11.05 Gb/s -3 to 3.5 -7 to -20 (O-UPSR) -7 to -19 (O-BLSR) SMF 10.3125 Gb/s +3 to +7 -13 to 0 Trib Interface
Dispersion limit (ps/ Without DCM: +1410 nm) With DCM: +7000 Link distance (km) Without DCM: 89km @ B1C1 80km @ B11C3 With DCM 445km @ B1C1 399km @ B11C3
+200 >24
A - 10
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table A-1. 3R 10GbE LAN -FEC WCI Specifications Line Interface Transmitter wavelength (nm) Receiver wavelength (nm) ITU wavelength with 100 GHz spacing 1200 to 1600nm Trib Interface 1300 to 1320 1200 to 1600nm
ADM CPs
Table A-2. ADM Tributary Side ADM Tributary Port Receiver (Trib In) Incoming type fiber OC-12 Single-mode and multi-mode OC-3 Single-mode and multi-mode -8 dBm -8 dBm ADM Tributary Port Transmitter (Trib Out) Outgoing type fiber OC-12 Single-mode and multi-mode OC-3 Single-mode and multi-mode OC-3/12, SMF: 15 km or loss limited with 13 dB loss budget. (minimum of the two). OC-12, MMF: 1km OC-3, MMF: 4km -15 to -8 dBm OC-12 OC-3 OC-12 OC-3 1274 - 1356 nm 1261 - 1360 nm 622 Mb/s 155 Mb/s
Receiver OC-12 overload power OC-3
Link distance
Receiver sensitivity Receiver wavelength Data rate
OC-12 OC-3 OC-12 OC-3 OC-12 OC-3
-28 dBm -28 dBm 1200 - 1625 nm 1200 - 1625 nm 622 Mb/s 155 Mb/s
Transmitter output power Transmitter wavelength Data rate
Table A-3. ADM Line Side Incoming fiber type Receiver power Single-mode Outgoing fiber type Link distance1 2 km Single-mode overload -3 dBm
Receiver sensitivity -18 dBm Receiver wavelength Data rate 1200 - 1625 nm 2488 Mb/s
Transmitter output -10 to -3 dBm power Transmitter wavelength Data rate 1266 -1360 nm 2488 Mb/s
1.Assuming 18ps/nm/km dispersion and non-zero dispersion-shifted fiber (NDSF).
A - 11
TROUBLESHOOTING
ADM II
ADM II TRIB SIDE Table A-4. ADMII Tributary Side ADMII Tributary Port Receiver (Trib In) Incoming type fiber OC-12 Single-mode and multi-mode OC-3 Single-mode and multi-mode -8 dBm -8 dBm
ADMII Tributary Port Transmitter (Trib Out) Outgoing type fiber OC-12 Single-mode and multi-mode OC-3 Single-mode and multi-mode OC-3/12, SMF: 15 km or loss limited with 13 dB loss budget. (minimum of the two). OC-12, MMF: 1km OC-3, MMF: 4km -15 to -8 dBm OC-12 OC-3 OC-12 OC-3 1274 - 1356 nm 1261 - 1360 nm 622 Mb/s 155 Mb/s
Link distance
OC-12 OC-3 OC-12 OC-3 OC-12 OC-3
LINE SIDE ADM II SR OPTICAL SPECIFICATIONS Table A-5. Transmit OC-48 TX (Laser) Lambda min - max Spectral width Max TX power Min TX power Min Extinction 1266 - 1360 nm 4 nm -3 dBm -10 dBm 8.2 dB
Table A-6. Receive OC-48 RX (PIN Lambda min - max Max RX power Min RX power LOS assertion max LOS de-assertion range 1200 - 1625 nm -3 dBm (for 10e-10 BER) -18 dBm (for 10e-10 BER) -18.5 dBm -45/-19 dBm
A - 12

LINE SIDE AMD II IR-1 OPTICAL SPECIFICATIONS Table A-7. Transmit OC-48 TX (Laser Lambda min - max Spectral width Max TX power Min TX power Min Extinction ratio 1266 - 1360 nm NA 0 dBm -5 dBm 8.2 dB
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table A-8. Receive OC-48 RX (PIN Lambda min - max Max RX power Min RX power LOS assertion max LOS de-assertion range 1200 - 1625 nm 0 dBm (for 10e-10 BER) -18 dBm (for 10e-10 BER) -18 dBm -28/-18 dBm
LINE SIDE ADM II LR-2 OPTICAL SPECIFICATIONS Table A-9. Transmit OC-48 TX (Laser Lambda min - max Spectral width Max TX power Min TX power Min Extinction ratio 1500 - 1580nm NA +3 dBm -2 dBm 8.2 dB
Table A-10. Receive OC-48 RX (PIN Lambda min - max Max RX power Min RX power LOS assertion max LOS de-assertion range 1200 - 1625 nm -9 dBm (for 10e-10 BER) -28 dBm (for 10e-10 BER) -28 dBm -38/-28 dBm
A - 13
TROUBLESHOOTING
ESCON MUX (EX12)
EMX12
Table A-11. EMX12 TX Parameters ESCON TX Optical Wavelength RMS spectral width Maximum transmittal power Minimum transmittal power Rise time/fall time Optical output jitter Extinction ratio Tributary Side 1280 to 1380nm 175 nm (max) -15 dBm -20.5 dBm 1.7 ns (max) 0.8 ns (max) 8 dB (min) 8.2 dB (min) Line Side 1266 to 1360 nm 4 nm (max) -3 dBm -10 dBm
EMX12 RX PARAMETERS Table A-12. EMX12 RX Parameters ESCON RX Optical LOS de-assertion LOS assertion LOS hysteresis Receiver overload Receive sensitivity Tributary Side -44.5 dBm to -35.5 dBm -45 dBm to -36 dBm 0.5 dB (min) -14 dBm (min) - 29 dBm (max) (10
-15
Line Side -18.5 dBm (max) -19.0 dBm (max) 0.5 dB (min) -3 dBm BER) -18 dBm (10 -10BER)
GRDM CPs
Table A-13. GRDM CP Optical Tributary Specifications GRDM Tributary Port Receiver (Trib In) Incoming fiber type: Receiver overload power: 850 nm 1310 nm multi-mode 850 nm 1310 nm GRDM Tributary Port Transmitter (Trib Out) 850 nm 1310 nm multi-mode Multi-mode Single-mode and Multi-mode Outgoing fiber Single-mode and type: -3 dBm -3 dBm Link distance:
850 nm 500 m (Modal dispersion limited.) 1310 nm 10 km (Mode partition noise limited.) -11 to -3 dBm 850 nm 1310 nm 850 nm 1310 nm 770 - 860 nm 1270 - 1350 nm 1.25 Gb/s 1.25 Gb/s
Receiver sensitivity: Receiver wavelength: Data rate:
850 nm 1310 nm 850 nm 1310 nm 850 nm 1310 nm
-19 dBm -19 dBm 770 - 860 nm 1200 - 1625 nm 1.25 Gb/s 1.25 Gb/s
Transmitter output power: Transmitter wavelength: Data rate:
A - 14
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table A-14. Additional Trib TX/ RX Optical Characteristics for 850 nm TRIB TX Optical Characteristics Wavelength 770 to 860 nm RMS spectral width Max transmitter power Min transmitter power Extinction ration 0.85 nm (max) 0 dBm (max) - 9.5 dBm (min) TRIB RX Optical Characteristics LOS de- 17 dBm (max) assertion LOS assertion -17.5 dBm (min) LOS hysteresis Receive sensitivity (1012 BER) Max RX Power (10-12 BER) 0.5 dB (min) - 17 dBm (min)
9 dB (min)
- 3 dBm
Table A-15. GRDM CP Optical Line Specifications GRDM Line Port Receiver (Line In) Incoming fiber Single-mode type: Receiver 1310 nm -3 dBm overload power: Receiver 1310 nm -18 dBm sensitivity: Receiver 1310 nm 1200 - 1625 nm wavelength: Data rate: 1310 nm 2488 Mb/s GRDM Line Port Transmitter (Line Out) Outgoing fiber Single-mode type: 1310 nm 2 km Link distance1: Transmitter output power: Transmitter wavelength: Data rate: 1310 nm 1310 nm 1310 nm -10 to -3 dBm 1266 - 1360 nm 2488 Mb/s
1.Assuming 18ps/nm/km dispersion and non-zero dispersion-shifted fiber (NDSF).
GRDM II CPs
Table A-16. GRDM II CP Optical Line Specifications GRDM Line Port Receiver (Line In) Incoming fiber type: Receiver overload power: Receiver sensitivity: Receiver wavelength: Data rate: Single-mode - 9 db 850 nm 1310 nm 850 nm 1310 nm 850 nm 1310 nm -18 dBm -18 dBm 1200 - 1625 nm 1200 - 1625 nm 2488 Mb/s 2488 Mb/s GRDM Line Port Transmitter (Line Out) Outgoing fiber type: Link distance: Transmitter output power: Transmitter wavelength: Data rate: Single-mode 1550 nm 850 nm 1310 nm up to 80 km -10 to -3 dBm -10 to -3 dBm
1500 - 1560 nm 850 nm 1310 nm 2488 Mb/s 2488 Mb/s
A - 15
TROUBLESHOOTING
STMX CPs
Table A-17. STMX CP Optical Tributary Specifications STMX Tributary Port Receiver (Trib In) Incoming type fiber OC-12 Single-mode and multi-mode OC-3 Single-mode and multi-mode -8 dBm -8 dBm STMX Tributary Port Transmitter (Trib Out) Outgoing type fiber OC-12 Single-mode and multi-mode OC-3 Single-mode and multi-mode OC-3/12, SMF: 15 km or loss limited with 13 dB loss budget. (minimum of the two). OC-12, MMF: 1km OC-3, MMF: 4km -15 to -8 dBm OC-12 OC-3 OC-12 OC-3 1274 - 1356 nm 1261 - 1360 nm 622 Mb/s 155 Mb/s
Link distance
OC-12 OC-3 OC-12 OC-3 OC-12 OC-3
WCI CPs
Table A-18. WCI SR Tributary-side Optical Specifications Regional Rate-tunable and Metro Rate-tunable Regional Rate-tunable and Metro Rate-tunable SR Tributary Port Receiver (Trib In) SR Tributary Port Transmitter (Trib Out) Incoming fiber type: Receiver overload power: Single-mode and multimode -3 dBm Outgoing fiber type: Link distance: Single-mode and multimode1 SM 2 km at OC-48 4 km at GbE 8 km at OC-12 Loss limited at OC-3 with 7dB loss budget MM 100 m at OC-48 500 m at GbE 1000 m at OC-12 4000 m at OC-3 Receiver sensitivity: Receiver wavelength: Data rate: -18 dBm 1200 - 1625 nm 100 Mb/s to 2500 Mb/s Transmitter output power: Data rate: -10 to -3 dBm
Transmitter wavelength: 1266 - 1360 nm 100 Mb/s to 2500 Mb/s
A - 16
TROUBLESHOOTING
1. A mode-conditioning patch cord must be used on the WCI tributary output to support multimode fiber. This is not required on the WCI tributary input.
A - 17
TROUBLESHOOTING
Intermediate-Reach Trib
Table A-19. Regional And Metro Rate-tunable IR Tributary-side Optical Specifications Regional Rate-tunable and Metro Rate-tunable IR Tributary Port Receiver (Trib In) Incoming fiber type: Receiver overload power: Single-mode and multimode 0 dBm Regional Rate-tunable and Metro Rate-tunable IR Tributary Port Transmitter (Trib Out) Outgoing fiber type: Link distance: Single-mode and multimode1 SM Loss limited with 11 dB loss budget MM 100 m at OC-48 500 m at GbE 1000 m at OC-12 4000 m at OC-3 Receiver sensitivity: Receiver wavelength: Data rate: -18 dBm 1200 - 1625 nm 100 Mb/s to 2500 Mb/s Transmitter output power: Data rate: -5 to 0 dBm
Transmitter wavelength: 1266 - 1360 nm 100 Mb/s to 2500 Mb/s
Table A-20. Regional Rate-Tunable And Metro Rate-tunable CP Line-side Optical Specifications Regional Rate-tunable and Metro Ratetunable Line Port Receiver (Line In) Incoming fiber type: Receiver overload power1: Single-mode -6 dBm Regional Rate-tunable and Metro Rate-tunable Line Port Transmitter (Line Out) Outgoing fiber type: Link distance
2:
Single-mode 2.5G Regional: 480 km (When FEC is off.) 640 km (When FEC is on.) All-rate FEC: 160 km 2.5G Regional: -2 to +2 dBm All-rate FEC: 0 to +3 dBm
Receiver sensitivity3:
-28 dBm when FEC is off. -33 dBm when FEC is on. 1200 - 1625 nm
Transmitter output power:
Receiver wavelength:
Transmitter wavelength:
ITU 100-GHz Grid +/- 100 pm
A - 18
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table A-20. Regional Rate-Tunable And Metro Rate-tunable CP Line-side Optical Specifications (Continued) Regional Rate-tunable and Metro Ratetunable Line Port Receiver (Line In) Data rate: Same data rate as provisioned on the tributary port. Regional Rate-tunable and Metro Rate-tunable Line Port Transmitter (Line Out) Data rate: Same data rate as provisioned on the tributary port. 2.5G Regional: 8640 ps/nm (When FEC is off.) 11520 ps/nm (When FEC is on.) All-rate FEC: 3000 ps/nm
Dispersion limit:
1. At this receiver overload power a BER of 10e- 12 is guaranteed. The damage threshold is higher. 2. Assuming 18ps/nm/km dispersion and non-zero dispersion-shifted fiber (NDSF). 3. Receiver sensitivity values are based on back-to-back connections at high OSNR and BER at 10e- 12.
2R ESCON/ETR WCI CP Optical Specifications

Table A-21. 2R ESCON/ETR WCI CP Tributary-side Optical Specifications 2R ESCON/ETR Tributary Port Receiver (Trib In) Incoming fiber type: Receiver overload power: Receiver sensitivity: Receiver wavelength: Data rate: Multi-mode -14 dBm -29 dBm 1200 - 1625 nm 100 to 200 Mb/s and 16 Mb/s ETR 2R ESCON/ETR Tributary Port Transmitter (Trib Out) Outgoing fiber type: Link distance: Transmitter output power: Transmitter wavelength: Data rate: Multi-mode 2 km -20.5 to -15 dBm 1280 - 1380 nm 100 to 200 Mb/s and 16 Mb/s ETR
A - 19
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table A-22. 2R ESCON/ETR WCI CP Line-side Optical Specifications 2R ESCON/ETR Line Port Receiver (Line In) Incoming fiber type: Receiver overload power1: Receiver sensitivity3: Receiver wavelength: Data rate: Single-mode -6 dBm -28 dBm 1200 - 1625 nm 100 to 200 Mb/s and 16 Mb/s ETR 2R ESCON/ETR Line Port Transmitter (Line Out) Outgoing fiber type: Link distance : Transmitter output power: Transmitter wavelength: Data rate:
2
Single-mode 160 km 0 to +3 dBm ITU 100-GHz Grid +/- 100 pm Same data rate as provisioned on the tributary port. 2880 ps/nm
Dispersion limit:
1. At this receiver overload power a BER of 10e- 12 is guaranteed. The damage threshold is higher. 2. Assuming 18ps/nm/km dispersion and non dispersion-shifted fiber (NDSF). 3. Receiver sensitivity values are based on back-to-back connections at high OSNR and BER at 10e- 12.
A - 20

3R and 3R Enhanced WCI CP Optical Specifications.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table A-23. 3R and 3R Enhanced WCI CP Tributary-side Optical Specifications 3R and 3R Enhanced Tributary Port Receiver (Trib In) Incoming fiber type: Receiver overload power: Single-mode and multimode -3 dBm 3R and 3R Enhanced Tributary Port Transmitter (Trib Out) Outgoing fiber type: Link distance: Single-mode and multimode1 SM 2 at OC-48 4 at GbE 8 at OC-12 Loss limited at OC-3 with 7dB loss budget -10 to -3 dBm 1266 - 1360 nm OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, and GbE
-18 dBm 1200 - 1625 nm
Transmitter output power: Transmitter wavelength:
OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, and Data rate: GbE
Table A-24. 3R And 3R Enhanced WCI CP Line-side Optical Specifications 3R and 3R Enhanced Line Port Receiver (Line In) Incoming fiber type: Receiver overload power1: Receiver sensitivity3: Receiver wavelength: Data rate: Single-mode -6 dBm -28 dBm 1200 - 1625 nm Same data rate as provisioned on the tributary port. 3R and 3R Enhanced Line Port Transmitter (Line Out) Outgoing fiber type: Link distance
2:
Single-mode 3R: 80 km 3R Enhanced: 160 km 0 to +3 dBm ITU 100-GHz Grid +/- 100 pm Same data rate as provisioned on the tributary port. 3R: 1440 ps/nm 3R Enhanced: 3000 ps/nm
Dispersion limit:
A - 21
TROUBLESHOOTING
2R 850-nm WCI CP Optical Specifications
Table A-25. 2R 850-nm WCI CP Tributary-side Optical Specifications 2R 850-nm Tributary Port Receiver (Trib In) Incoming fiber type: Receiver overload power: Receiver sensitivity: Receiver wavelength: Data rate: Multi-mode -2 dBm -18 dBm 770 - 860 nm 2R 850-nm Tributary Port Transmitter (Trib Out) Outgoing fiber type: Link distance: Multi-mode 500 m
Transmitter output power: -9.5 to -4 dBm Transmitter wavelength: 830 - 860 nm 100 Mb/s to 1.25 Gb/s (OC-3 and OC-12 are not supported.)
Data rate: 100 Mb/s to 1.25 Gb/s (OC-3 and OC-12 are not supported.)
Table A-26. 2R 850-nm WCI CP Line-side Optical Specifications 2R 850-nm Line Port Receiver (Line In) Incoming fiber type: Receiver overload power1: Receiver sensitivity3: Receiver wavelength: Data rate: Single-mode -6 dBm -28 dBm 1200 - 1625 nm 100 Mb/s to 1.25 Gb/s (OC-3 and OC-12 are not supported. 2R 850-nm Line Port Transmitter (Line Out) Outgoing fiber type: Link distance : Transmitter output power: Transmitter wavelength: Data rate:
2
Single-mode 160 km 0 to +3 dBm ITU 100-GHz Grid +/- 100 pm Same data rate as provisioned on the tributary port. 2880 ps/nm
Dispersion limit:
A - 22

2R 1310-nm WCI CP Optical Specifications
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table A-27. 2R 1310-nm WCI CP Tributary-side Optical Specifications 2R 1310-nm Tributary Port Receiver (Trib In) Incoming fiber type: Receiver overload power: Single-mode and multimode -3 dBm 2R 1310-nm Tributary Port Transmitter (Trib Out) Outgoing fiber type: Link distance: Single-mode and multimode1 SM 4 km at GbE 8 km at OC-12 Loss limited at OC-3 with 7dB loss budget -10 to -3 dBm 1266 - 1360 nm 100 Mb/s to 1.25 Gb/s
-18 dBm 1200 - 1625 nm 100 Mb/s to 1.25 Gb/s
Table A-28. 2R 1310-nm WCI CP Line-side Optical Specifications 2R 1310-nm Line Port Receiver (Line In) Incoming fiber type: Receiver overload power1: Receiver sensitivity3: Receiver wavelength: Data rate: Single-mode -6 dBm -28 dBm 1200 - 1625 nm 100 Mb/s to 1.25 Gb/s 2R 1310-nm Line Port Transmitter (Line Out) Outgoing fiber type: Link distance2: Transmitter output power: Transmitter wavelength: Data rate: Dispersion limit: Single-mode 160 km 0 to +3 dBm ITU 100-GHz Grid +/- 100 pm Same data rate as provisioned on the tributary port. 2880 ps/nm
A - 23
TROUBLESHOOTING
3R OC-192 CPs And MetroCor Fiber WCI
Table A-29. 3R OC-192 CPs and MetroCor Fiber WCI Line Interface Fiber types Fiber with positive dispersion NDSF: SMF-28, allwave NZDSF: Truewave-RS Fiber with negative dispersion MetroCor Data rate Transmitter output power (dBm) OC-192/STM-64 Fiber with positive dispersion -2 to -1 Fiber with negative dispersion 0 to +3 Receiver overload and sensitivity (dBm) Fiber with positive dispersion -5 to -15 Fiber with negative dispersion -5 to -15 Dispersion limit (ps/ Fiber with positive dispersion nm) +1440 (NDSF) + 840 (NZDSF) Fiber with negative dispersion -700 Link distance (km) Fiber with positive dispersion 80 Fiber with negative dispersion 210@B1C1 150@B11C3 Transmitter wavelength (nm) Receiver wavelength (nm) ITU wavelength with 100 GHz spacing ITU wavelength with 100 GHz spacing 1300 to 1320 1200 to 1600 > 24 +200 -13 to 0 OC-192/STM-64 +3 to +5 Trib Interface Using SMF for receiving and transmitting
Note:
Dispersion limit can be extended by the use of DCM for NDSF and allwave fiber.
A - 24

3R OC-192 WCI w/FEC CP Specifications
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table A-30. 3R OC-192-FEC WCI Specifications Line Interface Fiber types Data rate Transmitter output power (dBm) Receiver overload and sensitivity (dBm) SMF OC-192/STM-64 -3 to 3.5 -7 to -20 (O-UPSR) -7 to -19 (O-BLSR) SMF OC-192/STM-64 +3 to +7 -13 to 0 Trib Interface
Dispersion limit (ps/ Without DCM: +1410 nm) With DCM: +7000 Link distance (km) Without DCM: 89km @ B1C1 80km @ B11C3 With DCM 445km @ B1C1 399km @ B11C3 Transmitter wavelength (nm) Receiver wavelength (nm) ITU wavelength with 100 GHz spacing 1200 to 1600nm
+200 >24
1300 to 1320 1200 to 1600nm
Note:
Dispersion limit can be extended by the use of DCM for NDSF and allwave fiber.
TROUBLESHOOTING COOLING EQUIPMENT

19V and 23V Chassis
If you cannot feel any air movement or you cannot hear any fan operation: STEP 1: Remove the fan tray and inspect the power connector on the fan tray for damage. If damage is noticed, then a new fan tray may be needed for proper fan operation. Call CIENA Services and Support for assistance. If the fan tray power connector shows no sign of damage, then re-insert the fan tray into the shelf. Press firmly on the front of the fan tray to ensure the tray is fully inserted into the shelf and the power connector is seated.
STEP 2:
If the fan tray continues to not move air or no fan operation can be heard, then remove the fan tray and contact CIENA Services and Support.
A - 25
TROUBLESHOOTING
A - 26
SPAN LOSS QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE
APPENDIX B SPAN LOSS QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE

ORDER OF ACCURACY FOR VALID SPAN LOSS RESULTS:
1. The ONLINE Metro CIT span loss results are to be used as Primary source if valid.
u
Valid being there is no PIN diode saturation, VOA open condition, or two Line cards facing each other in the span. A line card Post Amp/VGA configuration will provide ONLINE Metro CIT span loss results in one direction assuming the results are valid.
Criteria for PIN Diode Saturation:

Post Amps
u u
Current Node TX total power => +4dBm Current Node RX total power => -6dBm Current Node TX total power => +17dBm Current Node RX total power => +17dBm
OLMs / OSMs
u u
Criteria for VOA Open Condition

u u
Expected Node TX total power => +4dBM, 0 channel count or LOS
2. OPM (Optical Power Meter) span loss results are to be used as the Secondary source if the ONLINE Metro CIT results are not valid.
u
Unlock and use 1 circuit if available. 1550nm source is more accurate for loss than OSC 1510nm source.
OTDR results must be taken to verify fiber length and span condition. All these results (if applicable) are required for results templates
Rule of Thumb
u
Span loss (ONLINE Metro CIT if valid or OPM) cannot be greater than ONLINE Metro Designer Software Tool designed value. (the Systems Engineer who designed the network must be notified and a new Visio and .Met file must be generated) Span loss (ONLINE Metro CIT if valid or OPM) cannot be less than 1dB of ONLINE Metro Designer Software Tool designed value. (the Systems Engineer who designed the network must be notified and a new Visio and .Met file must be generated)
B-1
SPAN LOSS QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE

Fiber Pair Balancing
u u
Both fibers cannot be padded to reach designed value Both fibers in a span must be within 1dB of each other.
If cleaning does not get the fibers within 1dB of each other, line padding must be done on the TX side of the span to achieve this.
u
Example 1: Span designed value = 10dB Fiber 1A span loss = 9.1dB (in limits) Fiber 1B span loss = 8.2dB (out of limits) Fiber 1B must be padded on the TX side achieve a span loss value that is => than 9dB but <= 10dB. Its acceptable if the padded span loss value is > than the span loss value of 1A. Span design value = 10dB Fiber 1A span loss = 8.9dB (out of limits) Fiber 1B span loss = 8.5dB (out of limits) Both fibers are out of limits and the Systems Engineer who designed the network must be notified with the results and a new Visio and .Met file must be generated. Span design value = 10dB Fiber 1A span loss = 9.2dB (in limits) Fiber 1B span loss = 10.5dB (out of limits) 1B is greater than the designed value and the Systems Engineer who designed the network must be notified with the results and a new Visio and .Met file must be generated. Span design value = 10dB Fiber 1A span loss = 7.0dB (out of limits) Fiber 1B span loss = 8.5 dB (out of limits) Both span loss values are less than 1dB of the designed value are out more than 1dB of each other. If cleaning does not resolve this issue, 1A must be padded to within 1dB of 1B and the Systems Engineer who designed the network must be notified with the loss and distance of 1B and a new Visio and .Met file must be generated.
Example 2:
Example 3:
Example 4:
Note:
Ensure the line padding is entered into the test verification templates and a deficiency report is completed.
B-2
INSTALLING SHELF ACCESSORY CARDS
APPENDIX C SHELF ACCESSORY INSTALLATION & SLOT ASSIGNMENTS

This appendix provides instructions for the installation of shelf cards required at the time of installation. Although the cards themselves should be pre-installed, this section is provided in the event of a missing card or failure. The appendix contains these sections:
u u u
Installing Power Entry Cards on page C-1 Installing Alarm I/O Cards on page C-2 Shelf Slot Assignments on page C-5
INSTALLING POWER ENTRY CARDS

Each shelf must contain two Power Entry cards to provide for each 48VDC power source. The Power Entry cards are shipped pre installed. These procedures are provided for your reference.

Caution: To prevent damage to the equipment, never disconnect a shelf power cable or install or remove a Power Entry card with power applied. Always pull the power fuse or turn the circuit breaker to OFF before disconnecting a power cable or removing a Power Entry card.

Warning:
Removing a Power Entry card with power applied can result in serious injury or death. Disconnect power before removing a Power Entry card by pulling the power fuse or turning off the circuit breaker and disconnecting the power-input cable. Check with voltmeter to verify zero voltage.
Use the procedure in this section to install the Power Entry cards. Perform this procedure for both powerentry cards (right and left). STEP 1: STEP 2: Wear a verified ESD grounding strap and insert the plug on the straps grounding lead of into one the ESD sockets on the front of the shelf. Align the Power Entry card with card slot guides on the side of the shelf. Figure C-1 shows the installation of a Power Entry card in a 19V or 23V shelf. Slide the Power Entry card into place. STEP 3: STEP 4: Press firmly on the front of the card to mate the connectors. Tighten the mounting screws.
C-1
Active Active RTN TN RTN TN
Critical
Major Minor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
ONI
Systems
IN
Power ACO
OUT
Figure C-1. Power Entry Card Installation (19V or 23V)
INSTALLING ALARM I/O CARDS

The Alarm I/O card connects the shelf to the customer premise alarm and control system. The 19V and 23V main shelves have two separate cards for each Alarm I/O interface. These two cards must be installed in their proper locations (Figure C-2).
u u
CO Alarm I/O card User Alarm I/O card
Connector diagrams and pinouts are provided in Appendix D of this document.
Note:
The Alarm I/O card is shipped pre installed. These procedures are provided for your reference.
Install an Alarm I/O Card

STEP 1: STEP 2: STEP 3: STEP 4: STEP 5: Align the Alarm I/O card with the card slot guides on the left center of shelf. Slide the card into place. Press on the front of the card to mate the connectors. Tighten the screws that hold the Alarm I/O card in place. Connect customer premise alarm and control system cables to the front of the Alarm I/O card.
C-2
CO Alarm I/O Card
User Alarm I/O Card

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Critical
20
21
22
23
Major Minor
ONI
Systems
IN
Power ACO
OUT
Figure C-2. Alarm I/O Card Installation (19V or 23V)
INSTALLING POWER/ALARM CUT-OFF LED CARD IN MAIN SHELF

The Power/Alarm Cut-off LED card and the Alarm LED card are shipped pre installed. These procedures are provided for your reference.
Install the Power/alarm Cutoff LED Card in the Main Shelf

STEP 1: STEP 2: STEP 3: STEP 4: Unpack the Power/Alarm Cut-off LED card. Align the Power/Alarm Cut-off LED card with the card-guide slots on the right side of the blowerair plenum section (Figure C-3 [19V or 23V]). Slide the Power/Alarm Cut-off LED card into place. Press firmly on the front of the card to ensure that it is fully inserted. Apply pressure to the top and bottom of the card edge, not to the LEDs or switch.
Note:
C-3

.
Main Shelf
Alarm LED card
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Press Here Push button NOTE: Do not use the push button to seat the cards damage may result.
Power/Alarm Cut-off LED card
Figure C-3. Alarm LED and Power/Alarm Cutoff LED Card Installation (19V or 23V)
INSTALLING ALARM LED CARD IN MAIN SHELF

The Alarm LED card is shipped pre installed. These procedures are provided for your reference.
Install the Alarm LED Card in the Main Shelf

STEP 1: STEP 2: STEP 3: STEP 4: Unpack the Alarm LED card. Align the Alarm LED card with the card guide slots on the left side of the blower-air plenum section (Figure C-3 [19V or 23V]). Slide the Alarm LED card into place. Press firmly on the front of the card to ensure that it is fully inserted.
Note:
Apply pressure to the top and bottom of the card edge, not to the LEDs.
INSTALLING POWER LED CARD IN EXPANSION SHELF

The Power LED card is shipped pre installed. These procedures are provided for your reference.
Install the Power LED Card in the Expansion Shelf

STEP 1: STEP 2: STEP 3: STEP 4: Unpack the Power LED card. Align the Power LED card with the card-guide slots on the right side of the blower-air plenum section, as you did when installing the Power/Alarm Cut-off LED card (Figure C-3). Slide the Power LED card into place. Press firmly on the front of card to ensure that it is fully inserted.
C-4
Note:
Apply pressure to top and bottom of the card edge, not to the LEDs.
SHELF SLOT ASSIGNMENTS

The four center slots in a main shelf, and the two center slots in an expansion shelf, are reserved for specific types of CPs. Slot assignments for the ONLINE shelves are shown in Table C-1 through Table C-4. Refer to the ONLINE Metro Multiservice Dense Wave Division Multiplexing (DWDM) Transport Platform Engineering and Planning Manual for additional information on slot assignments.
Note:
Slots are assigned according to the network configuration.
Note:
The Post-amp and Pre-amp CPs are double-width CPs that occupy two adjacent slots.
Slot Assignments of Two Sonet/SDH Multiplexer (SMX) CPs Operating As Pairs

Two SMX CPs may be installed to perform optical splitter tributary protection. The two SMX CPs operating as a pair must be installed in specific adjacent slot positions in the same shelf. 23V MAIN AND EXPANSION SHELVES SLOT ASSIGNMENTS In the 23V main shelf, SMX CP pairs can be installed in slots 2 and 4, slots 6 and 8, slots 17 and 19, and slots 21 and 23. In the 23V expansion shelf, SMX CP pairs can be installed in slots 2 and 4, slots 6 and 8, slots 17 and 19, and slots 21 and 23. 19V MAIN AND EXPANSION SHELVES SLOT ASSIGNMENTS In the 19V main shelf, SMX CP pairs can be installed in slots 2 and 4, and slots 16 and 18. In the 19V expansion shelf, SMX CP pairs can be installed in slots 2 and 4, slots 6 and 8, slots 12 and 14, and slots 16 and 18.
C-5
Slot Assignments of Two WCI CPs Operating As a UPSR Pair

When a Unidirectional Path Switched Ring (UPSR) Splitter CP is installed, two WCI CPs must also be installed, to act as a UPSR pair. Two WCI CPs operating as a UPSR pair must be installed in specific adjacent slot positions in the same shelf. 23V MAIN AND EXPANSION SHELVES SLOT ASSIGNMENTS In the 23V main shelf, single-width WCI CP pairs can be installed in slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, slots 5 and 6, slots 7 and 8, slots 14 and 15, slots 16 and 17, slots 18 and 19, slots 20 and 21, and slots 22 and 23. In the 23V main shelf, double-width, left-justified or right-justified WCI CP pairs can be installed in slots 1/2 and 3/4, slots 5/6 and 7/8, slots 16/17 and 18/19, and slots 20/21 and 22/23. In the 23V expansion shelf, single-width WCI CP pairs can be installed in slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, slots 5 and 6, slots 7 and 8, slots 9 and 10, slots 14 and 15, slots 16 and 17, slots 18 and 19, slots 20 and 21, and slots 22 and 23. In the 23V expansion shelf, double-width, left-justified or right-justified WCI CP pairs can be installed in slots 1/2 and 3/4, slots 5/6 and 7/8, slots 16/17 and 18/19, and slots 20/21 and 22/23. 19V MAIN AND EXPANSION SHELVES SLOT ASSIGNMENTS In the 19V main shelf, single-width WCI CP pairs can be installed in slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, slots 5 and 6, slots 13 and 14, slots 15 and 16, and slots 17 and 18. In the 19V main shelf, double-width, right justified WCI CP pairs can be installed in slots 1/2 and 3/4, and slots 15/16 and 17/18. In the 19V expansion shelf, single-width WCI CP pairs can be installed in slots 1 and 2, slots 3 and 4, slots 5 and 6, slots 7 and 8, slots 11 and 12, slots 13 and 14, slots 15 and 16, and slots 17 and 18. In the 19V expansion shelf, double-width, right justified WCI CP pairs can be installed in slots 1/2 and 3/4, slots 5/6 and 7/8, slots 11/12 and 13/14, and slots 15/16 and 17/18.
C-6
O-BLSR, O-UPSR, And Linear ADM Slot Assignments

ALL BAND WAVELENGTH DIVISION MULTIPLEXER CP SLOT ASSIGNMENT All Band Wavelength Division Multiplexer (ABWDM) CP can be installed in any slot for the 23V and 19V. For Legacy 23 shelves, ABWDM CPs can go in any slot except slot 1 or slot 26 of the main shelf. ADD/DROP MULTIPLEXER 4-PORT AND 8-PORT CP SLOT ASSIGNMENT As stand-alone 4-port and 8-port CPs, the Add/Drop Multiplexer 4-port (ADM04) and Add/Drop Multiplexer 8-port (ADM08) CPs are slot-position independent. BAND WAVELENGTH DIVISION MULTIPLEXER CP SLOT ASSIGNMENT Band Wavelength Division Multiplexer (BWDM) CP can be installed in any slot except slot 1 or slot 26 of the main shelf. COMMUNICATIONS CP SLOT ASSIGNMENT The Communications (COM) CP can be installed in slots 11 and 12 of the 23V expansion shelf, and slots 9 and 10 of the 19V expansion shelf. CHANNEL WAVELENGTH DIVISION MULTIPLEXER CP The Channel Wavelength Division Multiplexer (CWDM) CP can be installed in any slot except slot 1 or slot 26 of the main shelf. LINE CP SLOT ASSIGNMENT The Line CP can be installed any slot. The default slots are as follows:. In the 23V shelf, the Line CP can be installed in slot 9 and slot 14. In the 19V shelf, the Line CP can be installed in slot 7 and slot 12. OPTICAL LINE MODULE CP SLOT ASSIGNMENT The Optical Line Module (OLM) CP can be installed any slot. The default slots are as follows: In the 23V shelf, the OLM CP defaults to slot 9 and slot 14. In the 19V shelf, the OLM CP defaults to slot 7 and slot 12. OPTICAL SUPERVISORY CHANNEL CP SLOT ASSIGNMENT In thee-inch shelf, the Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC) CP can be installed in slot 12 and slot 15. In the 23V shelf, the OSC CP can be installed in slot 8 and slot 11. In the 19V shelf, the OSC CP can be installed in slot 10 and slot 13. OSC SPLITTER MODULE CP SLOT ASSIGNMENT The OSM Splitter Module (OSM) CP can be installed any slot. The default slots are as follows: In the 23V shelf, the OSM CP defaults to slot 9 and slot 14. In the 19V shelf, the OSM CP defaults to slot 7 and slot 12. PERSISTENT STORAGE MODULE CP SLOT ASSIGNMENT The Persistent Storage Module (PEM) CP can be installed in slot 12 of the 23V main shelf, and slot 10 of the 19V main shelf.
C-7

PROCESSOR ELEMENT MODULE CP SLOT ASSIGNMENT
The Processor Element Module (PEM) CP can be installed in slot 11 of the 23V main shelf, and slot 9 of the 19V main shelf. POWER MANAGEMENT MODULE CP SLOT ASSIGNMENT The Power Management Module (PMM) CP can be installed in any slot except slot 1 or slot 26 of the main shelf. SYNC CP SLOT ASSIGNMENT The Sync CP is slot-position independent. The SYNC CPs are used in pairs per shelf to provide primary and secondary timing to the shelf. VARIABLE GAIN AMPLIFIER CP SLOT ASSIGNMENTS FOR RELEASE 4.0 The Variable Gain Amplifier (VGA) CP is a double-width CP that occupies two adjacent slots. The CPs can be installed in any slot. The default slots assignments follow. In the 23V shelf:
u
Pre-amplifier VGA: The default is slots 5 and 6 and slots 17 and 18. The default is slots 7 and 8 and slots 15 and 16. Post-amplifier VGA:
In the 19V shelf:

u
VARIABLE GAIN AMPLIFIER CP SLOT ASSIGNMENTS PRIOR TO RELEASE 4.0 The Variable Gain Amplifier (VGA) CP is a double-width CP that occupies two adjacent slots. The CPs can be installed in any slot. The default slots assignments follow. In the 23V shelf:
u
In the 19V shelf:

u
WORKING/PROTECT SPLITTER CP SLOT ASSIGNMENT The Working/Protect Splitter (WPS) CP can be installed in any main shelf slot. The defaults are slots 1 and 23 in the 23V main shelf, and slots 1 and 18 in the 19V main shelf. Installation, Turn-up, and Test Manual September 30, 2003 - Revision A 009-2003-294
C-8
RING SWITCH MODULE CP SLOT ASSIGNMENT The Ring Switch Module (RSM) CP can be installed in any main shelf slot. The defaults are slots 21 and 22 in the 23V main shelf, and slots 15 and 16 in the 19V main shelf. UNIDIRECTIONAL PATH SWITCHED RING SPLITTER CP SLOT ASSIGNMENT The Unidirectional Path Switched Ring (UPSR) Splitter CP can be installed in any slot. WAVELENGTH CONVERTER INTERFACE CP SLOT ASSIGNMENT The Wavelength Converter Interface (WCI) CP can be installed in any slot except slot 1 or slot 26 of the main shelf.

Caution: Do not install a CP into the wrong slot. If a CP is installed in the wrong slot, the system may not work properly, and the CP and/or backplane can be damaged.
The diagrams in Figure C-4 through Figure C-8 show the default CP positions for some common ONLINE configurations.
Note:
The configurations in these illustrations are examples only. CP positions may vary depending on the site plan for each installation.
Table C-1. CP Slot Assignments (23V Main Shelf) Slot 10 11 12 13 PEM only PSM only OSC (east) only Required CPs OSC (west) only
O P P O S E S S C M M C
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Figure C-4. Basic CP Configuration (23V Main Shelf)
C-9
W P S
R S M
W P S
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Note: Only RSM and WPS CP positions are recommended.
Figure C-5. Basic BLSR Ring CP Configuration (23V Main Shelf)
C C O O M M
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Figure C-6. Basic CP Configuration (23V Expansion Shelf)
Table C-2. CP Slot Assignments (23V Expansion Shelf) Slot 11 12 Required CPs COM (west) only COM (east) only
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Figure C-7. CP Configuration (19V Main Shelf)
C - 10
Table C-3. CP Slot Assignments (19V Main Shelf) Slot 8 9 10 11 Required CPs OSC (west) only PEM only PSM only OSC (east) only
C C O O M M
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Figure C-8. CP Configuration (19V Expansion Shelf)
Table C-4. CP Slot Assignments (19V Expansion Shelf) Slot 9 10 Required CPs COM (west) only COM (east) only
C - 11
C - 12
CONNECTOR PINOUTS
APPENDIX D CONNECTOR PINOUTS

This appendix provides information on connectors, electrical ratings, and connector pinouts for 23-inch, 23V, and 19V shelves. The appendix contains these sections:
u u u
Front Panel Connectors and Electrical Ratings on page D-1 Alarm I/O Card Connector Pins (23-inch Shelf) on page D-1 Alarm I/O Card Connector Pins (23V and 19V Shelves) on page D-6
FRONT PANEL CONNECTORS AND ELECTRICAL RATINGS

The front panel connectors for the Alarm I/O card are presented in Table D-1. Table D-1. Panel Connectors For ONLINE Metro Platform Model 23 19V Cable-end User Interface Male DB25 Male DB62 Male DB25 Male DB62 Alarm I/O Central office (CO) User (12 inputs and 12 outputs) CO User (8 inputs and 8 outputs) Shelf Interface Female DB25F Female DB62F Female HD26F Female HD40F
The alarm interface electrical ratings for the Central Office (CO) and User alarms are presented in Table D2. Table D-2. Alarm I/O Card Electrical Ratings Alarm Description 2500V 23-inch Ratings 23V/19V Ratings 2500V CO Visual/Audible Maximum surge user alarm output voltage between ratings contact and coil. Maximum switching capacity.
0.5A @ 125VAC 0.25A @ 220VAC 1A @ 60VDC 0.25A @ 220VDC Maximum relay current limited to 1 amp on each output due to cable ratings. V*I must be less than 60 Watts.
0.5A @ 125VAC 0.25A @ 220VAC 0.5A @ 60VDC Maximum relay current limited to 1 amp on each output due to cable ratings. V*I must be less than 60 Watts. 57VDC
User input rating
Maximum voltage across input terminal pairs.
57VDC
ALARM I/O CARD CONNECTOR PINS (23-INCH SHELF)

The 23-inch main shelf contains the CO interface and the user interface on one card: the Alarm I/O Card. This section contains pin connector information for each interface.
D-1
CONNECTOR PINOUTS
CO Alarm Interface 25-Pin Connectors
The CO alarm interface 25-pin connector pins are depicted in Figure D-1. Each pins I/O, type, and description are provided in Table D-3.
Pin 13
Pin 1
Pin 25
Pin 14
Figure D-1. CO Alarm Interface 25-Pin Connector
Table D-3. CO Alarm Interface, DB25 Connector Pinout Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 I1 I I N/A O4 O O O O O O O O O I N/A O O O O O O O I/O Type Opt-d2 Opt-t3 Opt-t N/C Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Opt-d Opt-t N/C Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Description ACO external input Shelf alarm LED critical Shelf alarm critical alarm LED minor Reserved Visual alarm critical relay common Visual alarm major relay normally open Visual alarm major relay normally closed Visual alarm minor relay common Audible alarm critical relay normally open Audible alarm critical relay normally closed Audible alarm major relay common Audible alarm minor relay normally open Audible alarm minor relay normally closed ACO external 48V return Shelf alarm LED major Reserved Visual alarm critical relay normally open Visual alarm critical relay normally closed Visual alarm major relay common Visual alarm minor relay normally open Visual alarm minor relay normally closed Audible alarm critical relay common Audible alarm major relay normally open Red Red Green Red White Red Black Red Black White Orange Orange Red Orange Green Orange Black Green Green White Green Black Green White Black Blue Blue Red Blue White Blue Black White White Red White Black White Red Black Black Black Red Color Code
D-2
CONNECTOR PINOUTS
Table D-3. CO Alarm Interface, DB25 Connector Pinout Pin 24 25 O O I/O Type Relay Relay Description Audible alarm major relay normally closed Audible alarm minor relay common Color Code Black White Black Red White
1. I = input 2. Opt-d = opto-isolator input diode 3. Opt-t = opto-isolator output transistor 4. O = output
User Alarm Interface 62-Pin Connectors

The User Alarm interface 62-pin connector pins are depicted in Figure D-2. Each pins I/O, type, and description are provided in Table D-2.
Pin 21
Pin 1
Pin 22
Pin 42
Pin 62
Pin 43
Figure D-2. User Alarm 62-Pin Connector
Table D-4. User Alarm Interface, DB62 Connector Pinout Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 O1 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O I/O Type Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Description User alarm 1 relay normally open User alarm 1 relay common User alarm 1 relay normally closed User alarm 2 relay normally open User alarm 2 relay common User alarm 2 relay normally closed User alarm 4 relay normally open User alarm 4 relay common User alarm 4 relay normally closed User alarm 6 relay normally open User alarm 6 relay common User alarm 6 relay normally closed User alarm 7 relay normally open User alarm 7 relay common User alarm 7 relay normally closed User alarm 9 relay normally open User alarm 9 relay common Color Code TP1-Red TP1-Brown TP2-Red TP2-Orange TP3-Red TP3-Yellow TP4-Red TP4-Green TP5-Red TP5-Blue TP6-Red TP6-Violet TP7-Red TP7-White TP8-Red TP8-Black TP9-Orange
D-3
CONNECTOR PINOUTS
Table D-4. User Alarm Interface, DB62 Connector Pinout (Continued) Pin 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 O O O O O O O O I2 O O O N/A O O O N/A O O O O I O O O O I O I O I O I O I O I O I I/O Type Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay R_ret Opt-d3 Relay Relay Relay N/C Relay Relay Relay N/C Relay Relay Relay R_ret Opt-d Relay Relay Relay R_ret Opt-d R_ret Opt-d R_ret Opt-d R_ret Opt-d R_ret Opt-d R_ret Opt-d R_ret Opt-d Description User alarm 9 relay normally closed User alarm 11 relay normally open User alarm 11 relay common User alarm 11 relay normally closed User alarm 0 relay normally open User alarm 0 relay common User alarm 0 relay normally closed User alarm input 2 48V return User alarm input 2 User alarm 3 relay normally closed User alarm 3 relay common User alarm 3 relay normally open Reserved User alarm 5 relay normally open User alarm 5 relay common User alarm 5 relay normally closed Reserved User alarm 8 relay normally open User alarm 8 relay common User alarm 8 relay normally closed User alarm input 9 48V return User alarm input 9 User alarm 10 relay normally open User alarm 10 relay common User alarm 10 relay normally closed User alarm input 0 48V return User alarm input 0 User alarm input 1 48V return User alarm input 1 User alarm input 3 48V return User alarm input 3 User alarm input 4 48V return User alarm input 4 User alarm input 5 48V return User alarm input 5 User alarm input 6 48V return User alarm input 6 User alarm input 7 48V return User alarm input 7 Color Code TP9-Brown TP10-Orange TP10-Yellow TP11-Orange TP12-Brown TP12-Green TP13-Black TP13-Yellow TP14-White TP14-Yellow TP15-Blue TP15-Yellow TP16-Green TP16-Yellow TP17-Brown TP17-Yellow TP18-Black TP18-Orange TP19-White TP19-Orange TP20-Violet TP20-Orange TP21-Blue TP21-Orange TP11-Green TP22-Green TP22-Blue TP23-Green TP23-White TP24-Green TP24-Black TP25-Blue TP25-Brown TP26-Blue TP26-White TP27-Blue TP27-Black TP28-White TP28-Brown
D-4
CONNECTOR PINOUTS
Table D-4. User Alarm Interface, DB62 Connector Pinout (Continued) Pin 57 58 59 60 61 62 O I O I O I I/O Type R_ret Opt-d R_ret Opt-d R_ret Opt-d Description User alarm input 8 48V return User alarm input 8 User alarm input 10 48V return User alarm input 10 User alarm input 11 48V return User alarm input 11 Color Code TP29-White TP29-Violet TP30-White TP30-Black TP31-Black TP31-Brown
1. O = output 2. I = input 3. Opt-d = opto-isolator input diode
D-5
CONNECTOR PINOUTS
ALARM I/O CARD CONNECTOR PINS (23V AND 19V SHELVES)

The 23V and 19V main shelves have two separate Alarm I/O cards: the Central Office (CO) Alarm I/O Card and the User Alarm I/O Card. This section contains connector and pinout information for each card.
CO Alarm I/O Card 26-Pin Connector

The CO alarm 26-pin connector pins on the Alarm I/O card are depicted in Figure D-3. Each pins I/O, type, and description are provided in Table D-5.
Pin 1
Pin 13
Pin 26
Pin 14
Figure D-3. CO Alarm I/O Card 26-Pin Connector
Table D-5. CO Alarm I/O Card, HD26 Connector Pinout Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O I

2 1
I/O
Type Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Opt-t
3
Description Audible alarm minor relay normally open Audible alarm critical relay normally closed Audible alarm critical relay normally common Audible alarm critical relay normally closed Audible alarm major relay normally closed Audible alarm major relay common Audible alarm major relay normally open Visual alarm minor relay normally closed Visual alarm minor relay common Visual alarm minor relay normally open Visual alarm major relay common Visual alarm major relay normally open Visual alarm critical relay normally closed Audible alarm minor relay normally Audible alarm minor relay normally N/C N/C N/C Rack alarm LED major ACO alarm LED major
Color Code TP1-Black/Red TP1-Red/Black TP2-Black/White TP2-White/Black TP3-Black/Green TP3-Green/Black TP4-Black/Blue TP4-Blue/Black TP5-Black/Yellow TP5-Yellow/Black TP6-Black/Brown TP6-Brown/Black TP7-Black/Orange TP7-Orange/Black TP8-Red/White TP8-White/Red TP9-Red/Green
Opt-d4
D-6
CONNECTOR PINOUTS
Table D-5. CO Alarm I/O Card, HD26 Connector Pinout (Continued) Pin 21 22 23 24 25 26 I I I O O O I/O Type Opt-t Opt-t Opt-t Relay Relay Relay Description Rack alarm LED minor Rack alarm LED critical ACO external input Visual alarm major relay normally closed Visual alarm critical relay normally open Visual alarm critical relay common Color Code TP9-Green/Red TP10-Red/Blue TP10-Blue/Red TP11-Red/Yellow TP11-Yellow/Red TP12-Red/Brown
1. O = output 2. I = input 3. Opt-t = opto-isolator input diode 4. Opt-t = opto-isolator output transistor
User Alarm I/O Card 40-Pin Connector

The User 40-pin alarm connector pins on the User Alarm I/O Card are depicted in Figure D-4. Each pins I/ O, type, and description are provided in Table D-6. .
Pin 20 Pin 1
Pin 40
Pin 21
Figure D-4. User Alarm I/O Card 40-pin Alarm Connector
Table D-6. User Alarm I/O Card, HD40 Connector Pinout Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 O1 O O O O O O O O O O O O I/O Type Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Description User alarm 0 relay normally open User alarm 1 relay normally closed User alarm 1 relay common User alarm 1 relay normally open User alarm 2 relay normally closed User alarm 2 relay common User alarm 2 relay normally open User alarm 3 relay normally closed User alarm 3 relay common User alarm 3 relay normally open User alarm 4 relay normally closed User alarm 4 relay common User alarm 4 relay normally open Color Code TP1-Black/Red TP1-Red/Black TP2-Black/White TP2-White/Black TP3-Black/Green TP3-Green/Black TP4-Black/Blue TP4-Blue/Black TP5-Black/Yellow TP5-Yellow/Black TP6-Black/Brown TP6-Brown/Black TP7-Black/Orange
D-7
CONNECTOR PINOUTS
Table D-6. User Alarm I/O Card, HD40 Connector Pinout (Continued) Pin 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 O O O O O O O O O I2 O I O I O I O I O I O I O I O O O I/O Type Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay Opt-d3 R_ret4 Opt-d R_ret Opt-d R_ret Opt-d R_ret Opt-d R_ret Opt-d R_ret Opt-d R_ret Opt-d R_ret Relay Relay Description User alarm 5 relay normally closed User alarm 5 relay common User alarm 5 relay normally open User alarm 6 relay normally closed User alarm 6 relay common User alarm 6 Relay normally open User alarm 7 relay normally closed User alarm 0 relay common User alarm 0 relay normally closed User alarm input A node 7 User alarm input A node 7 48V return User alarm input A node 6 User alarm input A node 6 48V return User alarm input A node 5 User alarm input A node 5 48V return User alarm input A node 4 User alarm input A node 4 48V return User alarm input A node 3 User alarm input A node 3 48V return User alarm input A node 2 User alarm input A node 2 48V return User alarm input A node 1 User alarm input A node 1 48V return User alarm input A node 0 User alarm input A node 0 48V return User alarm 7 relay common User alarm 7 relay normally open Color Code TP7-Orange/Black TP8-Red/White TP8-White/Red TP9-Red/Green TP9-Green/Red TP10-Red/Blue TP10-Blue/Red TP11-Red/Yellow TP11-Yellow/Red TP12-Red/Brown TP12-Brown/Red TP13-Red/Orange TP13-Orange/Red TP14-Green/White TP14-White/Green TP15-Green/Blue TP15-Blue/Green TP16-Green/Yellow TP16-Yellow/Green TP17-Green/Brown TP17-Brown/Green TP18-Green/Orange TP18-Orange/Green TP19-White/Blue TP19-Blue/White TP20-White/Yellow TP20-Yellow/White
1. O = output 2. I = input 3. Opt-d = opto-isolator Input diode 4. R_ret = resistor to 48V return
D-8
FIBER AND BULKHEAD CLEANING
APPENDIX E FIBER AND BULKHEAD CLEANING

MAINTAINING FIBERS
The fibers used with the ONLINE NE must be clean and free of defects to ensure transmission. The following sections contain guidelines about fibers:
u u
Guidelines for Handling and Working with Fibers Cleaning Fiber Ends and Bulkhead Connectors
Guidelines for Handling and Working with Fibers

Fibers are durable, but they can be damaged if they are not handled properly. CIENA recommends the following guidelines when handling optical fibers:
u u u
Do not remove fibers from their packaging until you are ready to connect them. Do not touch fiber ends with your hands. To avoid scratching or other damage, keep fiber ends capped when you expect to leave them unconnected for an extended period of time. Handle the fibers carefully to avoid nicking or cutting the sheath and the optical fiber within it. Handle the fibers carefully; rough handling can fracture a fiber internally. Never allow a fiber to be crimped, and never route a fiber so that it has a bend tighter than a 2inch radius. Always use a fiber management tray to contain any extra fiber length. Do not attempt to clean fiber ends or bulkhead connectors using any methods or materials other than the ones discussed in the next section.
u u u
u u
Cleaning Fiber Ends and Bulkhead Connectors

This section explains how to clean fiber ends and bulkhead connectors. Fiber and fiber-socket cleaning is a critical part of the ONLINE Metro system installation and maintenance process. Since a significant percentage of transmission problems in fiber-optic systems is caused by dirty connections, you can simplify the installation process and reduce the amount of troubleshooting necessary by carefully following the procedures in this section. CLEANING AND CONNECTING FIBERS Since a fiber end is more likely to become dirty after cleaning than a bulkhead connector is, it is best to clean the bulkhead connector first.

E-1

CLEANING A BULKHEAD CONNECTOR The following materials are required for this procedure:
u u u u
ESD Grounding strap Kimwipes Aerosol can of compressed air Extension tube for aerosol can of compressed air Wash and dry your hands thoroughly (use a low-lint towel, if available). Remove the protective cap from the bulkhead connector (store the cap in a place where it is not likely to collect dirt). Perform the following steps to clear the nozzle and extension tube on the aerosol can of compressed air (see Figure E-1 for Step 3 through Step 5): a. Hold the can upright (vertically) with tube attached to the nozzle. b. Use a Kimwipe to clean the end of the tube. c. Press the nozzle, and hold it down for a second or two. d. Clean the end of the tube again with a new Kimwipe.
Figure E-1. Cleaning a Bulkhead Connector with Compressed Air STEP 4: STEP 5: While still holding the can in the upright position, grasp the extension tube and bend it slightly so that the open end of the tube is higher than the top of the nozzle. Position the end of the tube approximately -inch from the bulkhead connectors opening, and press the nozzle for a short burst.

Caution: Make sure the can remains upright at all times to prevent any of the aerosol propellant from mixing with the air exiting the nozzle and tube. If any propellant is sprayed into the bulkhead connector, it will cause damage when the fiber is in use.
E-2

STEP 6: Set the can of compressed air aside.

Caution: To prevent dirt from being introduced into the socket, do not replace the cap on the bulkhead connector. The cap is intended only for protecting the socket from damage and from excessive exposure to dirt when it is unused for extended periods.
CLEANING AND CONNECTING A FIBER END Use the procedure in this section to clean a fiber end. The following materials are required for this procedure:
u u u u u
ESD Grounding strap Kimwipes CLETOP fiber connector cleaner (NTTI Reel Type A Connector Cleaner) Isopropyl alcohol (99%) Optical fiber scope with 1.25-mm adapter (Noyes Fiber Systems OFS 300 or equivalent). A 2.5-mm adapter may also be required for client equipment. Carefully remove the fiber from its package. Unwind the fiber and inspect it for kinks or other damage (discard damaged fibers). Remove the protective cap from one end of the fiber (store the cap in a place where it won't collect dirt). Clean the fiber end with either the Kimwipes cleaning method or the CLETOP fiber cleaning device. Perform Step 5 for the Kimwipes method or perform Step 6 for the CLETOP fiber cleaning device method. Follow local practice in choosing the cleaning method. You can use a CLETOP fiber cleaning device instead of the foldedKimwipes cleaning pad. The procedure for using the CLETOP device is described in Step 6. If you do not use a CLETOP device, go to Step 5.
Note:
STEP 5:
To use the Kimwipe method to clean a fiber, perform the following step: a. Holding two Kimwipes by their edges only, fold them in half three times so you have a 16ply cleaning pad (see Figure E-2).
Figure E-2. Folding Two Kimwipes to Form a 16-Ply Cleaning Pad
E-3

Caution: Always hold the Kimwipes as close to their edges as possible to avoid contaminating them with oil and dirt from your hands.
b. Hold the cleaning pad by its edges with one hand, and gently rub the fiber end against the surface of the pad in an upward stroke (see Figure E-3).
Figure E-3. Cleaning a Fiber End Using a Folded Kimwipe Pad c. Repeat Step b two or three times (for a total of at least three strokes), being careful to use a different area of the cleaning pad each time.
d. Discard the cleaning pad (never reuse a cleaning pad).
Warning:

e. Insert the fiber end into the 1.25 mm adapter on the fiber scope (Figure E-4).
E-4
Figure E-4. Viewing a Fiber End with a Fiber Scope f. Observe the image in the fiber scope and compare it to the views shown in Figure E-5.
Fiber conductor Fiber cladding
Clean fiber Small dirt particles outside cladding area (Acceptable) Large dirt particles outside cladding area (Unacceptable)
Dirt within cladding area (Unacceptable)
Scratches outside cladding area (Acceptable)
Dirt outside cladding area
Scratches on end of fiber
Scratch within cladding area (Unacceptable)
Figure E-5. Examples of Fiber-End Views
E-5
Note:
As shown in Figure E-5, any dirt particles in the area within the fiber cladding (the circle in the views) are unacceptable and must be removed before the fiber can be used. If there are scratches or unremovable dirt particles in this area, the fiber must be discarded since dirt or scratches inside the cladding will prevent the fiber ends from aligning correctly. Large dirt particles outside the cladding area can also prevent correct alignment, so these must also be removed. If possible, the fiber end should be spotless, as shown in the view labeled Clean fiber.
g. If the fiber is not acceptably clean, repeat the cleaning process in Step a through Step f, reinspecting the fiber end. h. If the fiber is still not acceptably clean, create two more Kimwipes cleaning pads (see Step a). Dampen one with 99% isopropyl alcohol, and gently rub the end of the fiber against it.

Caution: Always hold the cleaning pad by its edges to prevent it from becoming contaminated by oil and dirt from your hands.
i. j. STEP 6:
Use the dry cleaning pad you prepared in Step h to dry the fiber end immediately after cleaning it. Do not allow the alcohol to air-dry on the fiber end. If the fiber is still not acceptably clean discard it and use another fiber.
To use the CLETOP Device to clean the fiber end, perform the following four steps: a. Press the lever on the side of the CLETOP device to expose an uncontaminated area of the cleaning ribbon (Figure E-6).
E-6
Lever
Figure E-6. Cleaning a Fiber End with a CLETOP Cleaning Device b. Rotate the fiber end slowly while rubbing it against the cleaning ribbon in a downward stroke, once in each slot (the correct stroke direction is shown on the label on the CLETOP device). c. Insert the fiber end into the 1.25 mm adapter on the fiber scope, as shown in Figure E-4.
Warning:

d. Observe the image in the fiber scope and compare it to the views shown in Figure E-5.
Note:
As shown in Figure E-5, any dirt particles in the area within the fiber cladding (the circle in the views) is unacceptable and must be removed before the fiber can be used. If there are scratches or unremovable dirt particles in this area, the fiber must be discarded since dirt or scratches inside the cladding will prevent the fiber ends from aligning correctly. Large dirt particles outside the cladding area can also prevent correct alignment, so these must also be removed. If possible, the fiber end should be spotless, as shown in the view labeled Clean fiber.
E-7
e. If the fiber is not acceptably clean, repeat the cleaning process in Step a through Step d of Step 5, reinspecting the fiber end. f. Repeat Step e through Step g of Step 5(inspect the fiber end with the fiber scope). g. If the fiber is not acceptably clean, repeat Step a through Step f of Step 5. h. If the fiber is still not acceptably clean after two or three attempts using the CLETOP device, proceed to Step i. i. Take two Kimwipes, hold them by their edges only, and fold them in half three times so you have a 16-ply cleaning pad (see Figure E-2).
Caution:
Dampen one with 99% isopropyl alcohol, and gently rub the end of the fiber against it. Isopropyl alcohol is extremely flammable.

Caution: Always hold the cleaning pad by its edges to prevent it from becoming contaminated by oil and dirt from your hands.
j.
Use the dry cleaning pad you prepared in Step i to dry the fiber end immediately after cleaning it. Do not allow the alcohol to air-dry on the fiber end.

Caution: Do not use any methods or materials other than those shown and described in this procedure to clean the fiber ends. Never use alcohol with a CLETOP cleaning device.
k.
Observe the image in the fiber scope and compare it to the views shown in Figure E-5. If the fiber is still not acceptably clean, discard it and use another fiber.
CHECKING BULKHEAD CONNECTORS FOR CLEANLINESS The following procedure explains how to determine whether a bulkhead connector is acceptably clean and, if it is dirty, how to clean it. The following materials are required to complete this procedure:
u
CLETOP 1.25 mm cleaning sticks. Insert the end of a newly-cleaned fiber fully into the bulkhead connector. Remove the fiber from the bulkhead connector, and inspect it with a fiber scope (see Step e and Step f of Step 5 in the Cleaning and Connecting a Fiber End section). If the previously clean fiber is no longer acceptably clean, continue with Step 4 (if the fiber is still acceptably clean, reinsert it in the bulkhead connector and ignore the rest of this procedure). Remove a CLETOP 1.25 mm cleaning stick from its wrapper (Figure E-7).
E-8
Cleaning fibers
Figure E-7. Removing a CLETOP Cleaning Stick from Its Wrapper a. Open the end of the wrapper furthest from the cleaning fibers (see Figure E-7). b. Slide the open end of the wrapper far enough toward the opposite end of the cleaning stick so that you can grip the end of the stick. c. Grip the end the stick (opposite the end that has the cleaning fibers), and use your other hand to slide the wrapper off and discard it.

Caution: Always handle the cleaning sticks from the end opposite the cleaning fibers. If you happen to touch the cleaning fibers with your hands, break the stick, and discard it. Never use a cleaning stick if the cleaning fibers have been in contact with anything other than the inside of the wrapper.
d. Gently insert the end of the cleaning stick into the bulkhead connector. Be sure the end you insert has the cleaning fibers attached to it (see Figure E-8).
E-9
Figure E-8. Cleaning a Bulkhead Connector with a CLETOP Cleaning Stick STEP 5: Rotate the stick clockwise slowly and carefully to clean the bulkhead connector.

Caution: To prevent damage to the bulkhead sleeve, never rotate the stick counter-clockwise or move it in any other manner while it is inserted in the bulkhead connector.
Carefully remove the cleaning stick from the bulkhead connector. Break the cleaning stick to ensure that it is not reused, and discard it. Repeat Step 1 through Step 7 until you are able to insert a clean fiber end into the bulkhead connector without collecting new dirt on the fiber end. --STOP--
Reinsert the fiber end in the bulkhead connector.
E - 10
DATASHEETS
APPENDIX F DATASHEETS
The following datasheets are used to record site and network information for the customer. Please use the appropriate documents for the sub-network type.
FIELD VERIFICATION RESULTS REFERENCE GUIDE V4.2

This guide is designed to provide the information needed to enter optical test result data into the appropriate field verification results template. Add more Node Test Results worksheets as needed.
(1) Network Results

1.1 Node Information - Enter the Node Label, Site Name, Site Address, Node ID and PEM LAN IP address, Subnet, Gateway (specified by the customer for surveillance purposes if possible and changed via the ONLINE Metro CIT) and land line phone number (if available). 1.2 Span Loss Results - Enter the span loss results for each line fiber in the network. 'Expected' refers to the values used in the latest ONLINE Metro Designer Tool design. 'OTDR' refers to the span loss measured with an OTDR. 'ONLINE Metro CIT Measured' refers to the value given in the ONLINE Metro CIT span loss measurement (the 'From Node' refers to the node transmitting light). The provisioned value MUST equal the ONLINE Metro Designer Tool designed value. The 'Current Channel' count must be <= to the 'Planned Channel' count. Refer to 'Turn-up Guide' for more detail. 1.3 Circuit BER Test Results - Enter the BER test results for each circuit. The 'test signal' refers to the bit rate and protocol (for example, 'OC-48', 'STM-16', 'GbE' etc.). 'Test Duration' refers to the length of the test in hrs. /min. Test conditions refer to the signal flow path. For UPSR, test conditions are either 'Normal' or 'Switched' (switched referring to both direction of the circuit under switch). For BLSR, test conditions are either 'Normal' (no switches of any type), 'EQ Switch' for equipment switches in place at every node simultaneously, or 'RS Span X' where X is the number of the span the ring switch is executed upon. The spans are numbered starting with 'Span 1' on the east side of 'node 1' (i.e. the span to the east of the node with the lowest node ID) and they increment clockwise around the ring. The number of possible ring switches is equal to the number of nodes in the ring. Finally, for a ring to be complete, each test must 'Pass'. 1.4 MUX/ADM BER Test Results - MUX/ADM BER test results are reported on a card basis since not every circuit using MUX/ADM cards will have them on both sides of the circuit. The Node ID reported is for the node containing the MUX/ADM card whose results are being reported. The 'West/East' and 'Band/Channel' refer to the circuit the MUX/ADM output will enter. The 'MUX Type' should be reported as "SONET' for the SONET/SDH Mux or 'Data' for the data Mux. The number of tributary ports should be reported as 4-port or 8-port. A test should be reported for each tributary port on the card. The test signal used, test duration and results should also be reported.
F-1
DATASHEETS
(2) Node Results
2.1 DC Voltage Verification - Enter the voltage for the A and B power feeds for each shelf, the BDFB fuse size and the ONLINE Metro Platform fuse size. 2.2 Customer Fiber Location - Enter information for the line up (row of equipment), rack location, TX pad value (if applicable), the tray location within the rack and the position (ports) used for the line fibers at the customer fiber distribution panels (FDP). 2.3 Channel Power Levels - Enter the channel power levels measured with an OSA on both sides of each node. The monitor location reported should be either 'Preamp' for the preamp monitor port, 'Pre VGA' for the monitor port on VGAs used as a preamp, or 'Line Rx' (if preamp/pre VGA does not exist on that side of the node. Results should be entered on the same line as the wavelength measured using the OSA. If using the preamp monitor port or the line card Rx port, the channels will not correspond to WCI cards existing at the node the measurement was taken. West and East side values may be reported for the same wavelengths under some circumstances (during ring switches, for reused channels, Preeemptible circuits, nodes with protection side regens, etc.) For BLSRs, this must be done for normal working conditions, with equipment switches up at every node, and for each possible ring switch circumstance. Also, the circuit type must be reported as UCA for unprotected or WCA for protected circuits. If using a line card as the monitoring position, lockouts and/or forced switches must be placed around the ring to keep the channels from switching away from the measurement position. Signal to Noise Ratio (OSNR) - Enter the OSNRs measured with an OSA on each side of each node for each channel. The monitor location reported should be either 'Preamp' for the preamp monitor port, 'Pre VGA' for the monitor port on VGAs used as a preamp, or 'Line Rx' (if preamp/pre VGA does not exist on that side of the node. Results should be entered on the same line as the wavelength measured using the OSA. If using the preamp monitor port or the line card Rx port, the channels will not correspond to the WCI cards existing at the node the measurement was taken. West and East side values may be reported for the same wavelengths under some circumstances (during ring switches, for reused channels, Preeemptible circuits, nodes with protection side regens, etc.) For BLSRs, this must be done for normal working conditions, with equipment switches up at every node, and for each possible ring switch circumstance. Also, the circuit type must be reported as UCA for unprotected or WCA for protected circuits. If using a line card as the monitoring position, lockouts and/or forced switches must be placed around the ring to keep the channels from switching away from the measurement position. 2.4 Telect Tray Information - this should be completed for each tray in the node (3 trays per Telect shelf, top tray = tray 1 / middle tray = tray 2 / bottom tray = tray 3). Identify each tray as 'PATCH' or 'STORAGE'. For patch trays, report each bulkhead designation as 'interface' or 'pad'. Line fibers and tributary interfaces to the customer are both reported as 'interface' and only the interface section is completed. Any bulkhead used simply to accomplish padding internal to the system (all other circumstances) is reported as 'pad' and requires information about the card/port/ direction for each (X/Y) end of the bulkhead. X refers to the TX side of the Telect tray and Y the Rx side of the Telect tray for 'pad' terminations.
F-2
DATASHEETS
Node Test Results and Information

CUSTOMER: SITE NAME: NODE ID: TEST ENG: START: FINISH: LINE UP: RACK:
D.C. Voltage Verification (REFERENCE GUIDE 2.1)

VOLTAGE SOURCE Battery/Rectifier A Battery/Rectifier B BDFB FUSE SIZE (AMP) SHELF 1 SHELF 2 SHELF 3 SHELF 4 SHELF 5 SHELF 6 SHELF FUSE SIZE (AMP)
Customer Fiber Location (REFERENCE GUIDE 2.2)

FIBER West Tx West Rx East Tx East Rx LINE UP RACK TRAY POSITION LINE FIBER TX PAD (dB VALUE)
F-3
DATASHEETS

SITE NAME: NODE ID:
Channel Power Levels and OSNRs* ** ***(REFERENCE GUIDE 2.3)

TX BAND/ CHANNEL B1C1 EAST B1C1 WEST B1C2 EAST B1C2 WEST B1C3 EAST B1C3 WEST B2C1 EAST B2C1 WEST B2C2 EAST B2C2 WEST B2C3 EAST B2C3 WEST B3C1 EAST B3C1 WEST B3C2 EAST B3C2 WEST B3C3 EAST B3C3 WEST B4C1 EAST B4C1 WEST B4C2 EAST B4C2 WEST B4C3 EAST B4C3 WEST B5C1 EAST B5C1 WEST B5C2 EAST B5C2 WEST B5C3 EAST B5C3 WEST B6C1 EAST B6C1 WEST B6C2 EAST B6C2 WEST B6C3 EAST B6C3 WEST B7C1 EAST B7C1 WEST B7C2 EAST B7C2 WEST B7C3 EAST B7C3 WEST B8C1 EAST B8C1 WEST B8C2 EAST B8C2 WEST B8C3 EAST B8C3 WEST B9C1 EAST B9C1 WEST B9C2 EAST B9C2 WEST B9C3 EAST B9C3 WEST B10C1 EAST B10C1 WEST B10C2 EAST B10C2 WEST B10C3 EAST B10C3 WEST B11C1 EAST B11C1 WEST B11C2 EAST B11C2 WEST B11C3 EAST B11C3 WEST WAVELENGTH 1529.55nm 1529.55nm 1530.33nm 1530.33nm 1531.12nm 1531.12nm 1532.68nm 1532.68nm 1533.47nm 1533.47nm 1534.25nm 1534.25nm 1535.82nm 1535.82nm 1536.61nm 1536.61nm 1537.40nm 1537.40nm 1538.98nm 1538.98nm 1539.77nm 1539.77nm 1540.56nm 1540.56nm 1542.14nm 1542.14nm 1542.94nm 1542.94nm 1543.73nm 1543.73nm 1545.32nm 1545.32nm 1546.12nm 1546.12nm 1546.92nm 1546.92nm 1548.51nm 1548.51nm 1549.32nm 1549.32nm 1550.12nm 1550.12nm 1551.72nm 1551.72nm 1552.52nm 1552.52nm 1553.33nm 1553.33nm 1554.94nm 1554.94nm 1555.75nm 1555.75nm 1556.55nm 1556.55nm 1558.17nm 1558.17nm 1558.98nm 1558.98nm 1559.79nm 1559.79nm 1561.42nm 1561.42nm 1562.23nm 1562.23nm 1563.05nm 1563.05nm UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA CIRCUIT TYPE MONITOR LOCATION POWER (dBm) OSNR (dB) POWER (dBm) OSNR (dB) NORMAL EQ. SWITCH
*All power levels taken at the 'preamp' or 'preVGA' monitor port (trafffic entering the node then amplified) measure 16dB less than actual due to the 97.5%/2.5% monitor splitter. 'Line Rx' measurements should be taken with a 16dB pad between the line and the OSA. **Power levels for channels entering or leaving one side of the node should vary by <5 dB. For pass-through, UCA and WCA(under RS conditions) channels, power levels may be seen for the same channel on both sides of the node. ****All OSNRs must be >20 dB (>26 dB for OC-192) and should be within 2dB of the value predicted by OPTXNET. Values are unaffected by monitor port splitting ratio. OSNRs reported are calculated using the side of the spectral peak which has the highest noise level. For pass-through connections, reused UCA channels and WCAchannels (under ring switch conditions), OSNRs may be seen for the same wavelength on both sides of the node.
F-4

SITE NAME: NODE ID:
DATASHEETS

TX BAND/ CHANNEL B1C1 EAST B1C1 WEST B1C2 EAST B1C2 WEST B1C3 EAST B1C3 WEST B2C1 EAST B2C1 WEST B2C2 EAST B2C2 WEST B2C3 EAST B2C3 WEST B3C1 EAST B3C1 WEST B3C2 EAST B3C2 WEST B3C3 EAST B3C3 WEST B4C1 EAST B4C1 WEST B4C2 EAST B4C2 WEST B4C3 EAST B4C3 WEST B5C1 EAST B5C1 WEST B5C2 EAST B5C2 WEST B5C3 EAST B5C3 WEST B6C1 EAST B6C1 WEST B6C2 EAST B6C2 WEST B6C3 EAST B6C3 WEST B7C1 EAST B7C1 WEST B7C2 EAST B7C2 WEST B7C3 EAST B7C3 WEST B8C1 EAST B8C1 WEST B8C2 EAST B8C2 WEST B8C3 EAST B8C3 WEST B9C1 EAST B9C1 WEST B9C2 EAST B9C2 WEST B9C3 EAST B9C3 WEST B10C1 EAST B10C1 WEST B10C2 EAST B10C2 WEST B10C3 EAST B10C3 WEST B11C1 EAST B11C1 WEST B11C2 EAST B11C2 WEST B11C3 EAST B11C3 WEST WAVELENGTH 1529.55nm 1529.55nm 1530.33nm 1530.33nm 1531.12nm 1531.12nm 1532.68nm 1532.68nm 1533.47nm 1533.47nm 1534.25nm 1534.25nm 1535.82nm 1535.82nm 1536.61nm 1536.61nm 1537.40nm 1537.40nm 1538.98nm 1538.98nm 1539.77nm 1539.77nm 1540.56nm 1540.56nm 1542.14nm 1542.14nm 1542.94nm 1542.94nm 1543.73nm 1543.73nm 1545.32nm 1545.32nm 1546.12nm 1546.12nm 1546.92nm 1546.92nm 1548.51nm 1548.51nm 1549.32nm 1549.32nm 1550.12nm 1550.12nm 1551.72nm 1551.72nm 1552.52nm 1552.52nm 1553.33nm 1553.33nm 1554.94nm 1554.94nm 1555.75nm 1555.75nm 1556.55nm 1556.55nm 1558.17nm 1558.17nm 1558.98nm 1558.98nm 1559.79nm 1559.79nm 1561.42nm 1561.42nm 1562.23nm 1562.23nm 1563.05nm 1563.05nm *All power levels taken at the 'preamp' or 'preVGA' monitor port (trafffic entering the node then amplified) measure 16dB less than actual due to the 97.5%/2.5% monitor splitter. 'Line Rx' measurements should be taken with a 16dB pad between the line and the OSA. **Power levels for channels entering or leaving one side of the node should vary by <5 dB. For pass-through, UCA and WCA(under RS conditions) channels, power levels may be seen for the same channel on both sides of the node. ****All OSNRs must be >20 dB (>26 dB for OC-192) and should be within 2dB of the value predicted by OPTXNET. Values are unaffected by monitor port splitting ratio. OSNRs reported are calculated using the side of the spectral peak which has the highest noise level. For pass-through connections, reused UCA channels and WCAchannels (under ring switch conditions), OSNRs may be seen for the same wavelength on both sides of the node. UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA CIRCUIT TYPE MONITOR LOCATION POWER (dBm) OSNR (dB) POWER (dBm) OSNR (dB) POWER (dBm) OSNR (dB) RS SPAN 1 RS SPAN 2 RS SPAN 3
CIENA Communications
Proprietary and Confidential
Page 3 of 6
F-5
DATASHEETS
SITE NAME: NODE ID:
TELECT Tray Layout (REFERENCE GUIDE 2.4)

Shelf: 1 (CIENA MAIN sh) Tray: 1 (Top Tray)
Y-Side WEST W- Line Fiber to FDP RX W- Line Fiber to FDP TX W- Line Card-OSC B/H 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 E- CWDM BxCy RX E- BWDM BxCy RX W- WCI BxCy RX 3 2 1 ## dB ## dB ## dB W- CWDM BxCy TX W- BWDM BxCy TX W- CWDM BxCy TX E- CWDM BxCy TX E- BWDM BxCy TX E- CWDM BxCy TX PAD/INT INTERFACE INTERFACE ## dB X-Side WEST W-L Card/P-Amp In RX W-L Card/P-Amp Out TX W- OSC X-Side EAST E-L Card /P-Amp In RX E-L Card /P-Amp Out TX E- OSC B/H 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 ## dB ## dB ## dB W- CWDM BxCY RX W- BWDM BxCy RX E- WCI BxCy RX PAD/INT INTERFACE ## dB Y-SIDE EAST E- Line Fiber to FDP TX E- Line Card-OSC INTERFACE E- Line Fiber to FDP RX
FRONT LEFT (WEST) Shelf: 1 (CIENA MAIN sh) Tray: 2 (Middle Tray)
Y-Side WEST B/H 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PATCH or STORAGE
FRONT RIGHT (EAST)
PAD/INT
X-Side WEST
X-Side EAST
B/H 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15
PAD/INT
Y-SIDE EAST
INTERFACE INTERFACE
W- WCI BxCy TRIB RX W- WCI BxCy TRIB TX
E- WCI BxCy TRIB RX E- WCI BxCy TRIB TX
14 13
INTERFACE INTERFACE
FRONT LEFT (WEST) Shelf: 1 (CIENA MAIN sh) (Bottom Tray) Tray: 3
Y-Side WEST B/H 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PATCH or STORAGE
FRONT RIGHT (EAST)
PAD/INT
X-Side WEST
X-Side EAST
B/H 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
PAD/INT
Y-SIDE EAST
FRONT LEFT (WEST)
PATCH or STORAGE
FRONT RIGHT (EAST)
F-6
DATASHEETS
SITE NAME: NODE ID:

Shelf: 2 (CIENA EXP sh 1) Tray: 1 (Top Tray)
Y-Side WEST B/H 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 E- CWDM BxCy RX E- BWDM BxCy RX W- WCI BxCy RX 3 2 1 ## dB ## dB ## dB W- CWDM BxCy TX W- BWDM BxCy TX W- CWDM BxCy TX E- CWDM BxCy TX E- BWDM BxCy TX E- CWDM BxCy TX PAD/INT X-Side WEST X-Side EAST B/H 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 ## dB ## dB ## dB W- CWDM BxCY RX W- BWDM BxCy RX E- WCI BxCy RX PAD/INT Y-SIDE EAST
FRONT LEFT (WEST) Shelf: 2 (CIENA EXP sh 1) Tray: 2 (Middle Tray)

Y-Side WEST B/H 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PATCH or STORAGE
FRONT RIGHT (EAST)
PAD/INT
X-Side WEST
X-Side EAST
B/H 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15
PAD/INT
Y-SIDE EAST
INTERFACE INTERFACE
14 13
INTERFACE INTERFACE
FRONT LEFT (WEST) Shelf: 2 (CIENA EXP sh 1) Tray: 3 (Bottom Tray)

Y-Side WEST B/H 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PATCH or STORAGE
FRONT RIGHT (EAST)
PAD/INT
X-Side WEST
X-Side EAST
B/H 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
PAD/INT
Y-SIDE EAST
FRONT LEFT (WEST)
PATCH or STORAGE
FRONT RIGHT (EAST)
F-7
DATASHEETS
SITE NAME: NODE ID:


Y-Side WEST B/H 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PATCH or STORAGE
FRONT RIGHT (EAST)
PAD/INT
X-Side WEST
X-Side EAST
B/H 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15
PAD/INT
Y-SIDE EAST
INTERFACE INTERFACE
E- WCI BxCy TRIB RX E- WCI BxCy TRIB RX
14 13
INTERFACE INTERFACE

Y-Side WEST B/H 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PATCH or STORAGE
FRONT RIGHT (EAST)
PAD/INT
X-Side WEST
X-Side EAST
B/H 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
PAD/INT
Y-SIDE EAST
FRONT LEFT (WEST)
PATCH or STORAGE
FRONT RIGHT (EAST)
F-8
DATASHEETS
1201 Winterson Rd Linthicum, MD phone: 800-CIENA24
Network Overview
General Information
CUSTOMER NAME: NETWORK LOCATION: TYPE OF SYSTEM: COMPLETION DATE: SOFTWARE LOAD: SID:
Node Information (REFERENCE GUIDE 1.1)

NODE LABEL NODE ID SITE NAME SITE ADDRESS
NODE ID
PEM LAN IP
PEM LAN SUBNET
PEM LAN GATEWAY
Land Line Phone #
Span Loss Results (REFERENCE GUIDE 1.2)

A NODE WEST / NODE ID EAST TX / RX NODE ID Z NODE WEST / EAST TX / RX OPTXNET SPAN LOSS (dB) OTDR OPM CIT DISTANCE OTDR CURRENT CHANNEL COUNT *
EXPECTED MEASURED MEASURED MEASURED MEASURED PLANNED
OPTXNET Expected' must equal the provisioned value. CIT Measured (or 'OPM Measured' if 'CIT Measured' is not available or accurate) must be the same value or not less than 1dB of the designed value. * CHANNEL COUNT- 'Current' cannot exceed 'Planned'.
Page 1 of 3
F-9
DATASHEETS
Circuit BER Test Results (REFERENCE GUIDE 1.3)

A NODE WEST/ NODE ID EAST BAND/ CHANNEL NODE ID Z NODE WEST/ EAST BAND/ CHANNEL TEST SIGNAL RESULTS TEST DURATION PASS/ FAIL*
*A single bit error results in test failure.
F - 10
DATASHEETS
MUX/ADM BER Test Results (REFERENCE GUIDE 1.4)

NODE ID WEST/ EAST BAND/ CHANNEL MUX TYPE 4-PORT/ 8-PORT TRIBUTARY PORT # TEST SIGNAL TEST DURATION PASS/ FAIL*
*A single bit error results in test failure. Results are given on a 'card' basis and should be reported for each mux/adm card.
F - 11
DATASHEETS
Network Overview
General Information

NODE ID
PEM LAN IP
PEM LAN SUBNET
PEM LAN GATEWAY
Land Line Phone #

Page 1 of 3
F - 12

A NODE WEST/ NODE ID EAST BAND/ CHANNEL NODE ID Z NODE WEST/ EAST BAND/ CHANNEL TEST SIGNAL RESULTS TEST DURATION
DATASHEETS
PASS/ FAIL*
F - 13
DATASHEETS

F - 14
DATASHEETS

D.C. Voltage Verification (REFERENCE GUIDE 2.1)

VOLTAGE SOURCE Battery/Rectifier A Battery/Rectifier B BDFB FUSE SIZE (AMP) SHELF 1 SHELF 2 SHELF 3 SHELF 4 SHELF 5 SHELF 6 SHELF FUSE SIZE (AMP)

Page 1 of 8
F - 15
DATASHEETS

SITE NAME: NODE ID:

TX BAND/ CHANNEL B1C1 EAST B1C1 WEST B1C2 EAST B1C2 WEST B1C3 EAST B1C3 WEST B2C1 EAST B2C1 WEST B2C2 EAST B2C2 WEST B2C3 EAST B2C3 WEST B3C1 EAST B3C1 WEST B3C2 EAST B3C2 WEST B3C3 EAST B3C3 WEST B4C1 EAST B4C1 WEST B4C2 EAST B4C2 WEST B4C3 EAST B4C3 WEST B5C1 EAST B5C1 WEST B5C2 EAST B5C2 WEST B5C3 EAST B5C3 WEST B6C1 EAST B6C1 WEST B6C2 EAST B6C2 WEST B6C3 EAST B6C3 WEST B7C1 EAST B7C1 WEST B7C2 EAST B7C2 WEST B7C3 EAST B7C3 WEST B8C1 EAST B8C1 WEST B8C2 EAST B8C2 WEST B8C3 EAST B8C3 WEST B9C1 EAST B9C1 WEST B9C2 EAST B9C2 WEST B9C3 EAST B9C3 WEST B10C1 EAST B10C2 EAST B10C3 EAST B11C1 EAST B11C2 EAST B11C3 EAST WAVELENGTH 1529.55nm 1529.55nm 1530.33nm 1530.33nm 1531.12nm 1531.12nm 1532.68nm 1532.68nm 1533.47nm 1533.47nm 1534.25nm 1534.25nm 1535.82nm 1535.82nm 1536.61nm 1536.61nm 1537.40nm 1537.40nm 1538.98nm 1538.98nm 1539.77nm 1539.77nm 1540.56nm 1540.56nm 1542.14nm 1542.14nm 1542.94nm 1542.94nm 1543.73nm 1543.73nm 1545.32nm 1545.32nm 1546.12nm 1546.12nm 1546.92nm 1546.92nm 1548.51nm 1548.51nm 1549.32nm 1549.32nm 1550.12nm 1550.12nm 1551.72nm 1551.72nm 1552.52nm 1552.52nm 1553.33nm 1553.33nm 1554.94nm 1554.94nm 1555.75nm 1555.75nm 1556.55nm 1556.55nm 1558.17nm 1558.98nm 1559.79nm 1561.42nm 1562.23nm 1563.05nm UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA CIRCUIT TYPE MONITOR LOCATION POWER (dBm) OSNR (dB) POWER (dBm) OSNR (dB) POWER (dBm) OSNR (dB) POWER (dBm) OSNR (dB) NORMAL EQ. SWITCH RS SPAN 1 RS SPAN 2
B10C1 WEST 1558.17nm B10C2 WEST 1558.98nm B10C3 WEST 1559.79nm B11C1 WEST 1561.42nm B11C2 WEST 1562.23nm B11C3 WEST 1563.05nm *All power levels taken at the 'preamp' or 'preVGA' monitor port (trafffic entering the node then amplified) measure 16dB less than actual due to the 97.5%/2.5% monitor splitter. 'Line Rx' measurements should be taken with a 16dB pad between the line and the OSA. **Power levels for channels entering or leaving one side of the node should vary by <5 dB. For pass-through, UCA and WCA(under RS conditions) channels, power levels may be seen for the same channel on both sides of the node. ****All OSNRs must be >20 dB (>26 dB for OC-192) and should be within 2dB of the value predicted by OPTXNET. Values are unaffected by monitor port splitting ratio. OSNRs reported are calculated using the side of the spectral peak which has the highest noise level. For pass-through connections, reused UCA channels and WCAchannels (under ring switch conditions), OSNRs may be seen for the same wavelength on both sides of the node.
Page 2 of 8
F - 16

SITE NAME: NODE ID:
DATASHEETS

TX BAND/ CHANNEL B1C1 EAST B1C1 WEST B1C2 EAST B1C2 WEST B1C3 EAST B1C3 WEST B2C1 EAST B2C1 WEST B2C2 EAST B2C2 WEST B2C3 EAST B2C3 WEST B3C1 EAST B3C1 WEST B3C2 EAST B3C2 WEST B3C3 EAST B3C3 WEST B4C1 EAST B4C1 WEST B4C2 EAST B4C2 WEST B4C3 EAST B4C3 WEST B5C1 EAST B5C1 WEST B5C2 EAST B5C2 WEST B5C3 EAST B5C3 WEST B6C1 EAST B6C1 WEST B6C2 EAST B6C2 WEST B6C3 EAST B6C3 WEST B7C1 EAST B7C1 WEST B7C2 EAST B7C2 WEST B7C3 EAST B7C3 WEST B8C1 EAST B8C1 WEST B8C2 EAST B8C2 WEST B8C3 EAST B8C3 WEST B9C1 EAST B9C1 WEST B9C2 EAST B9C2 WEST B9C3 EAST B9C3 WEST B10C1 EAST B10C2 EAST B10C3 EAST B11C1 EAST B11C2 EAST B11C3 EAST WAVELENGTH 1529.55nm 1529.55nm 1530.33nm 1530.33nm 1531.12nm 1531.12nm 1532.68nm 1532.68nm 1533.47nm 1533.47nm 1534.25nm 1534.25nm 1535.82nm 1535.82nm 1536.61nm 1536.61nm 1537.40nm 1537.40nm 1538.98nm 1538.98nm 1539.77nm 1539.77nm 1540.56nm 1540.56nm 1542.14nm 1542.14nm 1542.94nm 1542.94nm 1543.73nm 1543.73nm 1545.32nm 1545.32nm 1546.12nm 1546.12nm 1546.92nm 1546.92nm 1548.51nm 1548.51nm 1549.32nm 1549.32nm 1550.12nm 1550.12nm 1551.72nm 1551.72nm 1552.52nm 1552.52nm 1553.33nm 1553.33nm 1554.94nm 1554.94nm 1555.75nm 1555.75nm 1556.55nm 1556.55nm 1558.17nm 1558.98nm 1559.79nm 1561.42nm 1562.23nm 1563.05nm UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA CIRCUIT TYPE MONITOR LOCATION POWER (dBm) OSNR (dB) POWER (dBm) OSNR (dB) POWER (dBm) OSNR (dB) RS SPAN 3 RS SPAN 4 RS SPAN 5
B10C1 WEST 1558.17nm B10C2 WEST 1558.98nm B10C3 WEST 1559.79nm B11C1 WEST 1561.42nm B11C2 WEST 1562.23nm B11C3 WEST 1563.05nm *All power levels taken at the 'preamp' or 'preVGA' monitor port (trafffic entering the node then amplified) measure 16dB less than actual due to the 97.5%/2.5% monitor splitter. 'Line Rx' measurements should be taken with a 16dB pad between the line and the OSA. **Power levels for channels entering or leaving one side of the node should vary by <5 dB. For pass-through, UCA and WCA(under RS conditions) channels, power levels may be seen for the same channel on both sides of the node. ****All OSNRs must be >20 dB (>26 dB for OC-192) and should be within 2dB of the value predicted by OPTXNET. Values are unaffected by monitor port splitting ratio. OSNRs reported are calculated using the side of the spectral peak which has the highest noise level. For pass-through connections, reused UCA channels and WCAchannels (under ring switch conditions), OSNRs may be seen for the same wavelength on both sides of the node.
Page 3 of 8
F - 17
DATASHEETS

SITE NAME: NODE ID:

TX BAND/ CHANNEL B1C1 EAST B1C1 WEST B1C2 EAST B1C2 WEST B1C3 EAST B1C3 WEST B2C1 EAST B2C1 WEST B2C2 EAST B2C2 WEST B2C3 EAST B2C3 WEST B3C1 EAST B3C1 WEST B3C2 EAST B3C2 WEST B3C3 EAST B3C3 WEST B4C1 EAST B4C1 WEST B4C2 EAST B4C2 WEST B4C3 EAST B4C3 WEST B5C1 EAST B5C1 WEST B5C2 EAST B5C2 WEST B5C3 EAST B5C3 WEST B6C1 EAST B6C1 WEST B6C2 EAST B6C2 WEST B6C3 EAST B6C3 WEST B7C1 EAST B7C1 WEST B7C2 EAST B7C2 WEST B7C3 EAST B7C3 WEST B8C1 EAST B8C1 WEST B8C2 EAST B8C2 WEST B8C3 EAST B8C3 WEST B9C1 EAST B9C1 WEST B9C2 EAST B9C2 WEST B9C3 EAST B9C3 WEST B10C1 EAST B10C2 EAST B10C3 EAST B11C1 EAST B11C2 EAST B11C3 EAST WAVELENGTH 1529.55nm 1529.55nm 1530.33nm 1530.33nm 1531.12nm 1531.12nm 1532.68nm 1532.68nm 1533.47nm 1533.47nm 1534.25nm 1534.25nm 1535.82nm 1535.82nm 1536.61nm 1536.61nm 1537.40nm 1537.40nm 1538.98nm 1538.98nm 1539.77nm 1539.77nm 1540.56nm 1540.56nm 1542.14nm 1542.14nm 1542.94nm 1542.94nm 1543.73nm 1543.73nm 1545.32nm 1545.32nm 1546.12nm 1546.12nm 1546.92nm 1546.92nm 1548.51nm 1548.51nm 1549.32nm 1549.32nm 1550.12nm 1550.12nm 1551.72nm 1551.72nm 1552.52nm 1552.52nm 1553.33nm 1553.33nm 1554.94nm 1554.94nm 1555.75nm 1555.75nm 1556.55nm 1556.55nm 1558.17nm 1558.98nm 1559.79nm 1561.42nm 1562.23nm 1563.05nm UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA CIRCUIT TYPE MONITOR LOCATION POWER (dBm) OSNR (dB) POWER (dBm) OSNR (dB) POWER (dBm) OSNR (dB) RS SPAN 6 RS SPAN 7 RS SPAN 8
B10C1 WEST 1558.17nm B10C2 WEST 1558.98nm B10C3 WEST 1559.79nm B11C1 WEST 1561.42nm B11C2 WEST 1562.23nm B11C3 WEST 1563.05nm *All power levels taken at the 'preamp' or 'preVGA' monitor port (trafffic entering the node then amplified) measure 16dB less than actual due to the 97.5%/2.5% monitor splitter. 'Line Rx' measurements should be taken with a 16dB pad between the line and the OSA. **Power levels for channels entering or leaving one side of the node should vary by <5 dB. For pass-through, UCA and WCA(under RS conditions) channels, power levels may be seen for the same channel on both sides of the node. ****All OSNRs must be >20 dB (>26 dB for OC-192) and should be within 2dB of the value predicted by OPTXNET. Values are unaffected by monitor port splitting ratio. OSNRs reported are calculated using the side of the spectral peak which has the highest noise level. For pass-through connections, reused UCA channels and WCAchannels (under ring switch conditions), OSNRs may be seen for the same wavelength on both sides of the node and are reported as West/East side.
Page 5 of 8
A Communications
Page 4 of 7
F - 18
DATASHEETS
SITE NAME: NODE ID:

Shelf: 1 (CIENA MAIN sh) (Top Tray) Tray: 1
Y-Side WEST W- Line Fiber to FDP RX W- Line Fiber to FDP TX W- Line Card-OSC B/H 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 E- CWDM BxCy RX E- BWDM BxCy RX W- WCI BxCy RX 3 2 1 ## dB ## dB ## dB W- CWDM BxCy TX W- BWDM BxCy TX W- CWDM BxCy TX E- CWDM BxCy TX E- BWDM BxCy TX E- CWDM BxCy TX PAD/INT INTERFACE INTERFACE ## dB X-Side WEST W-L Card/P-Amp In RX W-L Card/P-Amp Out TX W- OSC X-Side EAST E-L Card /P-Amp In RX E-L Card /P-Amp Out TX E- OSC B/H 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 ## dB ## dB ## dB W- CWDM BxCY RX W- BWDM BxCy RX E- WCI BxCy RX PAD/INT INTERFACE INTERFACE ## dB Y-SIDE EAST E- Line Fiber to FDP RX E- Line Fiber to FDP TX E- Line Card-OSC
Y-Side WEST B/H 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PATCH or STORAGE
FRONT RIGHT (EAST)
PAD/INT
X-Side WEST
X-Side EAST
B/H 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15
PAD/INT
Y-SIDE EAST
INTERFACE INTERFACE
14 13
INTERFACE INTERFACE
FRONT LEFT (WEST) Shelf: 1 (CIENA MAIN sh) (Bottom Tray) Tray: 3
Y-Side WEST B/H 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PATCH or STORAGE
FRONT RIGHT (EAST)
PAD/INT
X-Side WEST
X-Side EAST
B/H 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
PAD/INT
Y-SIDE EAST
FRONT LEFT (WEST)
PATCH or STORAGE
FRONT RIGHT (EAST)
Page 6 OF 8
F - 19
DATASHEETS
SITE NAME: NODE ID:

Shelf: 2 (CIENA EXP sh 1) (Top Tray) Tray: 1

Y-Side WEST B/H 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PATCH or STORAGE
FRONT RIGHT (EAST)
PAD/INT
X-Side WEST
X-Side EAST
B/H 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15
PAD/INT
Y-SIDE EAST
INTERFACE INTERFACE
14 13
INTERFACE INTERFACE
FRONT LEFT (WEST) Shelf: 2 (CIENA EXP sh 1) (Bottom Tray) Tray: 3

Y-Side WEST B/H 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PATCH or STORAGE
FRONT RIGHT (EAST)
PAD/INT
X-Side WEST
X-Side EAST
B/H 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
PAD/INT
Y-SIDE EAST
FRONT LEFT (WEST)
PATCH or STORAGE
FRONT RIGHT (EAST)
Page 7 OF 8
F - 20
DATASHEETS
SITE NAME: NODE ID:

Shelf: 3 (CIENA EXP sh 2) (Top Tray) Tray: 1
FRONT LEFT (WEST) Shelf: 3 (CIENA EXP sh 2) (Middle Tray) Tray: 2

Y-Side WEST B/H 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PATCH or STORAGE
FRONT RIGHT (EAST)
PAD/INT
X-Side WEST
X-Side EAST
B/H 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15
PAD/INT
Y-SIDE EAST
INTERFACE INTERFACE
14 13
INTERFACE INTERFACE

Y-Side WEST B/H 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PATCH or STORAGE
FRONT RIGHT (EAST)
PAD/INT
X-Side WEST
X-Side EAST
B/H 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
PAD/INT
Y-SIDE EAST
FRONT LEFT (WEST)
PATCH or STORAGE
FRONT RIGHT (EAST)
Page 8 OF 8
F - 21
DATASHEETS
Network Overview
General Information

NODE ID
PEM LAN IP
PEM LAN SUBNET
PEM LAN GATEWAY
Land Line Phone #

A NODE WEST / NODE ID EAST TX / RX NODE ID Z NODE WEST / EAST TX / RX OPTXNET SPAN LOSS (dB) OTDR OPM CIT DISTANCE OTDR PLANNED CURRENT CHANNEL COUNT *
EXPECTED MEASURED MEASURED MEASURED MEASURED
OPTXNET Expected' must equal the provisioned value. CIT Measured (or 'OPM Measured' if 'CIT Measured' is not available or accurate) must be the same value or not less than 1dB of the designed value. * CHANNEL COUNT- 'Current' cannot exceed 'Planned'. CIENA Communications Proprietary and Confidential Page 1 of 3
F - 22
DATASHEETS
Circuit BER Test Results

A NODE WEST/ NODE ID EAST BAND/ CHANNEL NODE ID Z NODE WEST/ EAST
(REFERENCE GUIDE 1.3) RESULTS BAND/ CHANNEL TEST SIGNAL TEST DURATION PASS/ FAIL*
Page 2 of 3
F - 23
DATASHEETS
MUX/ADM BER Test Results

NODE ID WEST/ EAST BAND/ CHANNEL MUX TYPE
(REFERENCE GUIDE 1.4) 4-PORT/ 8-PORT TRIBUTARY PORT # TEST SIGNAL TEST DURATION PASS/ FAIL*
Page 3 of 3
F - 24
DATASHEETS

D.C. Voltage Verification

VOLTAGE SOURCE Battery/Rectifier A Battery/Rectifier B BDFB FUSE SIZE (AMP) SHELF 1 SHELF 2 SHELF 3
(REFERENCE GUIDE 2.1)
SHELF 4
SHELF 5
SHELF 6
SHELF FUSE SIZE (AMP)

Page 1 of 5
F - 25
DATASHEETS
SITE NAME: NODE ID:
Channel Power Levels and OSNR (REFERENCE GUIDE 2.3 )

BAND/ CHANNEL B1C1 B1C2 B1C3 B2C1 B2C2 B2C3 B3C1 B3C2 B3C3 B4C1 B4C2 B4C3 B5C1 B5C2 B5C3 B6C1 B6C2 B6C3 B7C1 B7C2 B7C3 B8C1 B8C2 B8C3 B9C1 B9C2 B9C3 B10C1 B10C2 B10C3 B11C1 B11C2 B11C3 TX WAVELENGTH 1529.55nm 1530.33nm 1531.12nm 1532.68nm 1533.47nm 1534.25nm 1535.82nm 1536.61nm 1537.40nm 1538.98nm 1539.77nm 1540.56nm 1542.14nm 1542.94nm 1543.73nm 1545.32nm 1546.12nm 1546.92nm 1548.51nm 1549.32nm 1550.12nm 1551.72nm 1552.52nm 1553.33nm 1554.94nm 1555.75nm 1556.55nm 1558.17nm 1558.98nm 1559.79nm 1561.42nm 1562.23nm 1563.05nm CIRCUIT TYPE UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA MONITOR LOCATION CHANNEL POWER(dBm)* WEST EAST OSNR(dB)** WEST EAST
*All power levels taken at the 'preamp' or 'preVGA' monitor port (trafffic entering the node then amplified) measure 16dB less than actual due to the 97.5%/2.5% monitor splitter. 'Line Rx' measurements should be taken with a 16dB pad between the line and the OSA. Power levels for channels entering or leaving one side of the node should vary by <5dB. **All OSNRs must be >20 dB (>26 dB for OC-192) and within 2dB of the value predicted by OPTXNET. Values are unaffected by monitor port splitting ratio.
Page 2 of 5
F - 26
DATASHEETS
SITE NAME: NODE ID:

Y-Side WEST W- Line Fiber to FDP RX W- Line Fiber to FDP TX W- Line Card-OSC B/H 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 E- CWDM BxCy RX E- BWDM BxCy RX W- WCI BxCy RX 3 2 1 ## dB ## dB ## dB W- CWDM BxCy TX W- BWDM BxCy TX W- CWDM BxCy TX E- CWDM BxCy TX E- BWDM BxCy TX E- CWDM BxCy TX PAD/INT X-Side WEST X-Side EAST E-L Card /P-Amp In RX E- OSC B/H 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 ## dB ## dB ## dB W- CWDM BxCY RX W- BWDM BxCy RX E- WCI BxCy RX PAD/INT Y-SIDE EAST INTERFACE W-L Card/P-Amp In RX ## dB W- OSC INTERFACE E- Line Fiber to FDP RX INTERFACE E- Line Fiber to FDP TX ## dB E- Line Card-OSC
INTERFACE W-L Card/P-Amp Out TX E-L Card /P-Amp Out TX
Y-Side WEST B/H 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PATCH or STORAGE
FRONT RIGHT (EAST)
PAD/INT
X-Side WEST
X-Side EAST
B/H 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15
PAD/INT
Y-SIDE EAST
INTERFACE W- WCI BxCy TRIB RX INTERFACE W- WCI BxCy TRIB TX
14 13
INTERFACE INTERFACE
FRONT LEFT (WEST) Shelf: 1 (CIENA MAIN sh) Tray: 3 (Bottom Tray)
Y-Side WEST B/H 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PATCH or STORAGE
FRONT RIGHT (EAST)
PAD/INT
X-Side WEST
X-Side EAST
B/H 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
PAD/INT
Y-SIDE EAST
FRONT LEFT (WEST)
PATCH or STORAGE
FRONT RIGHT (EAST)
Page 3 of 5
F - 27
DATASHEETS
SITE NAME: NODE ID:


Y-Side WEST B/H 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PATCH or STORAGE
FRONT RIGHT (EAST)
PAD/INT
X-Side WEST
X-Side EAST
B/H 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15
PAD/INT
Y-SIDE EAST
14 13
INTERFACE INTERFACE

Y-Side WEST B/H 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PATCH or STORAGE
FRONT RIGHT (EAST)
PAD/INT
X-Side WEST
X-Side EAST
B/H 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
PAD/INT
Y-SIDE EAST
FRONT LEFT (WEST)
PATCH or STORAGE
FRONT RIGHT (EAST)
Page 4 of 5
F - 28
DATASHEETS
SITE NAME: NODE ID:


Y-Side WEST B/H 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PATCH or STORAGE
FRONT RIGHT (EAST)
PAD/INT
X-Side WEST
X-Side EAST
B/H 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15
PAD/INT
Y-SIDE EAST
14 13
INTERFACE INTERFACE

Y-Side WEST B/H 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PATCH or STORAGE
FRONT RIGHT (EAST)
PAD/INT
X-Side WEST
X-Side EAST
B/H 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
PAD/INT
Y-SIDE EAST
FRONT LEFT (WEST)
PATCH or STORAGE
FRONT RIGHT (EAST)
Page 5 of 5
F - 29
DATASHEETS
Network Overview
General Information

NODE ID
PEM LAN IP
PEM LAN SUBNET
PEM LAN GATEWAY
Land Line Phone #

Page 1 of 3
F - 30
DATASHEETS

A NODE WEST/ NODE ID EAST BAND/ CHANNEL NODE ID Z NODE WEST/ EAST BAND/ CHANNEL TEST SIGNAL RESULTS TEST DURATION PASS/ FAIL*
F - 31
DATASHEETS

F - 32
DATASHEETS

D.C. Voltage Verification

VOLTAGE SOURCE Battery/Rectifier A Battery/Rectifier B BDFB FUSE SIZE (AMP) SHELF 1 SHELF 2 SHELF 3
(REFERENCE GUIDE 2.1)
SHELF 4
SHELF 5
SHELF 6
SHELF FUSE SIZE (AMP)

Page 1 of 5
F - 33
DATASHEETS
SITE NAME: NODE ID:
Channel Power Levels and OSNR (REFERENCE GUIDE 2.3 )

BAND/ CHANNEL B1C1 B1C2 B1C3 B2C1 B2C2 B2C3 B3C1 B3C2 B3C3 B4C1 B4C2 B4C3 B5C1 B5C2 B5C3 B6C1 B6C2 B6C3 B7C1 B7C2 B7C3 B8C1 B8C2 B8C3 B9C1 B9C2 B9C3 B10C1 B10C2 B10C3 B11C1 B11C2 B11C3 TX WAVELENGTH 1529.55nm 1530.33nm 1531.12nm 1532.68nm 1533.47nm 1534.25nm 1535.82nm 1536.61nm 1537.40nm 1538.98nm 1539.77nm 1540.56nm 1542.14nm 1542.94nm 1543.73nm 1545.32nm 1546.12nm 1546.92nm 1548.51nm 1549.32nm 1550.12nm 1551.72nm 1552.52nm 1553.33nm 1554.94nm 1555.75nm 1556.55nm 1558.17nm 1558.98nm 1559.79nm 1561.42nm 1562.23nm 1563.05nm CIRCUIT TYPE UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA UCA MONITOR LOCATION CHANNEL POWER(dBm)* WEST EAST OSNR(dB)** WEST EAST
*All power levels taken at the 'preamp' or 'preVGA' monitor port (trafffic entering the node then amplified) measure 16dB less than actual due to the 97.5%/2.5% monitor splitter. 'Line Rx' measurements should be taken with a 16dB pad between the line and the OSA. Power levels for channels entering or leaving one side of the node should vary by <5dB. **All OSNRs must be >20 dB (>26 dB for OC-192) and within 2dB of the value predicted by OPTXNET. Values are unaffected by monitor port splitting ratio.
Page 2 of 5
F - 34
DATASHEETS
SITE NAME: NODE ID:

Y-Side WEST W- Line Fiber to FDP RX W- Line Fiber to FDP TX W- Line Card-OSC B/H 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 E- CWDM BxCy RX E- BWDM BxCy RX W- WCI BxCy RX 3 2 1 ## dB ## dB ## dB W- CWDM BxCy TX W- BWDM BxCy TX W- CWDM BxCy TX E- CWDM BxCy TX E- BWDM BxCy TX E- CWDM BxCy TX PAD/INT X-Side WEST X-Side EAST E-L Card /P-Amp In RX E- OSC B/H 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 ## dB ## dB ## dB W- CWDM BxCY RX W- BWDM BxCy RX E- WCI BxCy RX PAD/INT Y-SIDE EAST INTERFACE W-L Card/P-Amp In RX ## dB W- OSC INTERFACE E- Line Fiber to FDP RX INTERFACE E- Line Fiber to FDP TX ## dB E- Line Card-OSC
INTERFACE W-L Card/P-Amp Out TX E-L Card /P-Amp Out TX
Y-Side WEST B/H 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PATCH or STORAGE
FRONT RIGHT (EAST)
PAD/INT
X-Side WEST
X-Side EAST
B/H 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15
PAD/INT
Y-SIDE EAST
14 13
INTERFACE INTERFACE
Y-Side WEST B/H 12 11 10 9 8 7
PATCH or STORAGE
FRONT RIGHT (EAST)
PAD/INT
X-Side WEST
X-Side EAST
B/H 24 23 22 21 20 19
PAD/INT
Y-SIDE EAST
F - 35
DATASHEETS
SITE NAME: NODE ID:


Y-Side WEST B/H 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PATCH or STORAGE
FRONT RIGHT (EAST)
PAD/INT
X-Side WEST
X-Side EAST
B/H 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15
PAD/INT
Y-SIDE EAST
14 13
INTERFACE INTERFACE

Y-Side WEST B/H 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PATCH or STORAGE
FRONT RIGHT (EAST)
PAD/INT
X-Side WEST
X-Side EAST
B/H 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
PAD/INT
Y-SIDE EAST
FRONT LEFT (WEST)
PATCH or STORAGE
FRONT RIGHT (EAST)
Page 4 of 5
F - 36
DATASHEETS
SITE NAME: NODE ID:


Y-Side WEST B/H 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PATCH or STORAGE
FRONT RIGHT (EAST)
PAD/INT
X-Side WEST
X-Side EAST
B/H 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15
PAD/INT
Y-SIDE EAST
14 13
INTERFACE INTERFACE

Y-Side WEST B/H 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PATCH or STORAGE
FRONT RIGHT (EAST)
PAD/INT
X-Side WEST
X-Side EAST
B/H 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
PAD/INT
Y-SIDE EAST
FRONT LEFT (WEST)
PATCH or STORAGE
FRONT RIGHT (EAST)
Page 5 of 5
F - 37
DATASHEETS
F - 38
I
INDEX
INDEX G-H
Ground Connection 3-10 Grounding Requirements 2-1 Guidelines troubleshooting 7-1, A-3
A-B
ACO Card C-3 add GRDM 6-60 add STMX 6-25, 6-27 Air Inlet Filter 3-15, 3-16 Alarm Card C-2 Alarm LED Card C-4
I-L
Installing ACO Card 3-14 Installing Alarm Card C-2 Installing Alarm LED Card C-4 Installing Cooling Fans 3-14 Installing CPs 4-1 Installing Fiber Exit Guides 5-1 Installing Fiber Management Tray Unit 5-1 Installing Power Entry Cards C-1 Installing Power LED Card C-4 installing shelf 3-5
C-D
Circuit Breaker Panel 3-4 Cleaning and connecting a fiber end E-3 Cleaning fiber ends E-1 CLI diagnostics running 7-18 Compliance site 6-1 Confirming CPs are provisioned 7-1 Confirming the CP boot-up 7-23 Connecting Cables 5-1 Cooling Fans 3-14 CP boot-up confirming 7-23 CP Positions 4-1
M-N
Maintaining fibers E-1 Mechanical Installation 3-4
O
Overview 6-1
E
electrical cables 3-3 Environmental Requirements 2-1
P-Q
Plenum 3-13 Power Entry Cards C-1 Power LED Card C-4 power requirements 2-1 Powering Shelves 3-12
F
Fibers E-1 cleaning fibers/bulkhead connectors E-1 handling and working with E-1 Flow task 6-1 Fuse 3-4
R
Rack Requirements 2-1 Running CLI diagnostics 7-18
I-1
I
INDEX S
Shelf Backplane Connectors 4-1 shelf installation 3-5 Slot Assignments 4-2 System Ground 3-4
T
Task flow 6-1 Test Equipment 1-7 Troubleshooting guidelines 7-1, A-3 Troubleshooting guidelines 7-1
U
Unpacking 2-1
V
Verify Site Compliance 6-1
W-Z
WCI types 6-23, 6-25, 6-29
I-2

009-2003-294 Install Test and Turn Up PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

009-2003-294 Install Test and Turn Up PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

MULTISERVICE DENSE WAVE DIVISION MULTIPLEXING (DWDM) TRANSPORT PLATFORM

INSTALLATION, TURN-UP, AND TEST MANUAL

CIENA CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

CIENA CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY

ONLINE Metro Platform

Jurisdiction Federal, US Federal, US International International International

Type Regulation Guidelines Standard Standard Standard

LASER RADIATION EXPOSURE

ONLINE Metro Platform

Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC): Interference

Environmental Impact Statement

Telcordia Document Standards

ONLINE Metro Platform RELEASE NOTES AND DOCUMENT UPDATES

September 2003 Third Printing

ONLINE Metro Platform

DOCUMENT ORDERING INFORMATION

ADDITIONAL PRODUCT INFORMATION

ONLINE Metro Platform

ONLINE Metro Platform

ONLINE Metro Platform

ONLINE Metro Platform

ONLINE Metro Platform

ONLINE Metro Platform

ONLINE Metro Platform

ONLINE Metro Platform

ONLINE Metro Platform

ONLINE Metro Platform

ONLINE Metro Platform

ONLINE Metro Platform

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

ONLINE Metro Platform

INTRODUCTION HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

ONLINE Metro Platform

Site Survey Overview

ONLINE Metro Platform GENERAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Voltage Precaution RISK OF PERSONAL INJURY

General Static Electricity Precautions

Risk of Damage to Circuit Packs and Backplanes

ONLINE Metro Platform

ONLINE Metro Platform

General Optical Fiber Handling Precautions

General Fiber Break and Damaged Fiber Precautions

General Circuit Pack Handling Precautions

Risk of Damage to Circuit Packs and Backplanes

Risk of Damage to Circuit Packs and Backplanes

ONLINE Metro Platform

General Circuit Pack Storage Precautions

Operating Temperature Refer to Telecordia Generic Requirements GR-63-CORE, Section 4.1.2.

Relative Humidity Refer to Telecordia Generic Requirements GR-63-CORE, Section 4.1.2.

Storage Temperature Refer to Telecordia Generic Requirements GR-63-CORE, Section 4.4.4.

Warnings and Cautions

Environmental Impact Statement

ONLINE Metro Platform TEST EQUIPMENT

ONLINE Metro Platform

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

ONLINE Metro Platform

CHAPTER 2 SITE PREPARATION

POWER AND GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS

UNPACKING AND VERIFYING SYSTEM COMPONENTS

Risk of Damage to Circuit Packs and Backplanes

ONLINE Metro Platform

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

ONLINE Metro Platform